HomeMy WebLinkAbout033249 - Construction-Related - Contract - Prime Construction Company CITY SECRETARY IryTHISCOPY FOR:go ,
CONTRACT NO.
CONTUCIOR
THE CITY OF FORT WORTH TEXAS
� a`= CONTRACroR'S BONDING CO.
CITY SECREUIRY
-
TPW-2005-08 —CITY MANAGER'S OFFICE
ENGINEERING DIV.
- T/PW-FILE COPY
BOTANIC GARDENS
GREENHOUSE FACILITY F.o-.KT- -,.%RTH
77
MIKE MONCRIEF CHARLES BOSWELL
MAYOR CITY MANAGER
Robert Goode, P.E.
Director, Transportation and Public Works
Randle Harwood, Acting Director
Parks and Community Services Department
GSBS Batenhorst, Inc.
14 September 2005
ORIGINAL
OFFICIAL 11COID
Cirf Imff
Fn �
City of Fort Worth, Texas
Mayor and Council Communication
COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 1/19/2006 -Ordinance No. 16771-01-2006 & 16772-01-2006 &
16773-01-2006 & 16774-01-2006
DATE: Thursday, January 19, 2006
LOG NAME: 20BOTANICGARD REFERENCE NO.: C-21258
SUBJECT:
Authorize Acceptance of Donations from Fort Worth Botanical Society, Fort Worth Garden Club and
- Amon G. Carter Foundation; Adopt Appropriation Ordinances; and Authorize Execution of Contract
with Prime Construction Company for the Construction of a Greenhouse at the Botanic Garden
RECOMMENDATION:
It is recommended that the City Council:
1. Authorize the City Manager to accept a donation of $200,000 from the Fort Worth Botanical Society for
the construction of the Botanic Garden Production Greenhouse Improvements;
2. Authorize the City Manager to accept a donation of $200,000 from the Fort Worth Garden Club for the
construction of the Botanic Garden Production Greenhouse Improvements;
3. Authorize the City Manager to accept a donation of $100,000 from the Amon G. Carter Foundation for
the construction of the Botanic Garden Production Greenhouse Improvements;
4. Adopt the attached appropriation ordinance increasing estimated receipts and appropriations in the
Special Trust Fund, Botanic Garden Parking Lot in the amount of$143,663.49; Special Trust Fund, Botanic
Garden Security Patrol in the amount of$6,886.45; and Special Trust Fund, Botanic Garden Plant Material
in the amount of$302.70, from available funds;
5. Authorize the transfer of $400,000.00 from the Special Trust Fund to the Park and Recreation
Improvements Fund to fund the construction of the Botanic Garden Production Greenhouse Improvements;
6. Adopt the attached appropriation ordinance increasing estimated receipts and appropriations in the Park
and Recreation Improvements Fund by$900,000.00 from available funds; and
7. Authorize the City Manager to execute a construction contract, in the amount of $1,131,033, with Prime
Construction Company for the construction of the Botanic Garden Production Greenhouse Improvements.
DISCUSSION:
On October 1, 2002, (M&C C-19270) the City Council authorized the City Manager to execute a design
contract with GSBS Batenhorst, Inc. in the amount of $74,750 for the site master planning of the
greenhouse facility area, and the design and preparation of the construction documents.
OFFIC ,
CDT BMW
rf. I ML
The construction solicitation for the project was advertised on September 15 and 22, 2005. The following
bids were received (base bid and Alternates#1, #2, and#3):
Company Amount
Prime Construction Company $1,131,033.00
Westland Construction $1,187,100.00
CME Builders& Engineers $1,205,500.00
Modern Contractors $1,244,600.00
Fain Group $1,252,415.00
AUI Contractors $1,298,800.00
Reeder General Contractors $1,286,500.00
Alshall Construction $1,301,695.00
Larrison Construction Texas $1,338,000.00
Steele-Freeman $1,375,200.00
Dynamic Technical Services $1,448,390.00
Each of the firms submitting the required follow-up documents were ranked based on price, schedule,
reputation and experience. Prime Construction Company was determined to offer the best value.
Proiect Fundina:
Source Amount
1986 CIP (Reprogrammed $280,049.00
Transfer from FE72 $400,000.00
Donations $500,000.00
1998 CIP $300,000.00
Total $1,480,049.00
The total cost associated with this project is expected to be:
Item Cost
Construction $1,131,033.00
Design $95,700.00
Survey, Geotech $23,500.00
Utility Extensions $138,100.00
Contingency, Staff Management, MISC. $91716.00
Total Cost $1,480,049.00
Prime Construction Company is in compliance with the City's M/ BE ordinance by committing to 26%
MMBE participation on this project. The City's MNBE goal for this project is 25%.
This project is physically located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 7, but will serve Fort Worth residents in all
Council Districts.
r
FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION:
The Finance Director certifies that upon approval of the above recommendations and adoption of the
attached appropriation ordinances, funds will be available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of
the Park and Recreation Improvements Fund. The Parks and Community Services Department will
be responsible for the collection and deposit of funds from these donations.
TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers
GC05 488100 080050410410 $500,000.OQ FE72 538070 080502101010 $392,810.85
51
E72 488692 080502101010 143 663.49 FE72 538070 080502101020 302.70
41 $143,663.49 7) $1,031,033.00
FE72 538070 080502101010GC05 541200 080050410410
41 71
E72 488100 080502101090 $Q&86.45 C181 541200 080181048350 $100,000.00
E72 488100 080502101020 X302.70 E72 538070 080502101090 6 886.45
4 $33Q2_70
FE72 538070 080502101020
6 $500,000.00
GC05 488100 080050410410
GC05 472072 080050410410
$400,000.00
6 $900,000.00
GC05 541200 080050410410
4 $6,886.45
FE72 538070 080502101090
Submitted for C_ v Managees Offices Marc Ott (8476)
Originating Department Head: Robert Goode (7804)
Additional Information Contact: Dalton Murayama (8088)
OFFICIAL RECORD
CITY SECRETARY
L.FT. WORTH, TEX.
Ordinance No. 16771-01-2006
AN ORDINANCE INCREASING ESTIMATED RECEIPTS AND APPROPRIATIONS IN
THE SPECIAL TRUST FUND, BOTANIC GARDEN PARKING LOT, IN THE AMOUNT
OF $143,663.49 FROM AVAILABLE FUNDS, FOR THE PURPOSE OF FUNDING A
TRANSER TO THE PARK AND RECREATION IMPROVEMENTS FUND FOR A
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH PRIME CONSTRUCTION COMPANY FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION OF THE BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE; MAKING THIS
ORDINANCE CUMULATIVE OF PRIOR ORDINANCES IN CONFLICT HEREWITH;
AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE.
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS:
SECTION 1.
That in addition to those amounts allocated to the various City departments for Fiscal Year 2005-2006 in
the Budget of the City Manager, there shall also be increased estimated receipts and appropriations in
the Special Trust Fund, Botanic Garden Parking Lot, in the amount of$143,663.49 from available funds,
for the purpose of funding a transfer to the Park and Recreation Improvements Fund for a construction
contract with Prime Construction Company for the construction of the Botanic Garden Greenhouse.
SECTION 2.
That should any portion, section or part of a section of this ordinance be declared invalid, inoperative or
void for any reason by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision, opinion or judgment shall in no
way impair the remaining portions, sections, or parts of sections of this ordinance, which said remaining
provisions shall be and remain in full force and effect.
SECTION 3.
That this ordinance shall be cumulative of Ordinance No. 16582 and all other ordinances and
appropriations amending the same except in those instances where the provisions of this ordinance are in
direct conflict with such other ordinances and appropriations, in which instance said conflicting provisions
of said prior ordinances and appropriations are hereby expressly repealed.
SECTION 4.
This ordinance shall take effect upon adoption.
Y-
APPRJAS TO LIT
- ",
Ass City ome
ADOPTED AND EFFECTIVE: Janualy 19, 2006
Ordinance No. 16772-01-2006
AN ORDINANCE INCREASING ESTIMATED RECEIPTS AND APPROPRIATIONS IN
THE SPECIAL TRUST FUND, BOTANIC GARDEN SECURITY PATROL, IN THE
AMOUNT OF $6,886.45 FROM AVAILABLE FUNDS, FOR THE PURPOSE OF
FUNDING A TRANSER TO THE PARK AND RECREATION IMPROVEMENTS FUND
FOR A CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH PRIME CONSTRUCTION COMPANY FOR
THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE; MAKING THIS
ORDINANCE CUMULATIVE OF PRIOR ORDINANCES IN CONFLICT HEREWITH;
AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE.
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS:
SECTION 1.
That in addition to those amounts allocated to the various City departments for Fiscal Year 2005-2006 in
the Budget of the City Manager, there shall also be increased estimated receipts and appropriations in
the Special Trust Fund, Botanic Garden Security Patrol, in the amount of$6,886.45 from available funds,
for the purpose of funding a transfer to the Park and Recreation Improvements Fund for a construction
contract with Prime Construction Company for the construction of the Botanic Garden Greenhouse.
SECTION 2.
That should any portion, section or part of a section of this ordinance be declared invalid, inoperative or
void for any reason by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision, opinion or judgment shall in no
way impair the remaining portions, sections, or parts of sections of this ordinance, which said remaining
provisions shall be and remain in full force and effect.
SECTION 3.
That this ordinance shall be cumulative of Ordinance No. 16582 and all other ordinances and
appropriations amending the same except in those instances where the provisions of this ordinance are in
direct conflict with such other ordinances and appropriations, in which instance said conflicting provisions
of said prior ordinances and appropriations are hereby expressly repealed.
SECTION 4.
This ordinance shall take effect upon adoption.
APPR AS:TO FO EGALI
Ass nt C y
ADOPTED AND EFFECTIVE: January 19, 2006
Ordinance No. 16773-01-2006
AN ORDINANCE INCREASING ESTIMATED RECEIPTS AND APPROPRIATIONS IN
THE SPECIAL TRUST FUND, BOTANIC GARDEN PLANT MATERIAL, IN THE
AMOUNT OF $302.70 FROM AVAILABLE FUNDS, FOR THE PURPOSE OF FUNDING
A TRANSER TO THE PARK AND RECREATION IMPROVEMENTS FUND FOR A
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH PRIME CONSTRUCTION COMPANY FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION OF THE BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE; MAKING THIS
ORDINANCE CUMULATIVE OF PRIOR ORDINANCES IN CONFLICT HEREWITH;
AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE.
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS:
SECTION 1.
That in addition to those amounts allocated to the various City departments for Fiscal Year 2005-2006 in
the Budget of the City Manager, there shall also be increased estimated receipts and appropriations in
the Special Trust Fund, Botanic Garden Plant Material, in the amount of$302.70 from available funds,for
the purpose of funding a transfer to the Park and Recreation Improvements Fund for a construction
contract with Prime Construction Company for the construction of the Botanic Garden Greenhouse.
SECTION 2.
That should any portion, section or part of a section of this ordinance be declared invalid, inoperative or
void for any reason by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision, opinion or judgment shall in no
way impair the remaining portions, sections, or parts of sections of this ordinance, which said remaining
provisions shall be and remain in full force and effect.
SECTION 3.
That this ordinance shall be cumulative of Ordinance No. 16682 and all other ordinances and
appropriations amending the same except in those instances where the provisions of this ordinance are in
direct conflict with such other ordinances and appropriations, in which instance said conflicting provisions
of said prior ordinances and appropriations are hereby expressly repealed.
SECTION 4.
This ordinance shall take effect upon adoption.
APP7 E 77
X f77
Assistant C' Atto ey
ADOPTED AND EFFECTIVE: January 19. 2006
Ordinance No. 16774-01-2006
AN ORDINANCE INCREASING ESTIMATED RECEIPTS AND APPROPRIATIONS IN
THE PARK AND RECREATION IMPROVEMENTS FUND IN THE AMOUNT OF
$900,000 FROM AVAILABLE FUNDS, FOR THE PURPOSE OF FUNDING A
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH PRIME CONSTRUCTION COMPANY FOR THE
CONSTRUCTION OF THE BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE; MAKING THIS
ORDINANCE CUMULATIVE OF PRIOR ORDINANCES IN CONFLICT HEREWITH;
AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE.
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS:
SECTION 1.
That in addition to those amounts allocated to the various City departments for Fiscal Year 2005-2006 in
the Budget of the City Manager, there shall also be increased estimated receipts and appropriations in
the Park and Recreation Improvements Fund in the amount of $900,000 from available funds, for the
purpose of funding a construction contract with Prime Construction Company for the construction of the
Botanic Garden Greenhouse.
SECTION 2.
That should any portion, section or part of a section of this ordinance be declared invalid, inoperative or
void for any reason by a court of competent jurisdiction, such decision, opinion or judgment shall in no
way impair the remaining portions, sections, or parts of sections of this ordinance, which said remaining
provisions shall be and remain in full force and effect
SECTION 3.
That this ordinance shall be cumulative of Ordinance No. 16582 and all other ordinances and
appropriations amending the same except in those instances where the provisions of this ordinance are in
direct conflict with such other ordinances and appropriations, in which instance said conflicting provisions
of said prior ordinances and appropriations are hereby expressly repealed.
SECTION 4.
This ordinance shall take effect upon adoption.
APPROV S TO FO AN GALITY:
Assis by rn
ADOPTED AND EFFECTIVE January 19. 2006
FORT WORTH BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3408 WEST FREEWAY,FORT WORTH,TEXAS
GSBS Batenhorst Architects Project#202.19.00
13 October 2005
Addendum#3
The original project manual,specifications and drawings dated(14 September 2005 forthe project referenced
above are amended as noted in this Addendum#3. Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by
inserting its number and date in the space provided on the proposal form. This addendum consists of I page
(including this page).
ADD.3-1: Project Manual
Notice to Contractors. Revise proposal submittal date(to be changed)from 1:30
j
P.M.,October 13,2005 to 1:30 D.ni.October 20,2005.
ADD.3-2: Project Manual
Section 13123—Greenhouse Systems.
Add the following tol.2.a.:All greenhouse manufacturer substitution submittals
will go through General Contractors,and are to be included in the General Contractor's
Base Bid and Alternates Two and Three. The"or equal"submittals will be evaluated
_during the Best Value review process. The selected Best Value contractor will submit
"or equal"shop drawings and greenhouse manufacturer information. AA provisions of
the greenhouse system specified are to be met to be considered as an approved equal.
Reference Section 1600-Product Requirements,Part 13 Submittals for product
substitution procedures.
ADD.3-3: Addendum Two
Addendum Two to be voided
���ED AR��
%EA
r
s �
JJ 17305 P�
q� of
fin _ 13- d5
End of Addendum Three
Page 1 of I
i
FORT WORTH BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACU TTY
3408 WEST FREEWAY,FORT WORTH,TEXAS
GSBS Batenhorst Architects Project#202.19.00
06 October 2005
Addendum#2
The original project manual,specifications and drawings dated(14 September 2005),forthe project referenced
above are amended as noted in this Addendum#2. Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by
inserting its number and date in the space provided on the proposal form. This addendum consists of 1 page
(including this page).
ADD.2-1: Project Manual
Section 13123—Greenhouse Systems. Requests for substitution have been thoroughly
considered,but none have met the specifications and requirements as outlined.
i
BRED A,p
`5� SZREAZk cti�
�
U r
9� OF
/0 -
End
O -End of Addendum One
i
I
i
I
Page 1 of 1
FORT WORTH BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3408 WEST FREEWAY,FORT WORTH,TEXAS
GSBS Batenhorst Architects Project#202.19.00
29 September 2005
Addendum#1
The original project manual,specifications and drawings dated(14 September 2005),for the project referenced
above are amended as noted in this Addendum#1. Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by
inserting its number and date in the space provided on the proposal form. This addendum consists of 15 pages
(including this page).
ADD. 1-1: Project Manual
Notice to Contractors. Revise proposal submittal date(to be changed) from 1:30
P.M.,October 6,2005 to 1:30 P.M., October 13,2005.
ADD. 1-2: Project Manual
Proposal. Substitute attached Proposal,adding Alternates 2 and 3.
ADD. 1-3: Project Manual
Section 01230—Alternates. Part 3—Execution.
Revise:
A. Alternate No.One: Reference drawing A1.2. West Parking Lot.
B. Alternate No. Two: Greenhouse Black Out System(reference specification section
13123-Greenhouse Systems,2.9 Black Out System).
C. Alternate No.Three: Greenhouse Benches(reference specification section 13123
—Greenhouse Systems,2.11 Benches)
ADD. 1-4: Project Manual
Replace Project Manual Table of Contents with attached revised Table of Contents.
ADD. 1-5: Project Manual
Replace Project Manual section with reprinted,attached Section 04200.
ADD. 1-6: Project Manual
Section 05500—Metal Fabrications. Omit Paragraph 1.1.B Gratings.
ADD. 1-7: Project Manual
Section 08331 —Overhead Coiling boors. Omit Paragraph 3.3 Lock Cylinders.
ADD. 1-8: Project Manual
Section 08710—Door Hardware. Door Hardware Set No.3. Add Door No. 101D.
ADD. 1-9: Project Manual
Section 13123--Greenhouse Systems. Requests for substitution are being considered,
but have not been approved at this time. Should any substituted greenhouse
manufacturer be accepted,notice will be provided via an additional addendum.
0FFIC",I r
Page 1 of 2 Cif 6'E�" ffiff
ADD. 1-10: Drawing AM
Detail l—Site Plan. Add note,"Temporary power for the entire duration of
construction to be provided by the City of Fort Worth,from the northeast comer of the
site,within approximately 50' (fifty feet)of the project property line."
Q
\cam 5Z R EA(y 'S�
CD
W r�
cY-1 a
s
17305 P�
OF
oy( 2- -zoo5
End of Addendum One
y _ Page 2 of 2
i
PROPOSAL
T0: MR. CHARLES BOSWELL
CITY MANAGER
CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
FOR: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3408 WEST FREEWAY
Project No.TPW 2005-04
Pursuant to the foregoing "Notice to Bidders," the undersigned has thoroughly examined the plans,
specifications and the site, understands the amount of work to be done, and hereby proposes to do all the
work and furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to fully complete all the work as provided in
the pians and specifications, and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director of Transportation
and Public Works of the City of Fort Worth.
Upon acceptance of this Proposal by the City Council, the bidder is bound to execute a contract and, if the
contract amount exceeds $25,000.00, furnish acceptable Performance and/or Payment Bonds approved
by the City of Fort Worth for performing and completing the Work within the time stated and for the
following sum, to wit:
DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
Base Bid
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Unit Prices:
Add per linear foot of 18" Diameter Pier
Deduct per linear foot of 18" Diameter Pier
Add per linear foot of Steel Casing
The undersigned agrees to complete the Work within calendar days after the date of Notice to
Proceed. A Project Schedule will be submitted as required in the Instructions to Bidders.
The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids or any combination thereof proposed for the
above work.
The undersigned assures that its employees and applicants for employment and those of any labor
organization, subcontractors or employment agency in either furnishing or referring employee applicants to
the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance 7278 as
amended by City Ordinance 7400 (Fort Worth City Code Section 13A-21 through 13A-29).
Residency of Bidders: The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed house Bill 620 relative to the
award of contracts to non-resident bidders. The law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as
low bidder, non-resident bidders (out of state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of
business are outside of the State of Texas) that bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or
services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that
Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in order to obtain a comparable
contract in the state In which the non-resident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate
blanks in Section A must be filled out by all non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet
specifications. The failure of out of state or non-resident bidders Failure to complete the forms may
disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B.
A. U Non-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of
business, are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state
law.
Ll Non-resident vendors in (give state), are not required to
underbid resident bidders.
B. U Our principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of
Texas.
Within ten (10) days of receipt of notice of acceptance of this bid, the successful bidder will execute the
formal contract and will deliver approved Performance and Payment Bonds for the faithful performance of
this contact. The attached deposit check in the sum of Dollars ($ �is to become the
property of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or the attached Bidder's Bond is to be forfeited in the event the
contract and bonds are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for delay and
additional work caused thereby.
MINORITY/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE(M/WBE): (For bids in excess of$25,000)
• 1 am aware that 1 must submit information the Director,Transportation and Public Works, concerning
the M/WBE participation within FIVE BUSINESS DAYS of submittal of this Proposal In order to be
considered RESPONSIVE.
Respectfully submitted,
Company Name
By:
Signature
Printed Name of Principal Title
Address:
Street
City Ztp
Phone:
Fax:
Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 1:
Addendum No.2:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SPECIAL INSTRUCTION FOR BIDDERS (M/WBE)
PROPOSAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS
WEATHER TABLE
WAGE RATES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
See index next page
CONTRACT
PERFORMANCE BOND
PAYMENT BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKERS'COMPENSATION LAW
Fort Words Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
Division Section Title Pa e
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
00200 Geoteclmical Data 39
01010 Summary of Work 3
01027 Applications for Payment 4
01230 Alternates 2
01270 Unit Prices 1
01290 Payment Procedures 4
01310 Project Management and Coordination 7
01320 Construction Progress Documentation 5
01330 Submittal Procedures 8
01400 Quality Requirements 6
01420 References 12
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6
01600 Product Requirements 6
01700 Execution Requirements 6
01732 Selective Demolition 4
01770 Closeout Procedures 5
01781 Project Record Documents 3
01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 5
DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION
02230 Site Clearing 3
02260 Excavation Support and Protection 2
02300 Earthwork 8
02361 Termite Control 3
02553 Natural Gas Distribution 5
02821 Chain-Link Fences and Gates 3
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork 4
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 3
03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 5
03370 Concrete Curing 2
DIVISION 4 -MASONRY
04299 04200 Unit Masonry -18
04340 Reinforced Masonry System 4
04810 Unit Masem5,Assemblies-- ,,
04860 Stone Masonry I 1
GSBS T.O.C.-1
CITY SEC ��
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05120 Structural Steel 3
05311 Steel Roof Deck 3
05500 Metal Fabrications 3
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 5
06112 Framing and Sheathing 2
0618006181 Glued Laminated Structural Units 4
06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry 2
06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 5
DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07190 Water Repellents 4
07210 Building Insulation 4
07411 Metal Roof Panels 4S8
07412 Metal Wall Panels 8
07551 APP Modified Biotuminous Membrane Roofing 6
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 6
07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties 4
07720 Roof Accessories 3
07841 Through Penetration Firestop Systems 4
07842 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems 3
07920 Joint Sealants 7
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 6
08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 3
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 5
08510 Steel Windows 3
08710 Door Hardware 14
08800 Glazing _ 3
DIVISION 9 -FINISHES
09111 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing -74
09911 Exterior Painting 5
09912 Interior Painting 7
- 09931 Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes - - -- 5
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10155 Toilet Compartments 3
10431 Signage 4
10520 Fire-protection Specialties 6
10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 3
GSBS T.O.C.-2
i i
PROPOSAL
T0: MR.CHARLES BOSWELL
CITY MANAGER
CITY OF FORT WORTH,TEXAS
FOR: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3408 WEST"FREEWAY
Project No.TPW 2005-04
Pursuant to the foregoing "Notice to Biddem,w the undersigned has thoroughly examined the plans,
specifrcatiorrs and the site, understands the amount of work to be done,and hereby proposes to do all the
work and famish all labor,equipment and materials necessary to fully complete all the w=ork as provided in
the plans and sp6cilkations, and subject to the Inspection and approval of the Director of Transportation
and Public Works of the City of t=ort Worth.
Upon acceptance of this Proposal by the City Council,the bidder is bound to execute a contract and, if the
contract amount exceeds $25,000.00, fumish able Performance and/or Payment Bonds approved
by the City of Fort Worth for performing and completing the Work within the time stated and for the
following sum,to wit:
DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
Base Bid ���'/��
Alternate 1
Alternate 2 17 JsO . AHO
Alternate 3 � 22 2.. o 0
Unit Prices:
Add per linear foot of 18"Diameter Pier zS,
® Deduct per linear foot of 1 S'Diameter Pier
Add per linear foot of Steel Casing
The undersigned agrees to complete the Work within r calendar days after the dabs of Notice to
Proceed. A Project Schedule will be submitted as requked In the instructions to Bidders.
The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and alt bids or any combination thereof proposed for the
above work.
The undersigned assures that its employees and applicants for employment and those of arty labor
organbstion,subcontractors or employment agency in either furnishing or referring employee applicants to
the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance 7278 as
amended by City Ordinance 7400(Fort Worth City Code Section 13A-21 through 13Ar29).
Residency of Bidders: The 1988 Session of the Texas Legislature passed house Bill 620 relative to the
award of contracts to non-resident bidders. The law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as
low bidder, non-resident bidders (out of state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of
�""
I'
M
�'
�,
�I
business are outside of the State of Texas) that bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or
services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bider by the same amount that
Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in order to obtain a comparable
contract in the state in which the non-resident's principal place of business is located. The appropriate
blanks in Section A must be filled out by all non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet
specifications. The failure of out of state or non-resident bidders Failure to complete the form may
disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B.
A. U Non-resident vendors in (give state),our principal place of
business,are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state
law.
(J Non-resident vendors in (give state),are not required to
B. Vun erbid resident bidders.
Our principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of
Texas.
Within ten (10) days of receipt of notice of acceptance of this bid, the successful bidder will execute the
formal contract and will deliver approved Performance and Payment Bonds for the faithful performance of
this contact. The attached deposit check in the sum of j(a Dollars(;___,j,is to become the
property of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or the attached Bidders;fond is to be forfeited in the event the
- contract and bonds are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for delay and
additional work caused thereby.
MINORITYMOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE(MIWBE): (For bids in excess of$25,000)
• I am aware that i must submit information the Director.Transportation and Public Works, concerning
the M/ BE participation within FIVE BUSINESS DAYS of submittal of this Proposal In order to be
considered RESPONSW
Respectfully submitted,
_ Pte!r►7E COn+>;TRVc.i i�n1 G-O•�►�iQN rf
C mipal Name
signature
�. Printed Narfie of Principal Title
Address: 8101 4 L.CAP Pg. Sul 7-X- /191 ,
Street n
* _ AteLl4.6i aA) T, ��XJAS X606/
City � Tip
Phone: 817'-S7Z-SSSD
Fax: 8/7-5-7Z-G3s1
Receipt is ac kr owledged of the following addenda:
�• Addendum No. 1:_ 9'2 9-S
Addendum No.2:
ftilcpicwDvey IJe; .3 /0- 13-57
R. WOM, TeX.
e
l �
ar• y
t 4
Joni
no
NMI
� t
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
Proposals for the construction of Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility, 3408 W. Freeway, Fort Worth,will
be received at the Purchasing Office, City of Fort Worth, 1000 Throckmorton, Fort Worth, 76107, until
1:30 P.M.,Thursday,October 6,2005,and will be opened and publicly read aloud approximately thirty
minutes later in the Council Chambers.
After evaluating the Proposals submitted,the City shall select the Proposer that offers the best value to
the City and enter into negotiations with that Proposer. The City may discuss with the selected Proposer
options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with such modification.
A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 10:00 A.M.,Tuesday,September 27,2005, Botanic Garden
Center, Redbud Hail,3220 Botanic Garden Boulevard, Fort Worth,Texas.
The Project consists of construction of a new single story masonry headhouse, and greenhouse facility,
plus site work, also including mechanical and electrical systems, and utilities.
Estimated construction cost is$ 1,200,000.
MWBE participation will be evaluated in awarding this Contract. Contact the MWBE office(871-6104)to
obtain lists of certified subcontractors and suppliers.
The MWBE participation requirement for this Project is 25%. Proposer must submit Utilization Plan within
5 business days of submOng their Best Value Proposal. Failure to document proposed attainment will
remove the Proposal from further consideration. Contact the M/WBE Office at 817-392-6104 to obtain list
of certified subcontractors"and suppliers.
Proposers must submit a bid bond with their proposal. The Proposer to whom an award of contract is
made will be required to provide Payment and Performance Bonds and provide Contractors General
Liability and Statutory Workers Compensation Coverage.
General Contractors and Suppliers may make copies of the Project Manual and Plans through their
printer.The bidding documents may be viewed and printed on-line. Bid documents are not available at
the City. The bidding documents may be viewed and printed on-line by logging on to
http://Droiectpoint.buzzsaw.com/client/fortworthgov with the user name°Cowtown°,password
°Cowtown2004", project is listed under T/PW. Contact the Project Manager, Nancy Richardson, at 817-
392-8014 or email nancv.richardsonCuD-fortworthQov.or4 for assistance. Printed Bidding Documents may
be obtained,also,from Reprographics of Fort Worth,2220 W. Peter Smith, Fort Worth,TX 76102;
telephone(817) 332-9704. No pre-printed sets are available; General Contractors and Suppliers must
make printing arrangements prior to picking up documents. General Contractors and Suppliers are
responsible for printing costs, and Bidding Documents are to be obtained in full sets only.
For additional information contact GSBS Batenhorst, Sharon Krueger,AIA, 817-589-1722 or
skrueger@gsbs-pc.com.
Advertisement: September 15, 2005
September 22,2005
evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent
work to provide a neat,uniform appearance,properly prepared for application of
caulking or sealant compounds.
C. Clean exposed brick masonry surfaces by bucket and brush hand cleaning method or
by high pressure water method. Comply with requirements of BIA.Technical Notes
No. 30 "Cleaning Brick Masonry".
Use commercial cleaning agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at end of each day's work and after
final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.
END OF SECTION
04200-8
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS: The following requirements shall be used in the preparation of the
response to this Request for Sealed Proposals:
a Use the Proposal Form provided in the Project Manual.
• Entries on the Proposal Form may be handwritten or typed.
-. 0 Write in contract duration if not specified.
• Acknowledge all addenda on the Proposal Form.
Have a Principal sign the Proposal. If the Offeror is a corporation, the president or a vice-
president must sign the Proposal. If the Offeror is a partnership, then the person/entity who is the
managing/general partner must sign the proposal.
• Include cashiers check or an acceptable bidders bond written by a corporate surety payable to
the City of Fort Worth, in an amount of not less than five (5%) per cent of the total of the bid
submitted.
In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, the surety must(1) hold a certificate of authority
from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or
required under federal law, or(2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000
from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and is the
holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a
surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such
reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request The City, in its sole discretion, will
determine the adequacy of the proof required herein.
1A. SELECTION OF CONTRACTOR:
The City shall select the Proposer that offers the best value based upon the following criteria and
on its ranking evaluation.
In determining the Best Value Offeror, the City will consider.
1. The proposed price(60%)
2. Proposed level of MWBE participation (10%)
3. The proposed project schedule(10%)
4. The reputation/experience of the Offeror as demonstrated by past project work and the report of
references(10%)
5. The Offerers past relationship with the City. (10%)
`*NOTE*: If the Offeror has no previous work experience with the city, then the reputation evaluation
criterion will represent 20%of the overall score
After ranking the responses to the RFP, the City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the
selected Proposer. The City and its architect may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a
scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification.
If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Proposer, the City shall, formally and
in writing, end negotiations with that Proposer and proceed to the next Proposer in the order of the
selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected.
2. MINORITY/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE(M/WBE) (BEST VALUE PROPOSAL)
Within five (5) City business days from proposal submittal date, exclusive of the proposal
submittal date, all proposers will be required to submit information concerning the M/WBE(s) that
will participate in the contract. The M/WBE goal on this project is 25%.
The information shall include: (1) the name, address and telephone number of each M/WBE; (2)
the description of the work to be performed by each M/WBE; and (3) the approximate dollar
amount/percentage of the participation.
The M/WBE firm(s) must be located or doing business in the City's geographic market area that
include the following nine (9) counties; Tarrant, Parker, Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis,
Kaufman and Rockwall. The M/WBE firm(s) must be currently certified or in the process of being
certified by the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA) , or Texas �
Department of Transportation (TXDOT), Highway Division prior to recommendation for award
being made by the City Council.
If you will not have any M/WBE participation during this contract, then a detailed explanation must
be submitted to explain the Good and Honest Efforts your firm made to secure M/WBE
participation.
Failure to submit the M/WBE participation information or the detailed explanation of the proposer's
Good and Honest Efforts to meet or exceed the stated M/WBE goal, may Render the proposal
non-responsive. The plan will be part of the final weighted selection criteria.
3. BID SECURITY: Cashier's check or an acceptable bidder's bond payable to the City of Fort
Worth, in an amount of five(5) per cent of the bid submitted [See paragraph 1 above]. The Bid
Security must accompany the bid and is subject to forfeit in the event the successful bidder fails to p"
execute the contract documents within ten (10)days after the contract has been awarded. The
Bid Security shall be included in the envelope containing the bid proposal. Failure to submit the
Bid Security will result in the proposal not being considered for this project Bidder's bond will be
returned if the City fails to award the contract within 90 calendar days of receipt of bids, unless the
Bidder agrees to an extension.The surety must be licensed to do business in the state of Texas.
4. PAYMENT BOND AND PERFORMANCE BOND: For projects in excess of $25,000, the '
successful bidder entering into a contract for the work will be required to give the City surety in a
sum equal to the amount of the contract awarded. The form of the bond shall be as herein
provided and the surety shall be acceptable to the City. All bonds furnished hereunder shall meet
the requirements of Texas Government Code Section 2253, as amended.
In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, the surety must(1) hold a certificate of authority
from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or
required under federal law; or(2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000
from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and is the
holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a
surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such
reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion, will
determine the adequacy of the proof required herein.
No sureties will be accepted by the City that are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds
or which are interested in any litigation against the City. Should any surety on the contract be
determined unsatisfactory at any time by the City, notice will be given to the contractor to that
effect and the contractor shall immediately provide a new surety satisfactory to the City
If the total contract price is$25,000 or less, payment to the contractor shall be made in one lump �.
sum. Payment shall not be made for a period of 45 calendar days from the.date the work has
been competed and accepted by the City.
If the contract is in excess of$25,000, a Payment Bond shall be executed, in the amount of the
contract, solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials in the prosecution
r of the work.
If the contract amount is in excess of$100,000, a Performance Bond shall also be provided, in the
amount of the contract, conditioned on the faithful performance of the work in accordance with the
pians, specification, and contract documents. Said bond shall be solely for the protection of the
City of Fort Worth.
5. PRE-BID SITE INVESTIGATION: Prior to filing a response, the bidder shall examine the site(s) of
the work and the details of the requirements set out in these specifications to satisfy itself as to
the conditions which will be encountered relating to the character, quality, and quantity of the work
to be performed and materials and equipment required. The filing of a response by the bidder
shall be considered evidence that it has compiled with these requirements.
6. AMBIGUITY: In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the proposal, the City
reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the
proposal.
7. WAGE RATES: Not less than the prevailing wage rates set forth in Contract Documents must be
paid on this project.
m 8. POST BID- PREAWARD SUBMITTALS: Bidders are required to submit the following information
to the Architectural Services Section, Building Services Division, 319 West Tenth Street, 817-871-
8274, within five business days subsequent to bid opening (Normally Thursday following a
Thursday bid opening) in order to assist City staff in determining the Contractor's capability of
performing the work and in meeting City contract requirements:
Minority/Women's Business Documentation(for bids in excess of$25,000)
Contractors Qualification Statement(AIA Form A305)
Proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers
Project Schedule
Proof of insurability for Statutory Workers Compensation Insurance
9. PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS: Acceptance of the bid in no way requires the City to accept
the qualifications of the subcontractors. The Subcontractor lists are for use by the City in
preparing recommendations for award of the contract The Contractor must provide and use
subcontractors listed unless the City agrees to allow a substitute.
10. DISCREPANCIES AND ADDENDA:
Should a bidder find any discrepancies in the drawings and specifications, or should it be in doubt
as to their meaning, it shall notify the City at once. If required, the City will then prepare a written
addendum that will be available to all Bidders at the Plans Desk or place designated for
distribution of Bid Documents by the Notice to Bidders. The Contractor is responsible for
determining if addenda are available and for securing copies prior to submitting a response to this
request for sealed bids. Oral instructions or decisions unless confirmed by written addenda will
not be considered valid, legal or binding. No extras will be authorized because of failure of the
contractor to include work called for in the addenda.
Bidder must acknowledge addenda in the Proposal. Failure to acknowledge addenda may cause
the Proposal to be ruled non-responsive. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain Addenda
and include its information in the Proposal.
11. WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE: Bidders will be required to demonstrate that
coverage is in effect at time of Award of Contract. Sample Certificate of Insurance, or other proof
that Workers Compensation Insurance will be obtained, must be submitted within five working
days of bid opening "
12. TAXES: Equipment and materials not consumed by or incorporated into the work are subject to
State sales taxes under House Bill 11,enacted August 15, 1991.
13. PERMITS: Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth Permits and for any other permits
required by this project City of Fort Worth Building and Trade Permit fees are waived. Separate ryp
permits may be required for each work location.
14. UTILITIES AND IMPACT FEES: The City will pay water and sewer utilities tap fees and impact
fees. Unless shown otherwise, the City will coordinate and pay for water and sewer taps and
meters to the property line. The Contractor will include all remaining fees from the electrical and
gas companies in the base bid. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with City and
utility companies for installation of utilities. Unless indicated otherwise on the plans, the contractor
will be responsible.for costs and installations from the building side of the water meter and sewer
tap.
15. BID DOCUMENTS: Hard copies of bidding documents may be obtained directly from printers or
downloaded and printed by the Bidder.
16. MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are
descriptive, not restrictive. Use of brands of like nature and quality will be considered. Upon
request of the architect or contractor, the contractor will submit a full sized sample and/or detailed
information as required to allow the architect to determine the acceptability of proposed
substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as "no substitute accepted°, the City will accept
no alternates to the specified equipment. Also refer to specification section 01630 Product
Options and Substitutions.
17. TESTING SERVICES: The City shall provide for, independently of the contractor, the inspection
services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services
necessary for the acceptance of the construction work.
18. PROJECT SCHEDULE: The Project Schedule to be submitted with the Qualification Statement
will, at the minimum, include the following: quality control submittals and approvals, mobilization,
site preparation, under slab utilities, foundation work, structural erection, interior finish,
commissioning, and closeout. The Schedule may be submitted as a table or PERT diagram.
19.
rZ!--N'--D 2 3 2005
FORT WORTH
""'��•*•r-'"'�'" city of Fort worm
Minority and Women Business Enterprise Specifications
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS
APPLICATION OF POLICY
If the total dollar value of the contract is$25,000 or more,the M/WBE goal is applicable.
If the total dollar value of the contract is less than$25,000,the M/WBE goal is not applicable.
POLICY STATEMENT
It is the policy of the City of Fort Worth to ensure the full and equitable participation by Minority and Women Business
Enterprises(M/WBE)in the procurement of all goods and services to the City on a contractual basis. All requirements
and regulations stated in the City's current Minority and Women Business Enterprise Ordinance apply to this bid.
M/WBE PROJECT GOALS
r) ,--
�' The City's MBE/W BE goal on this project is x- %of the base bid value of the contract.
COMPLIANCE TO BID SPECIFICATIONS
On City contracts of$25,000 or more, bidders are required to comply with the intent of the City's M/WBE Ordinance by
either of the following:
1. Meet or exceed the above stated M/WBE goal,or
2. Good Faith Effort documentation,or;
3. Waiver documentation,or;
4. Joint Venture.
SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
The applicable documents must be received by the Managing Department,within the following times allocated, in order
for the entire bid to be considered responsive to the specifications.
1. Subcontractor Utilization Form, if goal is received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid
met or exceeded: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date.
2. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid
Utilization Form,if participation is less than opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date.
statedgoal:
3. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid
Utilization Form, if no M/WBE participation: I opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date.
4. Prime Contractor Waiver Form, if you will received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid
perform all subcontracting/supplier work: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date.
5. Joint Venture Form,if utilize a joint venture received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid
to met or exceed goal. opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE CITY'S M/WBE ORDINANCE,WILL RESULT IN THE BID BEING CONSIDERED
NON-RESPONSIVE TO SPECIFICATIONS
Any questions,please contact the M/WBE Office at(817)392-6104.
Rev.5130103
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
..�°",,��` �`� 2 r 2005
w �, ,` ATTACHMENT 1A
Page 1 of 1
FORT WORTH City of Fort Worth
Subcontractors/Suppliers Utilization Form
PRIME COMP NAME: Check applicable lock to describe prime
Q
® I `� r_w(u(�au'
M/W/DBE NON-M/W/DBE
PROJECT NAME:
BIDDAT E
;ms
N OUL , c�( s ) z Lys
Citys M/WBE Project Goal: Prime's MIWBr=Project Utilization: PROJECT NUMBER
Identify all subcontractors/suppliers you will use on this project
Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with requested documentation, and received by the Managing
Department on or before 5.00 p.m. five (5)City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date,
will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications.
The undersigned Offeror agrees to enter into a formal agreement with the M/WBE firm(s) listed in this
Utilization schedule, conditioned upon execution of a contract with the City of Fort Worth. The intentional
and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts is grounds for consideration of disqualification and will result in the
bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications
m M/WBEs listed toward meeting the project goal must be located in the nine (9) county marketplace or
currently doing business in the marketplace at the time of bid. Marketplace is the geographic area of Tarrant,
Parker,Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis, Kaufman and Rockwall counties.
Identify each Tier level. Tier is the level of subcontracting below the prime contractor, i.e., a direct
payment from the prime contractor to a subcontractor is considered 1 st tier, a payment by a subcontractor to
its supplier is considered 2"d tier i
ALL M/WBEs MUST BE CERTIFIED BEFORE CONTRACT AWARD.
Certification means those firms, located or doing business at the time of bid opening within the Marketplace, that have
been determined to be bonafide minority or women businesses by the North Central Texas Regional Certification
Agency (NCTRCA), or the Texas Department of Transportation (TX DOT), highway division. Disadvantaged Business
Enterprise(DBE)is synonymous with Minority/Women Business Enterprise(M/WBE).
If hauling services are utilized, the prime will be given credit as long as the M/WBE listed owns and
operates at least one fully licensed and operational truck to be used on the contract. The M/WBE may lease
trucks from another M/WBE firm, including MIWBE owner-operators, and receive full M/WBE credit. The
M/WBE may lease trucks from non-M/WBEs, including owner-operators, but will only receive credit for the
fees and commissions earned by the M/WBE as outlined in the lease agreement.
a.an 5/
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com �, :" U � b
RECEIVED OCT 2 7 2005 ,
ATTACHMENT 1A
FORT WORTH Page 2 of 2
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status;i.e.,Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs.
.� Please list M/WBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary.
Certification N
(check one)
SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n
Company Name i N T Detail Detail
Address e M WC X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased DollarAmount
Telephone/Fax r B B B
T D
E E R O B
C T E
A
Overhead Door Corn pan% 2 �
1039 E.Dallas Road y n� c :45'
Grapevine,Texas 76051
817-481-5502 817-481-1587
.r
Black Hawk Door&Window �Up
P.O.Box 26978 y �I n( t� q q 55
Fort Worth,Texas 76126 (� U
817-249-5330 817-249-8991
I
Centerline Fire Protection,Inc.
9450 Skillman Street,Suite 118 x Sf�^ ' — ��►�W
Dallas,Texas 75243
214-340-1006 214-340-1906
i
Ofambeco
w� 512-B Prairie Street
Arlington,Texas 76001IeGfj
817-695-4171- 817-652-9783
Concrete Related Products
P.O.Box 436
Cleburne,Texas
a�
Cowtown Redi-Mix
P.O.Box 162327 X cu)W.�. �r00
Fort Worth,Texas 76119
.r
Rev.5/30/03
�"" PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.Pdffactory.com
RECEIVED OCT 2 7 2005
I
ATTACHMENT IA
Page 2of2
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status;i.e.,Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs.
Please list MNVBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary.
Certification No
(check one) n
.. SUBCONTRACTOR(SUPPLIER T N T Detail Detail
Company Name i G X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount
Address e M W T D W
Telephone/Fax r B B R O B
E E G T E
A
t,
Weatherford Steel
4050 West 1-20 D✓✓ Cf�, W 1`I
Weatherford,Texas 76088
817-596-3954 817-594-2004
USS Inc. K � s Owe LA/5211 Elliot Reeder Road
Fort Worth,Texas 76117
817-834-5004 817-834-4794
V 1
G
ESP Mechanical LLC Q
3500 W Pioneer PKWY Suite 20 plumbin 1 I��I ()C)
Arlington,Texas 76013
817-275-3505 817-861-5291
Ludy Greenhouses
P.O.Box 414
New Madison,OH 45346
937-996-1921 937-996-8031
�n0
Barton,Edwards&Assoc's ��51
P.O.Box 874 10
Lewisville,Texas 75057
972-221-1203 972436-8430
MWH Painting x q 514'x'�C
1228 W.Scyene Road Suite 110 6nlisw
Mesquite,Texas 75149
*� 972-285-3223 972-285-2963 m 'a
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version httP://www 1p@ff9gt- .com
RECEIVED OCT Z 7 2005
- i
ATTACHMENT 1A
Page 2 of 2
F4RT, WORTH
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers,regardless of status;i.e.,Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs.
Please list M/WBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary.
Certification N
(check one)
SUBCONTRACTOWSUPPLIER Tn
N T Detail Detail
Company Name i C X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dotlar Amount
Address e M W T p yy
Telephone/Fax r B B R O B
E E C T E
A
Reliable Paving,Inc. � �w� ►n3� `5`�'U U
1903 N.Peyco �Y
Arlington,Texas 76001
817-467-0779 817467-9148
1
Progressive Roofing2 911
BalchSprings,ee Road x L�,f������JJJ� ✓✓
Balch Springs,Texas 75180
214-348-7663 214-348-7665
S�C�11
no
Kiwitex,Inc. L
\
no 1809 Richland Drive
Richardson,Texas 75081
214-882-4961 214-459-4427
Unit Structures,LLC
■"' 1703 Merrett Drive c
Mansfield,Texas 76063 �C�,1 ( iJ
817-477-1205 817-477-1206
rwr
�- Associated Truss&Lumber
388 S.Larkin ; 1•
Sunnyvale,Texas 75182 , Q �
972-226-1973 972-226-9253 �CL�.I��`Y'�
Son-Way Designs,Inc. � p�z,00
P.O.Box 275 iu V✓
Lillian,Texas 76061
682-518-0973 682-518-0974
Rev.5/30/03
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version hftp://www.pdffactory.com
RECEIVED OCT 2 7 2005
i
ATTACHMENT IA
FoRTWORTH
Page 2 of 2
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers,regardless of status;i.e.,Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs.
Please list M/WBE firms first,use additional sheets if necessary.
Certification N
(check one)
SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n Detail Detail
Company Name i N T
C
Address e M IN X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount
Telephone/Fax r B B T
E E O B
C T E
A
Mp�Q� a ,
Advantage Pest Control I
2513 Schooner Drive
Plano,Texas 75074
972-422-4695 972-423-6336
+�wM►
Reliable Fence ``\\
P.O.Box 2107 I j C ej "3u uV
Burleson,Texas 76097 f
817-447-0934 817-447-7303
Fire Line Services
P.O.Box 40786
Fort Worth,Texas 76140
817-551-2870 817-551-2878
w.
Allen's Contractingp r'X2150 f}T)
4800 B Hwy 377 �"`
Fort Worth,Texas 76116 l L
817-560-3773 817-560-3779
Adam's Fitz Group
P.O.Box 2754J�n��
Desoto,Texas 75123
214-876-3160 972-296-5285
Thompson Excavation jl�v C cocci Al L'U QQ r
P.O.Box 821419 n (� U �,UD
Fort Worth,Texas 76182 ( J l
817-428-2087 817-428-6786 c
kle ' ' Rev.5/30/03
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
_ RECEIVED OCT 2 7 2005
I
ATTACHMENT IA
FORT WORTH Page 4 of 4
QQ �
Total Dollar Amount of MNWBE Subcontractors/Suppliers J�
$
Total Dollar Amount of Non-MNWBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ C)
TOTAL DOLLAR AMOUNT OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS $ °2t�7�",
t
The Contractor will not make additions, deletions, or substitutions to this certified list without the prior approval
of the Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office Manager or designee through the submittal of a
Request for Approval of Change/Addition. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of
contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the ordinance. The contractor
shall submit a detailed explanation of how the requested change/addition or deletion will affect the committed
M/WBE goal. If the detail explanation is not submitted, it will affect the final compliance determination.
By affixing a signature to this form, the Offeror further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request,
complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including
- M/W/DBE(s) arrangements submitted with the bid. The Offeror also agrees to allow an audit and/or
examination of any books, records and files held by their company. The bidder agrees to allow the
transmission of interviews with owners, principals, officers, employees and applicable
subcontractors/suppliers/contractors participating on the contract that will substantiate the actual work
performed by the M/W/DBE(s) on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any
intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment
from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or
Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and create a material
breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible Offeror and barred from participating in
City work for a period of time not less than one(1)year.
Authorizer(,e
nature Printe Signatur
SIkft�
Title Contact Namerritle(if different)
r Cu l M 5u:-q5�
Company Name Telephone and/or Fax
Vol
Ad ress E-mail Address
�. ✓li I I D-14- (5
City/State/Zip Date
Rev.5/30/03
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version _http://www.pdffactory.com
City of Fort Worth, Texas
Transportation Public Works Department
" Facilities Management Division/Archltectural Services Section
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
LUMP SUM CONTRACT
SECTION A
DEFINITIONS,PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS
A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. By the term Contract Documents is meant all of the written and drawn documents setting
forth or affecting the rights of the parties,Including but not necessarily limited to,the Contract,Notice to Bidders,Proposal,General
Conditions,Special Conditions,Specifications,Plans,Bonds and all Addenda,Amendments signed by all parties,Change Orders,
written Interpretations and any written Field Order for a minor change in the Work.
A-2 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement between the Parties, and no prior or
contemporaneous,oral or written agreements,instruments or negotiations shall be construed as altering the terms and effects of the
Contract Documents. After being executed,the Contract Documents can be changed only by a written Amendment signed by the
Contractor and the Owner,or Change Order,or by a written Field Order for a minor change.
A-3 WORK. By the term Work is meant all labor,supervision,materials and equipment necessary to be used or incorporated
In order to produce the construction required by Contract Documents.
A-4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall be executed in six originals,with all
required attachments,including required bonds and insurance certificates,by the Contractor and the Owner in such form as may be
prescribed by law and returned to the Owner within ten business days of notification to Contractor. Failure to execute contracts and
provide required enclosures will be grounds for revocation of award and taking of Bid Bond.
A-6 FAMILIARITY WITH PROPOSED WORK. Before filing a Proposal, the bidder shalt examine carefully the, plans,
specifications,special provisions,and the form of contract to be entered Into for the work contemplated. He shall examine the site
of work and satisfy himself as to the conditions that will be encountered relating to the character,quality and quantity of work to be
performed and materials to be furnished. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with
these requirements and has accepted the site as suitable for the work.
Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated by
nm the plans will not be allowed.
A-8 ONE UNIFIED CONTRACT. Insofar as possible, the Contract Documents will be bound together and executed as a
single unified Contract.The intention of the Contract Documents being to provide for all tabor,supervision,materials,equipment and
other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Words that have well-recognized technical or trade
meanings are used herein In accordance with such recognized meanings.
A-T DIVISION OF WORK. The arrangement of Drawings andfor Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Articles, or other
Subdivisions shall not be binding upon the contractor In dividing the work among Subcontractors or Trades.
A-8 INTERPRETATIONS. The Architect will furnish such Interpretations of the Plans and Specifications as may be necessary
for the proper execution or progress of the work. Such Interpretations shall be furnished at the Instance of the Architect or at the
request of the Contractor,or Owner,and will be issued with reasonable promptness and at such times and In accordance with such
schedule as may be agreed upon. Such Interpretations shall be consistent with the purposes and intent of the Plans and
Specifications and may be effected by Field Order. In the event of any dispute between any of the parties to the Contract and the
Architect or each other involving the interpretation of the Contract Documents,the evaluation of work or materials performed or
furnished by the Architect Contractor,or any subcontractor or matedaisman,or involving any question of fault or liability of any party,
the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding.
In the event of Inconsistency in the contract documents, the following sequence for interpretation shall be used in order of
precedence: Change Orders and/or Field Orders (by date of issuance); Addenda (by date of issuance); Drawings; Notes and
dimensions on Drawings; Technical Specifications; Special Provisions; Supplementary General Conditions; General Conditions;
and,Construction Contract.
A-9 _COPIES OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. The Architect will furnish to Contractor free of charge 15
sets of working Drawings and'15 sets of Specifications. Contractor shall pay the cost of reproduction for all other copies of
Drawings and Specifications furnished to him.
All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Owner or the Architect are and shall remain the property of the
Owner. They are not to be used on any other project and,with the exception of one Contract set for each Party to the Contract,are
to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work.
Page 1
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
A-10 MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLICY. The City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of
disadvantaged business enterprises in City contracts. Compliance with the policies designed to meet these goals is mandatory in
order to be considered a responsive bidder. The City policy and procedures to be followed in submitting bids is Included.
The City of Fort Worth MWBE Program will take precedence over other subcontractor utilization programs on Block Grant and other
Federally funded Projects.
A-11 CORRELATION AND INTENT. In general,the drawings Indicate dimension,locations,positions,quantities,and kinds of
construction;the specifications indicate time quality and construction procedures required. Work Indicated on the drawings and not
specified of vice-versa,shall be furnished as though set forth in both. Work not detailed,marked or specified shall be the same as
similar parts that are detailed,marked or speclffed. If the drawings are in conflict or conflict with the specifications the better quality
or greater quantity or work or materials shall be estimated and shall be furnished or included. Dimensions on drawings shall take
precedence over small-scale drawings. Drawings showing locations of equipment,piping,ductwork,electrical apparatus,etc.,are
diagrammatic and job conditions may not allow installation In the exact location shown. Relocation shall not occur without the
Architects approval.
A-12 AGE In accordance with the policy("Policy")of the Executive.Branch of the federal government,Contractor covenants
that neither it nor any of Its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in
performing this contract,shall,in connection with the employment,advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with
the terms.conditions or privileges of their employment,discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a
bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement.
Contractor further covenants that neither It nor its officers,members, agents,employees,subcontractors,program participants, or
persons acting on their behalf,shall specify,in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract,a maximum
age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit Is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification,
retirement plan or statutory equipment.
Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the Policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or
allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors'alleged failure
to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement.
A-13 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA'), Contractor
warrants that It and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability In the provision of --
services to the general public,nor in the availability,terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with,or
employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA provisions and any other
applicable federal,state and local laws concerning disability and will defend,indemnity and hold City harmless against any claims or
allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged
failure to comply with the above-referenced laws concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement.
SECTION B
IDENTITY OF ARCHITECT
B-1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION. Where the term "Architect" is used in the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction",it shall refer to the Director,Transportation and Public Works or his designated Building Construction Manager. The
Director,Transportation will designate a Project Manager and Building Construction Manager(BCM)to administer this contract and
perform the functions of the "Architect" as indicated in the General Conditions. The design architect or engineer may also be
designated to perform the duties of"Architect". The term'CW and'Owner'are used interchangeably and refer to the City of Fort
Worth as represented by the Director of Transportation and Public Works or his designated representative.
B-2 TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION OF WORK:The Owner has the right to terminate the Project for any reason. If the 6dP
project is terminated,the Contractor shall:
a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination.
b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated.
c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the
notice of termination.
After termination as above,the City will pay the contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed;
provided, however,that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion
thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments,if,any otherwise made. Contractor
shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided In this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In
the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph,
such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,and the decision by the
City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract
B-3 DUTIES OF THE ARCHITECT As used herein,the term Architect means the Architect or his authorized representative.
Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any privily of Contract between the Architect and the Contractor.
Page 2
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
B-4 ARCHITECT AS REPRESENTATIVE OF THE OWNER The Building Construction Manager will provide general
administration of the Contract on behalf of the Owner and will have authority to act as the representative of the Owner to the extent
provided In the Contract Documents unless changed In writing by the Owner. The Architect will be available for conferences and
consultations with the Owner or the Contractor at all reasonable times.
B-5 ACCESS TO JOB SITES. The Architect shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and
progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Architect may perform its assigned functions under the
Contract Documents.
The Architect will make periodic visits to the Site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if
the work Is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on-site observations,the Architect will keep the
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies In the Work of
the Contractor. Based upon such observations and the Contractor's applications for payments,the Building Construction Manager
will make determinations and recommendations concerning the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue certificates for
payment amounts.
B-6 INTERPRETATIONS. The Architect will be, in the first Instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications and the Judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor,subject to the final decision of the Owner.
The Architects decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B-7 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK. The BCM will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and
Specifications. In addition,whenever,in its reasonable opinion,the BCM considers It necessary or advisable in order to Insure the
proper realization of the Intent of the Plans and Specifications,the BCM will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the
Work or any portion thereof,or to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated,
Installed or completed.
B-8 MISCELLANEOUS DUTIES OF ARCHITECT.
Shoo Drawings. The Architect will review Shop Drawings and Samples. Two copies of each approved Shop Drawing and submittal
will be provided to the Owner by the Architect. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor.
Change Orders. Change Orders and Field Orders for Minor Changes in the Work will be issued by the Owner
Guarantees. The Owner will receive all written guarantees and related documents required of the Contractor.Upon completion of
the project the Contractor shall provide the Owner five copies of each guarantee.
Inspections The Owner will conduct Inspections for the purpose of determining and making his recommendations concerning the
dates of substantial completion and final completion. The Architect will conduct the final acceptance inspection and issue the
Certificate of Completion.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals The Owner will receive six copies of all applicable equipment installation, operation, and
maintenance brochures and manuals required of the Contractor.
B-9 TERMINATION OF THE ARCHITECT. in case of the termination of the employment of the Architect by the Owner,the
Owner shall either assume the duties of the Architect through the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works,or
shall appoint a successor Architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection.
SECTION C
OWNER
C-1 IDENTIFICATION. By the tern Owner is meant the City of Fort Worth acting herein by its duly authorized representatives
In the manner provided by law. Authorized representatives include the City Manager,Assistant City Manager,the Director and of
Transportation and Public Works Department and members of the Facilities Management Division. Generally speaking a
designated representative will be a Building Construction Manager identified from within the Facilities Management Group to act as
a point of contact for day-to-day contract administration.
C-2 DUTIES OF THE OWNER The Owner shall furnish surveys describing the physical characteristics,legal limits and utility
locations for the site of the Work;provided,however,that the Contractor hereby covenants that he has inspected the premises and
familiarized himself therewith and that the locations of utilities and other obstacles to the prosecution of the Work as shown on the
Owner's survey are for information only, are not binding upon the Owner, and-the Owner shall not incur any liability for loss or
damage by virtue of any inaccuracies or deficiencies in such-surveys. The Owner shall secure and pay for title to the site and all
necessary permanent or construction easements. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work in
such manner and to such extent as may be reasonable and shall furnish information undet its control with reasonable promptness at
the request of the Contractor.
C-3 INSTRUCTIONS. The Owner shall Issue all instructions to the Contractor through the BCM.
Page 3
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
C-4 ACCESS TO JOB SITE. The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever It Is In preparation and
progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perforin its assigned functions under the
Contract Documents.
C-5 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS. The Owner will make visits to the Site to familiarize themselves with the progress and
quality of the Work and to determine If the work Is proceeding In accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on-site
observations and reports concerning the progress and quality of the work,the Owner will approve and authorize the Contractors
applications for payments.
C-6 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK The Owner will have authority to reflect work that does not conform to the Plans and
Specifications. Whenever,In its reasonable opinion,the Owner considers it necessary or advisable In order to Insure the proper
realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications,the Owner will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the work or
any portion thereof,or to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof,or to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated,installed or completed.
C-7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION. Upon agreement of the Contractor and Architect that the Work is
substantially complete,the Owner will schedule a Substantial Completion Inspection to be conducted by the Architect and attended
by representatives of the Architect,Owner and Contractor.Items identified during this Inspection as being incomplete,defective or
deficient shall be incorporated into a punch list and attached to the AIA document G704,which is to be prepared and signed by the •~
Contractor,and accepted,approved and signed by the Owner.
C-8 RIGHT TO AUDIT:
Contractor agrees that the City shall,until the expiration of three years after final payment under this contract,have access to and
the right to examine any directly pertinent books,documents,papers and records of the contractor Involving transactions relating to
this contract-
Contractor further agrees to include in all his subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the
City shall,until the expiration of three years after final payment under the subcontract,have access to and the tight to examine any
directly pertinent books,documents,papers and records of such subcontractor,Involving transactions to the subcontract.The term
"subcontract"as used herein Includes purchase orders.
Contractor agrees to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the city. The city agrees to reimburse Contractor for the
costs of copies at the rate published in the Texas Administrative Code.
SECTION D
CONTRACTOR
D-1 IDENTIFICATION. The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract.The term Contractor
means the Contractor or his authorized representative.
0-2 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor,
not as agent,or employee of the City. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and the exclusive right to control the details of the
work and services performed hereunder,and all persons performing same,and Contractor shall be solely responsible for the acts
of Its officers,agents,and employees. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between City
and the Contractor,its officers,agents and employees,and the doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply. --
D-3 SUBLETTING it is further agreed that the performance of this Contract,either In whole or in part,shall not be sublet or
assigned to anyone also by said Contractor without the written consent of the Director of Transportation and Public Works of the
City of Fort Worth.
D-4 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Agreement,Conditions
of the Contract,Drawings,Specifications,Addenda and modifications and shall at once report to the Owner and to the Architect any
error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall do no work without Drawings, Specifications and
Interpretations. -
D-5 SUPERVISION. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using his best skill and attention.He shall be solely
responsible for all construction means,methods,safety,techniques,sequences•and procedures and for coordinating all portions of
the Work under the Contract Documents.
D-6 LABOR AND MATERIALS. Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.
The successful low bidder will use its reasonable best efforts to hire local laborers, workmen and materialmen. The general
condition Is not to be constructed as limiting the right of any bidder to employee laborers,workmen or materialmen from outside
local area.
The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his'employees,and shall not employ on the Work
any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him.
Page 4
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
D-7 PREVAILING WAGE RATE. The Contractor agrees to pay not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages
for Work of a similar character in the locality In which the Work is performed,and not less than the general prevalling wage of per
diem wages for a legal holiday and overtime work to all laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on the Work under this
Contract.The Contractor agrees to pay at least the minimum wage per hour for all labor as the same is classified and set out by the
City of Fort Worth,Texas,a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof the same as if it were copies verbatim herein.
D-8 WARRANTY. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the Architect that all materials and equipment furnished under
this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified,.and that all work will be of good quality,free from faults and defects,and in
conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required.
by the Architect or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and
equipment.
The warranty provided in this Section shall be In addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy provided by law or
the Contract Documents.
D-9 TAXES. The Contractor is exempt from State Sales Tax on material incorporated into the finished construction, Excise
and Use Tax.
D-10 LICENSES, NOTICES AND FEES. The Contractor shall obtain all Permits, Licenses, Certificates, and Inspections,
whether permanent or temporary,required by law or these Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall give all Notices and comply with all Laws,Ordinances,Rules,Regulations and Orders of any public authority
bearing on the performance of the Work.If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that any of the Contract Documents are at
variance therewith In any respect,he shall promptly notify the Architect Owner in writing and any necessary changes will be made.If
the Contractor performs any Work knowing that it Is in violation of,or contrary to,any of such Laws,Statutes,Charter,Ordinances,
Orders of Directives,or Regulations without furnishing Notice to the Owner,the Contractor will assume full responsibility therefore
and bear all costs attributable thereto.
D41 CASH ALLOWANCES. The Contractor shall Include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract
Documents.These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the site,and all
applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses
contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contractor Sum and not In the allowance.The Contractor shall
cause the Work covered by these allowances to be performed for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct but
he will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost,when determined,is more
than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order which will include additional
handling costs on the she,labor,installation costs,field overhead,profit and other direct expenses resulting to the Contractor from
any increase over the original allowance.
D-12 SUPERINTENDENT. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be In
attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work.The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Contractor and the
Owner.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shalt be binding as if
given to the Contractor. Important communications will be confirmed In writing. Other communications will be so confirmed on
written request in each case.
D-13 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUB-CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner
for the acts and omissions of all his.employees and all Sub-contractors, their agents and employees, and all other persons
performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.
D44 FAILURE TO COMMENCE WORK: Should the Contractor fail to begin the work herein provided for within the time
herein fixed or to carry on and complete the same according to the true meaning of the intent and terms of said Plans,Specifications
and Contract Documents,then the Owner shall have the right to either demand the surety to take over the work and complete same
In accordance with the Contract Documents or to take charge of and complete the work in such a manner as it may deem proper,
and if,In the completion thereof, the cost to the said City shall exceed the.contract price or prices set forth in the said plans and
specifications made a part hereof, the Contractor and/or Its Surety shall pay said City on demand in writing, setting forth and
specifying an itemized statement of the total cost thereof,said excess cost
D-16 PROGRESS SCHEDULE. The Contractor,immediately after being awarded the contract,shall prepare and submit for
the Architects approval,an estimated progress schedule for the Work.The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project
This schedule shall Indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various states of construction and shall be revised as
required by the conditions of the Work, subject to the Architects approval. It shall also indicate the dates for submission and
approval of shop drawings and submittals as well as the delivery schedule for major pieces of equipment and/or materials.
The contractor shall submit an updated progress schedule the BCM at least monthly for approval along with the Contractor's
monthly progress payment requests.
D-16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of
all Drawings, Specifications,Addenda, approved Shop Drawings,Change Orders, and other Changes and Amendments In good
order and marked to record all changes made during construction.These shall also be available to the Architect. The Drawings,
marked to record all changes made during construction,shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work.The Architect
will prepare,and provide to the Owner,one complete set of reproducible record drawings of the work.
Page 5
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
D-17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance
charts,brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor,
and which illustrate some portion of the Work.
Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.
The Contractor shall review,stamp with his approval and submit,with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to
cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor,normally within the first 90 days of the work,six copies of all shop
Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents or subsequently by the Architect as covered by changes or
amendments.Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified,or as the Architect may require.At the time of
submission the Contractor shall inform the Architect In writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples,the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified
all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and
coordinated each shop drawing given in the Contract Documents.The Architect's approval of a separate item shall not indicate
approval of an assembly in which the Item functions. -
The Architect will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay,but only
for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents.The Architect's
approval of a separate Item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions.
The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings or new Samples until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention In writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Architect on previous submissions.
The Architect's approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of
submission and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. Architect's approval shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions to the Shop Drawings or*Samples.
No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submission shall be commenced until the Architect has approved the
submittal.All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Samples.
D-18 SITE USE. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment.Until acceptance of the work by
the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,the entire site of the Work shall be under the exclusive control,care and responsibility of
the Contractor.Contractor shall take every precaution against Injury or damage to-persons or property by the action of the elements
or from any other cause whatsoever.The Contractor shall rebuild,repair,restore and make good at his own expenses all injuries or
damages to any portions of the Work occasioned by any of the above,caused before acceptance.
D-18 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK. The Contractor shall do all cutting,fitting or patching of his Work that may
required to make its several parts fit together property,and shall not endanger any Work by cutting,excavating or otherwise altering
the Work or any part of it.
D-20 CLEAN UP. The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish.At
the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and-rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools,
construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials,and shall dean all glass surfaces and leave the Work"Broom-dean"or its
equivalent,except at otherwise specified.in addition to removal of rubbish and leaving the buildings"broom-dean",Contractor shall
clean all glass,replace any broken glass,remove stains,spots,marks and dirt from decorated work,clean hardware,remove paint
sprots and smears from all surfaces,clean fixtures and wash all concrete,the and terrazzo floors.
If the Contractor falls to clean up,the Owner may do so,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
D-21 COMMUNICATIONS. As a general rule,the Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through the BCM.
D-22 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS ON FEDERALLY FUNDED PROJECTS.Contractor shall observe and comply with
the requirements of the City of Fort Worth Fiscal Department,Intergovernmental Affairs and Grants Management as outlined In the
Supplemental Conditions contained in the Project Manual
SECTION E
SUBCONTRACTORS
E-1 DEFINITION. A Subcontractor Is a person or organization that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of
the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular In number and
masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative.
Nothing contained in the Contract,Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner and the Architect and any
subcontractor or any of his sub-subcontractors or materialmen.
Page 6
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14!2005
E-2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS.The bidder shall furnish a list of the names of the subcontractors or other persons or
organizations(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for such portions
of the Work as may be designated In the bidding requirements,or if none is so designated in the bidding requirements,the names of
the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work.Prior to the award of the Contract,the Architect shall notify the
successful bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or
organization on such list Failure of the Owner and Architect to make an objection to any person or organization on the list prior to
the award of this Contract shall not constitute acceptance of such person or organization.
If,prior to the award of the Contract,the Owner or Architect has an objective to any person or organization on such list,and refuses
to accept such person or organization,the apparent low bidder may, prior to the award,withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid
security. If such bidder submits an acceptable substitute,the Owner may,at its discretion,accept the bid or he may disqualify the
bid. If, after the award,the Owner or Architect objects in writing to any person or organization on such list,the Contractor shall
provide an acceptable substitute.
The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization that has been accepted by the
Owner and the Architect,unless the substitution is also acceptable to the Owner and the Architect.
E-3 TERMS OF SUBCONTRACTS. All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor(and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors)which shall contain provisions that
®. 1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed
under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
2. Require that such Work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents;
3. Require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party,in
reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment;
4. Require that all claims for additional costs,extensions of time,damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted
portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor(via any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor where appropriate)in
the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner,
5. Waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the
property Insurance,except such rights,If any,as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner,and,
6. Obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Section
All of the provisions set out in this section shall be deemed to have been included In every subcontract,and every subcontract shall
be so construed and applied as to the Owner and the Architect,whether or not such provisions are physically included in the sub-
contract.
E-4 MINORITY AND WDMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (WINBEL Should the base bid be less than $25,000, the
requirements of this section do not apply.
General: In accordance with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No 15530, the City of Fort Worth sets goals for the participation of
minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. Ordinance No 15530 is Incorporated in these
Specifications by reference.A copy of the Ordinance may be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. Failure to comply-with
the Ordinance shall be a material breach of contract.
Prior to Award: The MIWBE UTILIZATION FORM, MIWBE GOALS WAIVER FORM and GOOD FAiTH EFFORT FORM, as
T applicable,must be submitted within fare city business days after bid opening. Failure to submit the post bid information shall render
the bid non-responsive. The City will consider the contractors performance on other City Projects regarding its M/ BE program in
the evaluation of bids.Failure to comply with the City's MNVBE program,or to demonstrate a"good faith effort",shall result in a bid
being considered irresponsible.
During Construction: Contractor shall provide copies of subcontracts or cosigned letters of intent with approved M/ BE
subcontractors prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall also provide monthly reports on utilization of the
subcontractors to the Construction Manager. Upon request, Contractor must provide the City with complete and accurate
information regarding actual•work performed by a Minority or Women Business Enterprise(M/WBE) on the contract and proof of
payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books,records or files in it's possession
that will substantiate the actual work performed by an M/ WBE. The misrepresentation of acts (other than a negligent
misrepresentation)and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating
action under appropriate federal,state,or local laws or ordinances relating to false statement. Further any such misrepresentation
(other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result on the Contractor being determined to be
irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three years.
The Contractor may count first and second tier subcontractors and/or suppliers toward meeting the goals. The Contractor may
count toward its goal a portion of the total dollar amount of the contract with a joint venture equal to the percentage of the MANBE
" participation in the joint venture for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed. All subcontractors used in meeting the
goals must be certified prior to the award of the Contract.
Page 7
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/142005 -
Change Orders: Whenever a change order affects the work of an MI BE subcontractor or supplier,the MfWBE shall be given an
opportunity to perform the work. Whenever a change order Is$50,000 or more,the M/WBE coordinator shall determine the goals
applicable to the work to be performed under the change order.
During the term of the contract the contractor shall.,
1. Make no unjustified changes of deletions in it's MM/BE participation commitments submitted with or subsequent to the bid,
and,
2. if substantial subcontracting and/or substantial supplier opportunities arise during the term of the contract which the contractor
had represented he would perform with his forces,the contractor shall notify the City before subcontracts or purchase orders
are let,and shall be required to comply with modifications to goals as determined by the City,and,
3. Submit a REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF CHANGE FORM,if the contractor desires to change or delete any of the MfWBE
subcontractors or suppliers.
Justification for change of subcontractors may be granted for the following:
1. Failure of subcontractor to provide evidence of coverage by Workers'Compensation Insurance
2. Failure of subcontractor to provide required general liability or other insurance.
3. Failure of subcontractor to execute a standard subcontract forth in the amount of the proposal used by the Contractor in n
preparing his MfWBE Participation plan
4. Default by the MMIBE subcontractor or supplier in the performance of the subcontract.
5. Other reasons at the discretion of the MfWBE Coordinator
Within ten days after final payment from the City the cortractor shall provide the M/WBE Office with documentation to reflect final
participation of each subcontractor and supplier,Including non-MfWBEs,used on the project.
E-6 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the
Owner,an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work.The
Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his subcontractors.
If the Owner refuses to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a
particular subcontractor,the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand,made at any time after the Certificate for Payment
would otherwise have been issued,for his Work to the extent completed,less the retained percentage.
The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any Insurance monies received by the Contractor,and he shall require -w
each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors.
The Owner may,on request and at its discretion,furnish to any Subcontractor,if practicable,Information regarding percentages of
completion certified to the Contractor on account of Work done by such Subcontractors.
Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor.
E-6 SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EDA FUNDED PROJECTS
The Contractor will cause appropriate provisions to be inserted In all subcontracts to bind subcontractors to FDA contract
requirements as contained herein and to 15 CFR 24 or OMB Circular A-110,as appropriate.
Each subcontractor must agree to comply with all applicable Federal,State,and local requirements in addition to those set forth in
this section. -
No subcontractor will be employed on this Project,except as specifically approved by the City,who is contained in the listing of
contractors debarred, ineligible, suspended or Indebted to the United States from contractual dealings with Federal government
departments. The work performed by any such contractor or subcontractor will be ineligible for reimbursement wholly or partially
from EDA grant fluids.
All subcontracts In excess of$10,000 shall Include,or incorporate by reference,the equal opportunity clause of Executive Order
11246.
All subcontracts must contain a nondiscrimination clause.
Each subcontract must contain a requirement for compliance with the Davis-Bacon and related acts.-
Page
cts:Page 8
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
Each subcontractor must submit weekly each weekly payroll record and a weekly statement of compliance. These documents will
be submitted to the prime contractor who will compile them and submit to the City.The subcontractor can satisfy this requirement by
submitting a property executed Department of Labor Form WH-347
Each subcontract with every subcontractor must contain a clause committing the subcontractor to employment of local labor to the
maximum extent possible.
All subcontractors who employ more than 50 employees, and is a prime or first tier subcontractor, and has a subcontract or
- purchase order of$50,000 or more must submit a completed Standard Form 100(Compliance Report)by March 30 of each year.
Subcontractors performing work in areas covered by published goals for minorities will be required to report monthly on Form CC-
257.
SECTION F
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
F-1 OWNER'S RIGHT. The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the
Work. When separate contract are awarded for other portions of the Work,'the Contractor'in the Contract Documents in each case
shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract.
F-2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity
for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work,and shall property connect and
coordinate his work with theirs.
If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor,the
Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it
unsuitable for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the
mm other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other separate
contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work.
Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the site,the Contractor shall,upon due
notice,settle with such other contractor by agreement,If he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of
any damage alleged to have been so sustained,the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend against such suit at the
Contractor's expense,and If any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom,the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment
and shalt reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees,court costs and expenses which the Owner has Incurred in connection with
such suit.
F-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS. The Contractor shall do all cutting,fitting or patching of
his-Work that may be required to fit it to receive or be received by the work of other contractors shown In the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work or any other contractors by cutting,excavating or otherwise altering any work and shall
not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written consent of the Architect.
Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor.
F-4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP. If a dispute arises between the separate contractors as to their responsibility for
cleaning up,the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the several contractors as the Director of the Department of
Transportation and Public Works shall determine to be just.
SECTION G
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
G-1 CONFLICT OF LAWS. The law of the place where the site is located shall govern the Contract The Contractor must
familiarize himself and strictly comply with all Federal,State,and County and City Laws,Statutes,Charter,Ordinances,Regulations,
or Directives controlling the action or operation of those engaged upon the work affecting the materials used.He shall indemnify and
save harmless the City and all of its officers and agents against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any
such Laws,Statutes,Charter,Ordinances,Regulations,or Directives,whether by himself,his employees,agents or subcontractors.
G-2 GOVERNING LAWS. It is mutually agreed and understood that this agreement is made and entered into by the parties
hereto with reference to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth and the laws of the State of Texas with
reference to and governing all matters affecting this Contract,and the Contractor-agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the
same.
G-3 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In performing their duties underthe Statutes of the State of Texas and
the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth in connection with this Contract,or in exercising any of the powers granted the
Owner herein,the officers, agents and employees of the City of Fort Worth are engaged in the performance of a governmental
function and shall not incur any personal liability by virtue of such performance hereunder, except for gross negligence or willful
wrong.
G-4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Contractor agrees the comply with all laws, Federal, state and local, including all
ordinances,rules and regulations of the City of Fort Worth,Texas. Materials incorporated into the finished Project are not subject to
State Sales Tax.
Page 9
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
Contractors are responsible for obtaining construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code
Inspections with the Code Inspection Division in accordance with the permit requirements and submit a copy of updated schedule to
the Construction manager weekly. Building,plumbing,electrical and mechanical building permits are Issued without charge. Water
and sewer access fees will be paid by the City. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor.
G-5 INDEMNIFICATION:Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify Citys engineer and architect,and their personnel at
the project site for Contractors sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and
defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for
Property loss,property damage,personal Injury,including death,arising out of,or alleged to arise out of,the work and services to be
performed hereunder by Contractor,its officers,agents,employees,subcontractors,licensees or invitees,whether or not any such
hniury, damage or death is caused, in whole or in part, by the negligence or alleged negligence of Owner, its officers,
servants,or employees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against
any and all injuries to Owners officers,servants and employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner
arising from the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not any such inlury or damage is
caused In whole or In part by the nealiaence or alleged neoUaence of Owner,its offlcers,servants or employees.
In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final
payment shall not be made until Contractor either(a)submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or
a release from the claimant involved,or(b)provides Owner with a letter from Contractors liability insurance carrier that the claim
has been referred to the insurance carrier.
The Director may,if he deems it appropriate,refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against
whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract
G-6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. Except as provided in Paragraph E-2,this contract shall be binding upon and insure to
the benefit of the parties hereto,their Successors or Assigns.Contractor shall not assign or sublet all or any part of this Contract or
his rights or duties hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner.Any such purported assignment or subletting without
the prior written consent of Owner shalt be void.
G-7 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served If delivered in person to the individual or
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended,or If delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
G-8 SURETY BONDS: Surety Bonds are required on all City contracts in excess of$25,000. The Contractor agrees,on the
submittal of his Proposal to make,execute and deliver to said City of Fort Worth good and sufficient surety bonds for the faithful
performance of the terms and stipulations of the Contract and for the payment to all claimants for labor and/or materials fumished in �-
the prosecution of the work,such bonds being as provided and required in Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas,as
amended,in the form included in the Contract Documents,and such bonds shall be 100 percent of the total contract price,and the
said surety shall be a surety company duly and legally authorized to do business In the State of Texas,and acceptable to the City
Council of the City of Fort Worth.
Bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by or otherwise acceptable to the City. Each bond shall be property executed by both
the Contractor and the Surety Company. Bonds required by the City shall be in compliance with all relevant local,state and federal
statutes.
To be an acceptable surety on the bond the name of the surety should be included on the current U.S.Treasury List of Acceptable
Securities[Circular 570),and must be authorized to do business in Texas. Sureties not listed In Circular 570 may write performance
and payment bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percent of its capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure
any obligation over 10 percent The amount in excess of 10 percent must be reinsured by reinsurers who are duly authorized,
accredited,or trusteed to do business in the State of Texas. -
Should any surety for the contracted project be determined unsatisfactory at any time during same,the Contractor shall Immediately
provide a new surety bond satisfactory to the City.
If the contract amount Is less than $25,000, payment shall be made in one lump sum 30 calendar days after completion and
acceptance of the work.
G-9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to cant' out the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract,the Owner may,without prejudice to any
other remedy he may have,enter the site and make good such deficiencies.In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be
Issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies,including the cost
of the Architects additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.If the payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount,the Contract shall pay the difference to the Owner.
G-10 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.He shall defend all sults or claims
for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof and shall be responsible for all
such loss when a particular design,process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers Is specified;however,if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the design,process or product specified is an infringement of a patent.he shall be responsible
for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to Owner.
Page 10
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
G-11 TESTS. If the Contract Documents, Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected,tested or approved,the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness
and the data arranged so the Architect may observe such inspection,testing or approval.The Owner shall bear all costs of such
Inspection,tests and approvals unless otherwise provided.
If after the commencement of the Work, the Owner determine that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval not
included above,the Owner,upon written authorization from the Owner,will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection,
testing or approval,and the Contractor shall give notice as required In the preceding paragraph.If such special inspection or testing
reveals a failure of the Work to comply(1)with the requirements of the Contract Documents or(2)with respect to the performance
of the work, with Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, the
Contractor shall bear all costs thereof,including the Architects additional services made necessary by such costs;otherwise the
Owner shall bear such costs,and an appropriate Change Order shall be Issued.
The Contractor shall secure certificate of Inspection,testing or approval,and three copies will be promptly delivered by him to the
Owner.The Architect will review the certificates and forward one copy of each with his recommendation(s)to the Owner.
If the Owner wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this Section, they will do so promptly and,where
practicable,at the source of supply.
Neither the observations of the Architect or the Owner in their administration of the Construction Contract,nor Inspections,tests or
approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work In accordance
with the Contract Documents.
G-12 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTiNG UTILITIES SERVICES. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a
minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved sections of the utility.In some cases,the Contractor may
be required to perform the work while the existing utility is In service. The existing utility service may be Interrupted only when
approved by the Owner.When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities,the Contractor shall notify the Owner In writing at least
r ten days in advance of the time that he desires the existing service to be Interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a
minimum.Depending upon the activities at an existing facility that requires continuous service from the existing utility,an interruption
may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor.In such cases,the Interruption may have to be scheduled at a
time of minimum requirements of demand for the utility.The amount of time requested by the Contractor of existing utility services
shall be as approved by the Owner.
G43 LAYING OUT WORK The Contractor shall verify dimensions and elevations Indicated In layout of existing work.
Discrepancies between Drawings,Specifications,and existing conditions shall be referred to Architect for adjustment before work
affected Is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to cant'out work in satisfactory
workmanlike manner at the Contractor's sole expense.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the Construction
Documents.
- Prior to commencing work,the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural,Mechanical an Electrical
drawings; each with the other that In any affects the locations or elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any
discrepancy be found,he shall Immediately report the same to the Architect for verification and adjustment.Any duplication of work
made necessary by failure or neglect on his part to comply with this function shall be done at the contractors sole expense.
G-14 MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing any work,the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the
site or at the building and shall be wholly responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed
on account of any difference between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference that may be
found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration and adjustment before proceeding with the project.
G-15 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK. The Contractor shall carefully check the site where the project is
to be erected and.observe any existing overhead wires and equipment.Any such work shall be moved,replaced or protected,as
required,whether or not shown or specified at the contractor's sole expense.
Attention is directed to the possible existence of pipe and other underground improvements that may or may not be shown on the
Drawings.All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect any such improvements whether or not shown on the
Drawings.
Location of existing underground lines,shown the Drawings are based on the best available sources,but are to be regarded as
approximate only.Exercise extreme care In locating and Identifying these lines before excavation In adjacent areas.
G-16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the
Installation of jointed floor,wall and ceiling materials that:
1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed
under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
2. Place joints to relate to all opening and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed wherever possible.This Includes
heating registers,light fixtures,equipment,etc.
Page 11
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
If because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, eta, it is not possible to accomplish the
above,the Contractor shall request the Architect to determine the most satisfactory arrangement The Contractor shall establish
centerlines for all trades.
G-17 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK. The Contractor shall protect all existing street and other improvements from
damages.
Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in any interfere with or obstruct the
Ingress or egress to an from existing adjacent facilities.
Where new site work is to be connected to existing work,special care shall be exercised by the Contractor not to disturb or damage
the existing work more than necessary.All damaged work shall be replaced,repaired and restored to Its original condition at no cost
to the Owner.
G-18. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATION: It Is the intent of the contract documents,whether expressly stated or not,
that nothing containing hazardous materials,such as asbestos,shall be incorporated in to the project. The contractor shall exercise
every reasonable precaution to ensure that asbestos-containing materials are not incorporated into any portion of the project,
including advising all materials suppliers and subcontractors of this requirement. The contractor shall verify that components
containing lead do not contact the potable water supply.
G49 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING. Drawing showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, eta are
diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit their installation in the location shown.When this situation occurs,it shall be
brought to the Architect's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference.The Contractor will be held
responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Architect's approval.He shall remove and relocate such items
at his own expense if so directed by the Architect.Where possible uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and
or adjacent wall,floor or calling surfaces.
G-20 OVERLOADING. The Contractor shall be responsible for loading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe �-
carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment,tools, machinery or any other Item thereon. No loads shall be placed on
floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.
G-21 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products, processes,
equipment,or the like be installed or applied In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions,direction or specifications,or words to
this effect,it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be In strict accordance with printed instructions
furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar or those at the job site.Six copies of such
Instructions shall be furnished to the Architect and his approval thereof obtained before work is begun.
G-22 CLEANING UP.The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by
employees or as a result of the work.
At completion of work,the General Contractor shall,Immediately prior to final inspection of complete building,execute the following
final cleaning work with trained janitorial personnel and with material methods recommended by the manufactures of installed
materials.
1. Sweep and buff resilient floors and base,and vacuum carpeting.
2. Dust all metal and wood trim and similar finished materials.
3. Clean all cabinets and casework.
4. Dust all ceilings and walls.
5. Dust,and if necessary wash,all plumbing and electrical fixtures.
B. Wash all glass and similar non-resilient materials.
7. All hardware and other unpainted metals shall be cleaned and polished and all equipment and paint or decorated work shall be
cleaned and touched-up If necessary,and all temporary labels,tags,and paper coverings removed throughout the buildings.
Surfaces that are waxed shall be polished.
8: The exterior of the building,the grounds,approaches,equipment,sidewalks,streets,etc.shall be cleaned similar to Interior of
buildings and left In good order at the time of final acceptance. All paint surfaces shall be clean and unbroken,hardware shall
be clean and polished,all required repair work shall be completed and dirt areas shall be scraped and cleared of weed growth.
9. Clean all glass surfaces and mirrors of putty,paint materials,etc.,without scratching or injuring the glass and leave the work -.
bright,clean and polished.Cost of this cleaning work shall be bome by Contractor.
10. Cleaning,polishing,scaling,waxing and all other finish operations Indicated on the Drawings or required In the Specifications
shall be taken to Indicate the required condition at the time of acceptance of all work under the Contract.
11. Burning:Burning of rubbish on the premises will not be permitted.
Page 12
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/142005
G-23 DUST CONTROL. Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations during
the construction period.If serious problems or complaints arise due to air-bome dust,or when directed by the Architect,operations
causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and necessary steps taken to control the dust.
G-24 FIRE PROTECTION. The contractor shall at all times maintaln.good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire
damage or Injury to workmen.All scrap materials,rubbish and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall
not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.
Suitable storage space shall be provided outside the immediate building area for storing flammable materials and paints;no storage
will be permitted In the building.Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in dosed metal container and
removed from the building during unused periods.
A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed.Where electric or gas welding or
cutting work is done,Interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot
metal.When temporary heating devices are used,a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the
premises.
x The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations and NFPA Bulletins Nos. 10 and 241.
However,in all cases a minimum of two fire extinguishers shall be available for each floor of construction.
G-25 CUTTING AND PATCHING Wherever cutting and removal of portions of the existing work is indicated,such work shall
be neatly sawed or cut by contractor in a manner that will produce a neat straight line,parallel to adjacent surfaces or plumb for
vertical surfaces.Care should be exercised not to damage any work that Is to remain.
At no time shall any structural members be cut without written consent from the Architect.
G-26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
Final Inspection, Record Drawinos:Attention is called to General Conditions Section entitled, "Substantial Completion and Final
Payment.
Maintenance Manual:Sheets shall be 8 W x 11",except pull out sheets may be neatly folded to 8'r4'x 11".Manuals shall be bound
In plastic covered,3 ring,loose leaf binder with title of project lettered on front and shall contain:
1) Name,address and trade of all sub-contractors.
2) Complete maintenance instructions; name, address, and telephone number of installing Contractor, manufacturer's local
representative,for each piece of operative equipment.
3) Catalog data on plumbing fixtures,valves,water heaters, heating and cooling equipment,temperature control,fan,electrical
panels,service entrance equipment and light fixtures.
4) Manufacturer's name,type,color designation for resilient floors,windows,doors,concrete block,paint,roofing,other materials.
Submit six copies of Maintenance Manual,prior to request for final payment.
Operational Inspection and Maintenance Instruction: The Contractor shall provide at his expense, competent manufacturer's
representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and Items covered by the Drawings and
Specifications.This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to and during the initial start up.After all systems are functioning
properly the representatives shall instruct maintenance personnel of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of each
Item.
G-27 GUARANTEE AND EXTENDED GUARANTEE. Upon completion of the Project, prior to final payment, guarantees
required by technical divisions of Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted
through the Contractor to Architect.Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under Contract.
The Contractor shall guarantee the entire Project for one year.In addition,where separate guarantees,for certain portions of work,
are for longer periods,General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods. Manufacturer's extended
warrantees shall be Included in this contract.
Guarantees shall become valid and operative and commence upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by Owner.
Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage Is result of abuse,neglect by Owner or his successor(s)in interest.
The Contractor agrees to warrant his work and materials provided in accordance with this contract and the terms of the Technical
Specifications contained herein. Unless supplemented by the Technical Specifications or the manufacturers normal extended
warrantees,the Contractor shall warrant all work materials,and equipment against defects for a period of one year-from the date of
final acceptance. The Contractor further agrees to bear all costs of making good all work that is found to be defective or not
provided In accordance with the Contract Documents. Additionally If the facility or contents are damaged due to defective materials
or workmanship of the Contractor,the Contractor further agrees to bear all cost of repairing and/or replacing damaged items and
components to bring such items back to at least their original condition.
Page 13
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
G-28 RECORD DRAWINGS. Upon completion of the Work and prior to application for final payment,one print of each of the
drawings accompanying this specification shall be neatly and dearly marked in red by the Contractor to show variations between the
construction actually provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. The annotated documents shall be �.
delivered to Architect. Where a choice of materials and/or methods is permitted herein and where variations In the scope or
character of the work from the entire work indicated or spedfied are permitted either by award of bidding items specified for that
purpose, or by subsequent change to the drawings, the record drawings shall define the construction actually provided. The
representation of such variations shall conform to standard drafting practice and shall include supplementary notes, legends and
details which may be necessary for legibility and dear portrayal of the actual construction.The record drawings she#Indicate,in
addition,the actual location of all sub-surface utility lines,average depth below the surface and other appurtenances.
G-29 CONSTRUCTION FENCE. At the Contractor's option,he may provide a substantial chain-link construction fence around
all or a part of the site. The fences and gates must be maintained throughout the construction period.Remove the fences and gates -°
upon completion of the Project and restore the site to the required original or contract condition.
G-30 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,HANDLING. The Contractor shall handle,store and protect materials and products,
including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft(and
resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize
unnecessary long-term storage at project site prior to installation.
G-31 REMOVAL OF SALVAGED MATERIAL. The Contractor shall remove salvaged material and equipment from the Project
site and dispose of it in accordance with the law. Equipment or material identified in the Specifications or Plans for Owner salvage
shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Owner at any location in within the City limits as directed by the City.
G-32 MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE:Catalog,brand names,and manufacturer's references are descriptive,not restrictive.
Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be considered.Contractor shall inform the City of any substitutions intended for the
project within 5 business days of bid opening. Failure to inform the City of substitute projects will obligate the contractor to provide
the specified material If awarded the contract. Within 14 days after bid opening and upon request of the contractor,the contractor
will submit a full sized sample and/or detailed Information as required to allow the architect to determine the acceptability of
proposed substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as 'no substitute accepted', the City will accept no alternates to the
specified equipment.
SECTION H
CONTRACT TIME
H-1 DEFINITIONS.
The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work and is the number of calendar
days elapsing between the date of commencement and the date of substantial Completion plus additional days assessed for failure
to complete punch list items from the Final Inspection in a timely manner
The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed.If there is no notice to proceed,it shall be
the date of the Agreement or such other date as may be established therein.
The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect with the approval
of the Owner that construction is sufficiently complete,in accordance with the Contract Documents,so the Owner may occupy the
Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Final acceptance of the completed work or any portion
thereof can be made only by the Assistant City Manager,and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner.
A calendar day constitutes 24 hours of time and is any one of the seven days of a week,including Sunday,regardless of whether a
'Working Day'or not,and regardless of weather conditions or any situation which might delay construction.An extension of contract
time shall be in accordance with this Section.Extensions of time will be as recommended by the BCM with final approval by City of
Fort Worth.
A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, In which weather or other
conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of work for a continuous period of not less than seven
hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. However, nothing In these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the
Contractor from working on Saturdays If he so desires. Legal holidays are defined as being New Year's Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,Memorial Day,and Veteran's Day.
H-2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION. All the time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of essence to the Contract.
The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined In this Section. He shall carry the Work forward r
expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it within the Contract Time.
H3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME' If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or
neglect of the Owner or the Architect,or by any employee of the Owner,or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner,or
by any separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in --
transportation, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Architect
Page 14
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005 -
determines may justify the delay, then the contract time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as
recommended by the Architect and approved by the Owner.When the Contractor is delayed due to abnormal weather conditions,
the weather table provided as WT-1 in these Contract Documents shall be used as the basis for providing a fair and equitable
adjustment of the contract time.
All daims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Architect no more than fifteen days after the occurrence of the delay,
otherwise they shall be waived.
If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written interpretations shall be furnished,then no claim for delay
shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish such Interpretation until fifteen days after demand Is made for them,and not than
unless such a claim Is reasonable.
H-4 NO DAMAGE FOR DELAY. No payment, compensation or adjustment or any kind (other than the extensions of time
w provided for)shall be made to the contractor for damages because of hindrances or delays from an cause in the progress of the
work,whether such hindrances or delays be avoidable or unavoidable, and the contractor agrees that he will make no claim for
compensation,damages or mitigation of liquidated damages for any such delays,and will accept In full satisfaction for such delays
said extension of time.
SECTION I
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1-1 CONTRACT SUM. The Contract Sum is stated in the contract and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the
Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
1-2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES.Before the first Applicable for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Schedule
of Values of the various portions of the Work,including quantities if required by the Architect,aggregating the total Contract Sum,
divided so as to facilitate payments to Sub-contractors,prepared in such form as specified or as the Architect and the Contractor
F may agree upon, and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the Architect may require. Each item in the
Schedule of Values shall include its proper share of overhead and proftL This Schedule,when approved by the Architect and the
Owner,shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment
13 ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES.
1-4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS. On the first day of each month after the first month's work has been completed,the Contractor
will make current estimates in writing for review by the Architect of materials in place complete and the amount of work performed
during the preceding month or period and the value thereof at the prices contracted for as shown on the approved Schedule of
Values and Progress Schedule.
If payments are to be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at
the site or in an independent,bonded warehouse such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of
sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's titre to such materials or equipment or otherwise
protect the Owner's interest including applicable insurance and transportation to the site.
The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment,
whether incorporated in the Project or not,will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor,free and dear
of all liens,claims,security Interests or encumbrances hereinafter referred to as"liens';and that no Work,materials or equipment
covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor,or by any other persons performing the Work at
the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Work, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an
encumbrance thereon Is retained by the seller or otherwise Imposed by the Contractor or such other person.
The Contractor shall prepare each application for payment on AIA Document-6702,'Application and Certificate for Paymenr,and
attached thereto AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheer,to indicate the progress made to date and the period or month for
which payment is requested for each Item listed in the Schedule of Values. A copy of the revised monthly work progress schedule
must be attached before the pay request can be accepted.
1-6 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT. If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above,the above,the Architect
will,with reasonable promptness but not more than seven days after the receipt of the Application,prepare a Certificate of Payment,
with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount determined to be properly due, or state in writing reasons for withholding a
Certificate.
" The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Owner,based on the BCM's observations at the site
and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated;that the quality-of the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole upon Substantial
Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests required by the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract
Documents correctable prior to completion,and to any specific qualifications stated in the Certificate);and recommendations to the
Owner that the Contractor be paid in the amount certified.In addition,the Architect's approval of final payment assures the Owner
that the conditions precedent to the Contractors being entitled to final payment as set forth in this Section have been fulfilled.
After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall approve or disapprove same within ten days after it has
been delivered to the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works.For corttracts less than$400,000,Owner shall
pay 90% of the approved estimate to the Contractor within seven days after its approval, and the remaining 10% of each such
Page 15
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
estimate will be retained by the Owner until the final estimate is approved and the Work is accepted by the City Council of the City of
Fort Worth.For contracts In excess of$400,000,the Owner will retain only 5%of each estimate until the final estimate is approved
and work accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth.
No Certificate for a progress payment,nor any progress payment,nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the `
Owner,shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, or relieve the Contractor of
liability In respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.The Contractor shall promptly remedy any
defects in the Work and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom that shall appear within a period of one year from the
date of final acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified. -�
1-6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The BCM may decline to approve an Application for Payment and may withhold his Certificate
In whole or in part if in his opinion he Is unable to make the representations to the Owner as provided In this Section.The Architect
may also decline to approve any Applications for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent
inspections,may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary
in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:
1) Defective work not remedied;
2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;
3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors,or for labor,materials or equipment;
4) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
5) Damage to another contractor;
6) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time;or
7) Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the Contractor.
When such grounds for the refusal of payment are removed,payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.The w
Owner reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate,without payment of interest, If the Contractor faits to
perform the Work In accordance with the specifications.
1-7 Not used ,
1-6 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:The deduction for liquidated damages shall be as follows:
Amount of Contract Liquidated Damages Per Day
$15,000 or less $45
$15,001 to $25,000 $63
$25,001 to $50,000 $105
$50,001 to $100,000 $154
$100,000 to $500,000 $210
$500,001 to$1,000,000 $315
$1,000,001 to$2,000,000 $420
$2,000,001 to$5,000,000 $630
$5,000,001 to$10,000,000 $840
over$10,000,000 $980
1-9 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If,without fault on the part of the Contractor,the BCM should fail to Issue any Certificate for
Payment within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,if the Contractor's Application for Payment,or
If,without fault on the part of the Contractor,the Owner should fail to approve such estimate or to pay to the Contractor 90%or 95%
(as applicable)of the amount thereof within the period of time specified,then the Contractor may,upon seven(7)days additional
written notice to the Owner and to the Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.
1-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
Prior to the request for final payment,the Contractor must meet all provisions for Project Closeout.
When the Contractor determines that the Work is substantially complete,the Construction Manager shall inspect the project with the
Contractor and prepare a"Preliminary Punch List".
When the Architect, on the basis of a subsequent inspection, determines that the Work is substantially complete, he then will
prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion(G704)which,when approved by the Owner,shall allow the Contractor to request a
Certificate of Occupancy Which will establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Final Completion shall state the
responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance,heat,utilities,and insurance,shall set forth the remaining work as
a"final punch list".The Contractor shall complete the remaining work listed therein within 60 calendar days. When the Certificate of
Occupancy has been issued,the retainage will be reduced to 4%.
Upon completion of the work listed on the final punch list to the satisfaction of the City of Fort Worth,the retainage may be reduced
to 2.5%.
Paige 16
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005 �"
Should the Contractor fail to complete all contractual requirements of the contract,including submittals and final pay request within
the fixed time,the contract time will again commence. Should the contractor fail to complete the work within the contract duration,
liquidated damages will be assessed
Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final Inspection,the City will conduct a joint inspection and certify completion
of the final punch list by cosigning it with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit the following Items to the City prior to requesting final payment:
1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims(G706)stating that all payrolls,bilis for materials and equipment,and
other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible,have been
paid or otherwise satisfied,
2) Consent of Surety to Final Payment(G707),if any,to final payment,
3) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens(G706A),and,
4) Other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations,such as receipts,releases,and waivers of liens arising
out of the Contract.to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.
5) Contractor's Warranty
6) Statement that all outstanding work has been completed
" 7) Issuance of the Final Certificate of Substantial Completion
8) Final acceptance by the City of Fort Worth.
If any Subcontractor,materiaiman or laborer refuses to furnish a Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens,the Contractor may,at
the election of the Owner,furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any right,claim or lien which might be
asserted by such Subcontractor,materialman or laborer.If any such right,claim or lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are
made.The Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay to discharging such right,claim
or lien,Including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees.
The Contractor may then request final payment.The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
The Contractors one-year warranty will commence upon final acceptance of the Project by the City of Fort Worth.
The designated representative of the City Council of the City of Fort Worth will make final acceptance and no other form of
acceptance will be binding upon the Owner.Final payment and release of the retainage amount will become due within fifteen days
following acceptance.
-. 1-11 FINAL PAYMENT FOR UN-BONDED PROJECTS. Final payment will not be made for a period of 30 calendar days and
until all requirements have been met,with the exception of Consent of Surety for Final Payment.
SECTION J
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
J-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for Initiating, maintaining and
supervising all safety precautions and programs In connection with the Work.The Contractor shall designate a responsible member
of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractors superintendent
unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Architect.
J-2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and
shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage,Injury or loss to:
(1) All employees on the Work'and all other persons who may be affected thereby;
(2) All the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or-off the site,under the care,
custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub-contractors;and
(3) Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and
utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
Until acceptance of the Work,It shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every precaution against
Injury or damage to the Work by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever,whether arising from the execution
or from the non-execution of the Work.The Contractor shall rebuild,repair,restore and make good,at his own expense,all Injuries
or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the above,caused before its completion and acceptance.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as
required by exisfing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent
utilities.
ffi Page 17
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment Is necessary for the execution of the Work,the
Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
An damage or loss to any property referred to in the preceding paragraphs caused In whole or in part by the Contractor, any
Subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
shall be remedied by the Contractor,Including damage or loss attributable to faulty Drawings or Specifications and acts or omissions
of the Architect or anyone employed by him or for whose acts he may be liable,and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor or anyone claiming through the Contractor for such damage or loss.
The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
J-3 HARD HATS. Hard Hats will be required at all construction sites included in this Contract from start to completion of
work. Each Contractor,employee and visitor at any construction site included in the Contract will be required to wear a hard hat.
The Contractor shall enforce the wearing of hard hats by Contractor,employees and visitors.Contractor shall provide ten hard hats
for use by the consulting Architects and Engineers and visitors.
J-4 EMERGENCIES. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act at his discretion
to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on
account of emergency work shall be determined as provided In Changes in the Work. -
J-6 SAFE WORK PRACTICES. The Contractor shall employ safe practices In handling materials and equipment used in
performing required work so as to insure the safety of his workmen,City employees and the public. The Contractor shall keep the
premise free at all times from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall
remove all his wastes and rubbish from and about the work area,as well as his tools,equipment and surplus materials and shall
leave the area as dean and free of spot,stains,etc.,as before the work was undertaken.
J-6 TRENCH SAFETY The Contractor shall be responsible for all design and implementation of trench shoring and
stabilization to meet regulatory requirements. If the Proposal requires,the Contractor shall include a per unit cost for trench safety
measures in his bid. If not included in the Proposal,the Contractor shall Include a cost for trench safety measures for all trenches
over 5 feet in depth in his Schedule of Values.
SECTION K-INSURANCE
K-1 Insurance Required. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance
required under this Section and such insurance.has been approved by the City of Fort Worth,nor shall the Contractor allow any
Subcontractor to commence work to be performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so .m
obtained and approved. The City of Fort Worth will be listed as an "additional Insured' on all policies except Worker's
Compensation.
K-2 Workers'Compensation Insurance:
1) General
a) Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide to the Owner(City) a certificate showing
that It has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project
In compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section.
b) Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees-to require each and every subcontractor who will
perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy
of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project Contractor will not permit any
subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of
all such certificates to the Owner(City).
c) By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage,the contractor is representing to
the City that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's
compensation coverage for the duration of the project,that the coverage will be based on.proper reporting of classification
codes and payroll amounts,and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate Insurance carrier or,In the
case of a self-insured, with the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission's Division of Seff-Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the'contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil
penalties or other civil actions.
d) The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the
City to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of
breach from the City.
2) Definitions:
a) Certificate of coverage(*certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance,a certificate of authority to self-Insure issued by
the Texas Workers'Compensation Commission,or a coverage agreement(TWCC-81,TWCC-82,TWCC-83,or TWCC-
84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees.providing
services on a project,for the duration ofthe.project.
Page 18
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
b) Duration of the Project. Includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractors/person's
work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City.
c) Persons providing services on the project("subcontractor"In section 406.096)4ndudes all persons or entities performing
all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person
contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This Includes, without
limitation, Independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of
any such entity,or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services"include,
without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other
services related to a project. "Services" does not Include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors,office supply deliveries,and delivery of portable toilets.
3) Requirements
a) The contractor shall provide coverage,based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of
any coverage agreements, which meets the-statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code,Section 401.011(44) for all
employees of the contractor providing services of the project,for the duration of the project.
b) The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract.
c) If the coverage period shown on the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project,the
contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing that
coverage has been extended.
d) The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project,and provide to the City:
a certificate of coverage,prior to that person beginning work on the project,so the governmental entity will have on
file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project;and
i1) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
coverage,if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project.
e) The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter.
f) The contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within ten(10)days after the contractor
knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing
services on the project
g) The contractor shall post on each project site a notice,in the text,form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers
Compensation Commission,Informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered,
and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
h) The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to:
provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and fling of any
coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas labor Code,Section 401.011(44)for all of its
employees providing services on the project,for the duration of the project;
ti) provide to the contractor,prior to that person beginning work on the project,a certificate of coverage showing that
coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project,for the duration of the
project:
Iii) provide the contractor,prior to the end of the coverage period,a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
coverage,if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project,..
Iv) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts,and provide to the contractor.
(1) a certificate of coverage,prior to the other person beginning work on the project;and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, If the
coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
v) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter.
v) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within ten(10)days after the person knew or should
have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the
project;and
A) contractually require each person with whom it contracts,to perform as required by paragraphs h4)-A),with the
certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.
4) Posting of Required Workers Compensation Coverage.
a) The contractor shall post a notice on each project site Informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered,and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage.This
notice does not satisfy other posting requirements Imposed by the Texas Workers Compensation Act or other Texas
Workers Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text
In at least 19-point normal type,and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker
population. The text for the notices shall be the following text,without any additional words or changes:
a Page 19
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
"REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE
The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project
must be covered by worker's compensation Insurance. This includes persons providing,hauling,or delivering
equipment or materials,or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project,regardless of
the identity of their employer or status as an employee".
Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage,to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage,or to report an
employer's failure to provide coverage.'
K-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the tern of this Contract such Liability
Insurance as shall protect him,the City of Fort Worth and any Subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract,from claims
of damage which may arise from operations under this Contract,including blasting,when blasting is done on,or in connection with
the Work of the Project,whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by either of them and the limits of such insurance shall be not less than the following:
1) Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each accident, or reasonably equivalent split limits for bodily injury and property damage.
Coverage shall be on"any auto"including leased,hired,owned,non-owned and borrowed vehicles used in connection with
this Contract.
2) Commercial General Liability: $1,000,000 each occurrence. Coverage under the policy shall be as comprehensive as that
provided in a current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy form approved for use in Texas and the policy shall have no
exclusions by endorsement unless such are approved by the City.
3) Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance:When the Project specifically requires the removal of Asbestos Containing Materials,
the Contractor,or subcontractor performing the removal,shall be required to maintain Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance
as follows: $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit. The coverage shall Include any pollution exposure,
Including environmental Impairment liability, associated with the services and operations performed under this contract in
addition to sudden and accidental contamination or pollution liability for gradual emissions and clean-up costs.
K-4 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE.
Unless stated otherwise In the Proposal or Invitation,the Contractor shall procure,pay for and maintain at all times during the term
of this Contract, Builder's Risk Insurance against the perils of fire, lightning, windstorm, hurricane, hail, riot, explosion, civic
commotion,smoke,aircraft,land vehicles,vandalism,and malicious mischief,at a limit equal to 100%of the Contract Sum.
The policy shall include coverage for materials and supplies while in transit and while being stored on or off site. If specifically
required in the Instructions to Bidders,the policy shall include coverage for flood and earthquake. Different sub-limits for these
coverages must be approved by the City.
Consequential damage due to faulty workmanship and/or design performed by the Contractor or his agents shall be covered.
Upon completion of the Work,the Contractor shall notify the City of Fort Worth in writing before terminating this Insurance.
K-5' PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE. The Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance documenting the
Transportation and Public Works Department,City of Fort Worth as a"Certificate Holder",and noting the specific projects)covered
by the Contractor's insurance as documented on the certificate of Insurance. More than one certificate may be required of the
Contractor depending upon the agents an/or insurers for the Contractor's insurance coverages specified for the project(s).
K-6 OTHER INSURANCE RELATED REQUIREMENTS.
1) The City of Fort Worth shall be an additional Insured,by endorsement,on all applicable insurance policies.
2) Applicable insurance policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Fort Worth.
3) Insurers of policies maintained by Contractor and its subcontractor(s),if applicable,shall be authorized to do business in the
State of Texas,or otherwise approved by the City of Fort Worth,and such shall be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth insofar ,
as their financial strength and solvency are concerned. Any company through which the insurance Is placed must have a
rating of at least A:VII, as stated in current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. At the City's sole discretion; a less.
favorable rate may be accepted by the City.
4) Deductible limits on Insurance policies and/or self insured retentions exceeding$10,000 require approval of the City of Fort -�
Worth as respects this Contract.
5) The City of Fort Worth shall be notified in writing a minimum of thirty.days prior to an insurer's action In the event of
cancellation, nonrenewal or material change in coverage regarding any policy providing insurance coverage required in this
Contract.
6) Full limits of Insurance shall be available for claims arising out of this Contract with the City of Fort Worth.
7) The Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance to the City prior to commencement of operations pursuant to this
Contract Any failure on part of the City of Fort Worth to request such documentation shall not be construed as a waiver of
Insurance requirements specified herein.
Page 20
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
8) The City of Fort Worth shall be entitled,upon request and without incurring expense,to review the insurance policies including
endorsements thereto and,at its discretion,to require proof of payment for policy premiums.
9) The City of Fort Worth shall not be responsible for paying the cost of insurance coverages required herein.
10) Notice of any actual or potential claim and/or litigation that would affect insurance coverages required herein shall be provided
to the City in a timely manner.
11) "Other insurance"as referenced in any policy of insurance providing coverages required herein shall not apply to any insurance
policy or program maintained by the City of Fort Worth.
12) Contractor shall agree to either require its subcontractors to maintain the same insurance coverages and limits thereof as
T specified herein or the Contractor shall provide such coverage on the Contractor's subcontractors.
SECTION L
CHANGES IN THE WORK
u L-1 CHANGE ORDER. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the'general
scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted
accordingly. All Such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable
conditions of the Contract Documents.
A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Contractor,Owner and the Architect,issued after the execution of
the Contract,authorizing a Change in the Work or adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.The Contract Sum and the
Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.
- Any changes in work required due to changed or unforeseen conditions,or by request of either the Contractor or the City,shall be
coordinated with the Director,Department of Transportation and Public Works. A change order must be written and duly negotiated
and executed prior to performing changed work.
_ The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a Change in the work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:
1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized,including the allowance to Contractor for overhead and profit stipulated
In the original contract proposal;
2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;or
3) by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee.
If none of the methods set forth herein above is agreed upon,the Contractor,provided he receives a Change Order,shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such work shall then be determined on the basis of the Contractor's reasonable
expenditures and savings,including a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit as indicted in the original contract proposal.In
such cases,the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect shall prescribe,an itemized accorniting together
with appropriate supporting data. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the
Architect's Certificate of Payment as approved by the Owner.
If after the contract has been executed,.the Architect,requests a price proposal from the Contractor for a proposed change M scope
of the work,Contractor shall process such proposal within seven days of receipt and return the price quote to the Architect In writing.
The Architect shall review the price quotation and if approval is recommended,forward the proposed change order request and
.M price proposal to the Owner for approval.If the Architect will attempt to negotiate with Contractor to revise the proposal to a figure
which is fair and reasonable and forward it on to the Owner for approval.If the negotiations do not result in an equitable solution,the
Architect shall prepare a cost-plus type Change Order with a price-not-to-exceed figure for approval by the City and require specific
documentation to be provided by Contractor in accordance with the paragraph above.
Contractor is advised that according to City of Fort Worth Charter,that,the City Council must approve all Change Orders and Work
Orders which results in.an increase in cost of the contract amount by over$25,000. Normal processing time for the City Staff to
obtain City Council approval, once the recommended change order has been received at the City, is approximately thirty days.
Owner,and Contractor shall endeavor to identify Change Order items as early in the Construction process as possible to minimize
their impact on the construction schedule.
If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if the quantities originally contemplated are so
changed in a proposed Change Order that application-of the agreed.unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a
hardship on the Owner or the Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship.
If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of(1)any written interpretation issued pursuant to Section A,
(2)any order by the Architect or Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section B,where the Contract was not at fault, or(3) any
written order for a minor change in the Work,the Contractor shall make such claim.
L-2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME.*If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract
Sum or an extension In the Contract Time, he shalt give the Architect written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the
Page 21
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City.of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
occurrence of the event that gave rise to such claim:This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the
Work,except In an emergency endangering life or property In which case the Contractor shall proceed In accordance with Section J.
No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such claim, if
approved by the Owner,shall be authorized by Change Order.
L-3 OVERHEAD ALLOWANCES FOR CHANGES: Should any change in the work or extra work be ordered,the following
applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor costs to cover overhead and profit:
1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractors own forces shall not exceed
fifteen percent(15° 1..
2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a Subcontractor and supervised by the
Contractor shall not exceed ten percent(10%f.
L-4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK. The Architect shall have authority to order minor changes In the Work not Involving
an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract
Documents.Such changes may be effected by Field Order or by other written order.Such changes shall be confirmed in writing by
the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor.
L-5 FIELD ORDERS. The Architect may issue written Field Orders which interpret the Contract Documents,or which order
minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.The Contractor shall carry out such Field Orders
promptly.
SECTION M
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
M-1 UNCOVERING OF WORK. If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner,it must be uncovered for-
observation
orobservation and replaced,at the Contractors expense.
If any other work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered,the Architect
or the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work be found In accordance with
the Pians and Specifications,the cost of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be charged to the Owner.
If such work be found not in accordance with the Pians and Specifications,the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found
that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed by the Owner.
M-2 CORRECTION OF WORK. The Contractor shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing
to conform to the Plans and Spedfications whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, m
installed or completed.The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including the cost of the Architect's
additional service thereby made necessary.
If,within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by
the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents,any of the work is found to be defective or not In
accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to
do so,unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition,describing same specifically
and not generally.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
All such defective or non-conforming work under the preceding paragraphs shall be removed from the site where necessary,and the
work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or
correction.
If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non-conforming work within a reasonable fime fixed by written notice from the
the Owner,the'Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor.If the Contractor
does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter,the Owner may upon ten additional days'written
notice sell such work at auction or at prIvats sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof,-after deducting all the costs that
should have been borne by the Contractor including compensation for additional architectural services.If such proceeds of sale do
not cover all costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate
Change Order shall be Issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount,the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non:conforming work,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section G.
The obligation of the Contractor under this Section shall be in addition to and not In limitation of any obligations imposed upon him
by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law.
M-3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK. If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non-
conforming work, he may do so instead of requiring Its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to
reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum, or, If the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the
Contractor. ..
Page 22
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
SECTION N
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
N4 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR. If the work is stopped for a period of 30 days under an order or any court or
other public authority having jurisdiction;through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or
any other persons performing any of the work under a contract with the Contractor,or if the work should be stopped for a period of
30 days by the Contractor for the Owner's failure to make payment thereon as provided in Section I,then the Contractor may after
the end of such period of 30 days and upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner,terminate the Contract.
N-2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER. If the contractor is adjudged as bankrupt,or if he makes a general assignment for the
benefit of his creditors,or If a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency,of If the Contractor refuses,except In cases for
which extension of time is provided,to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials,or If he fails to make prompt
payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor,or fails to comply with al Laws,Statutes,Charter,Ordinances,Regulations or
Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract
Documents,then the Owner, on its own Initiative that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may,without prejudice to any
rights or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety,if any,seven(7)days'written notice,terminate the employment of
the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery thereon
owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient.In such case the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished.
If the costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's additional services.,exceed the unpaid balance of the
Contract,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
The City of Fort Worth may terminate this contract in whole,or from time to time,in part,whenever such termination is in the best
Interest of the City. Termination will be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying to what extent
performance of the work of the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of termination the
contractor shall:
a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination.
b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated.
c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of
termination.
After termination as above,the City will pay the contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed;
provided,however,that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion
thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments,If,any otherwise made. Contractor
shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In
the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph,
such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,and the decision by the
City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract
SECTION O
SIGNS
The*Contractor shall construct and install the project designation sign as required in the Contract Documents and in strict
accordance with the Specifications for"Project Designation Signs."This sign shall be a part of this Contract and shall be included in
the Contractor's Base Bid for the Project.
SECTION P
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
P-1 SCOPE. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain facilities and perform temporary work required in the
performance of this Contract,Including those shown and specified.
P-2 USE OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES. All temporary facilities shall be made available.for use by all workmen and
subcontractors employed on the project,subject to reasonable directions by the Contractor as to their proper and most efficient
utilization.
P-3 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL. The Contractor shall maintain temporary facilities in a proper, safe operating and
sanitary condition for the duration of the Contract.Upon completion of the Contract,all such temporary work and facilities shall be
removed from the premises and disposed of unless otherwise directed or specified hereunder.
P-4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHED.
The Contractor is not required to provide a temporary field office or telephone for projects under$1,000,000. Contractor shall equip
the Project Superintendent with a pager and provide 24-hour contacts to the City.
The Contractor shall provide a temporary field office building for himself, his subcontractors and use by the Architect. For
constructioncontracts with a bid price In excess of$1,000,000.00,the Contractor shall provide a separate field office for the City's
Page 23
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
field representative(but the separate office may be in the some structure).The buildings shall afford protection against the weather,
and each office shall have a lockable door,at least one window,adequate electrical outlets and lighting,and a shelf large enough to
accommodate perusal of the project drawings.Openings shall have suitable locks.Field offices shall be maintained for the full time
during the operation of the work of the Contract. During cold weather months, the field offices shall be suitably insulated and
equipped with a heating device to maintain 70 degree Fahrenheit temperature during the workday.During warm weather the offices
shall be equipped with an air conditioning device to maintain temperature below 75 degrees F.Upon completion of the work of the
Contract,the Contractor shall remove the building from the premises. In addition to the drawing shelf, provide for the City field
representatives office:one deck,four chairs,plan rack and a four drawer filing cabinet(with lock).Each office shall contain not less
than 120 square feet of floor space.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage sheds,other temporary buildings or trailers on the project site as required for his
use.Location of sheds and trailers shall be as approved by the Owner.Remove sheds when work is completed,or as directed.
P-6 TELEPHONE. The Contractor shall provide and pay for telephone installation and service to the field offices described -
above.Service shall be maintained for the duration of operations under this contract The Contractor shall provide for and pay for an
automatic telephone-answering device at the.site office for the duration of the project.Contractor will install separate fax lines and
Instruments for the City and the Contractor.
P-6 TOILET FACILITIES. The Contractor shall provide proper, sanitary and adequate toilet facilities for the use of all
workmen and subcontractors employed on the project
P-7 UTILITIES. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide for temporary water and electricity required
during the construction.Contractor shall provide and install temporary utility meters during the contract construction period.These m
meters will be read and the Contractor will be billed on this actual use.The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required
to tap into the utilities.The Contractor shall make the connections and extend the service lines to the construction area for use of all
trades.Upon completion of the work all utility tines shall be removed and repairs made to the existing lines.Only utilities at existing
voltages,pressures,frequencies,etc.will be available to the Contractor.
Water. Provide an ample supply of potable water for all purposes of construction at a point convenient to the project or as shown on
the Drawings.Pipe water from the source of supply to all points where water will be required.Provide sufficient hose to cavy water
to every required part of the construction and allow the use of water facilities to subcontractors engaged on the work. Provide
pumps,tanks and compressors as may be required to produce required pressures.
Electric Service. Provide adequate electric service for power and lighting to all points where required.Temporary,electric service
shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics to supply proper current for various types of construction tools, motors,welding
machines,lights,heating plant,air conditioning system,pumps,and other work required.Provide sufficient number of electric outlets
so that 50 foot long extension cords will reach all work requiring light or power.
Lighting. Supply and maintain temporary lighting so that work of all trades maybe properly and safely performed,in such areas and
at such time that day-lighting is inadequate. Provide at least 0.75 watts of incandescent lighting per squgr4e foot and maintain a
socket voltage of at least 110 volts.Use at least 100 waft lamps. In any event,the lighting intensity shall not be less than 5 foot
candies in the vicinity of work and traffic areas.
P-8 HEATING. Heating devices required under this paragraph shall not be electric. The Contractor shall provide heat,
ventilation,fuel and services as required to protect all work and materials and to keep the humidity down to the extent required to
prevent corrosion of any metal and to prevent dampness or mildew which is potentially damaging to materials and finishes.All such
heating,ventilation and services shall be provided and maintained until final acceptance of all work.In addition,the Contractor shall
provide heat ventilation prior and during the following work operations as follows:
a) At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete provide sufficient heat to insure the heating of the spaces
Involved to not less than 40 F.
b) From the beginning of the application of drywall and during the setting and curing period,provide sufficient heat to produce a
temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 55 F.
c). For a period of seven(7)days previous to the placing of interior finish materials and throughout the placing of finish painting, —
decorating and laying of resilient flooring materials,provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 60 F.
P-9 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting
equipment,rubbish chutes,ladders to roof,barricades around openings,arid-all other temporary work as required to complete all
work of the Contract.Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his sub-contractors.
The Contractor shall provide,maintain,and remove upon completion of the work,or sooner,if authorized by.the Owner,all fences, �..
barricades,lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways,temporary fire escapes,and other protective structures or devices necessary for
the safety of workmen,City employees,equipment,the public and property.
All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction,including Insurance companies,with regards to safety precautions,operation and fire hazard.
Page 24
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
The Contractor shall provide and maintain pumping facilities, .including power, for keeping the site, all times, whether from
underground seepage,rainfall,drainage of broken lines.
The Contractor shall maintain provision for closing and locking the building at such time as possible to do so.If this Is not feasible,
maintain a night
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures, required to protect the work in progress from outside
elements,dusts, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract.Such protection shall be positive,shall meet the
approval of the Owner and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period or as required to provide for the protection
as specified.
P-10 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD. The Contractor shall furnish,install and maintain during the life of the project a weather-
fight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for
locking.The bulletin board shall be mounted where and as approved by the Owner,in a prominent place accessible to employees of
the Contractor and sub-contractors,and to applicants for employment The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed by him upon completion of the Contract work.The following information which will be furnished by the City to
the Contractor,shall be posted on the bulletin board and shall be maintained by the Contractor in easily readable condition at all
Imes for the duration of the Contract -
a. The Equal Opportunity Poster and Notice Nondiscrimination of Employment(Standard Forth 38).
b. Wage Rate Information Poster(Form SOL 155),with the Contract Schedule of minimum wage rates as required by the
Davis-Bacon Act
G Safety Posters.
SECTION Q
VENUE
Should any action arise out of the terms and conditions of this contract,venue for said action shall He in Tarrant County,Texas.
Page 25
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract,City of Fort Worth.5/1412005
WEATHER TABLE
Month Average Inches of Snow/Ice
Days of Rainfall Pellets
Rain
January 7 1.80 1
February 7 2.36
March 7 2.54
April 8 4.30 0
May 8 4.47 0
June 6 3.05 0
July 5 1.84 0
August 5 2.26 0
September 7 3.15 0
October 5 2.68 0
November 6 2.03
December 6 1.82
ANNUALLY 77 32.30 1
(1) Mean number of days rainfall, 0.01"or more
(2) Average normal precipitation, in inches
(3) Mean number of days 1.0 inch or more
* Less than 0.5 inches
This table is based on information reported from Dallas-Fort Worth Regional Airport, Texas. Latitude 32
deg 54 min north, longitude 97 deg 02 min West, elevation (ground)551 ft
Average number of days of rain, snow, and ice are based on records covering 27 years. Precipitation is
based on record of 1941-1970 period
This table is to be used as a basis for calculation of excess rain or weather days for projects with duration
in calendar days. If the site records indicate that the Contractor was unable to carry out operations due to
weather, it is counted as a weather day. If the number of weather days exceeds the number of average
rain days plus the snow/ice-pellet days for a given month, the contract period will be adjusted by Change
Order.
...........
..........
..... ......
-:::`-':`-:PR 0 JE.QT:PESIbNAT :s
ION:: IGN':.:
.. .............
w' w w: t:*:..:.:*... .......
... ........
TH�
1 4 m
-77-
didlIP 77.7
.............
.... ...... ...... ..
........ .......... ......
.... .................
. ........ ........
............. ......
........... .
.................
..................
Architedt
hitects u4ifid'
Con ":: . ...........
............
..... . .....
........................
... .......
..... ......
�:VQD
MDE
...........
(LiM,'.Bdnd":Fund, etc) .:r:..q.
CHEDULED COMPLEIT-19N DAM
........ ....
.... .............
.. ........ ......
... ... ...............
.. ... ...........
... ....... ..... .......
:.......... ......
... ................ .......... ....................
:w. F.. ...... ......................
-:SIGN-lSlWHrM:WIT.H OWE,BORDER-ARlL1`L�°`IFRIIJO IIS
I k6jlMl
FEW! 1CA.
"7
CONTRAMOR,BONMAND COMPLEM4 DAMN.ORMATIOWSINH
...................:::::::CITY OFFORT WORTH k CiCCj 1!3 AVA LABL=IN ie VF_(, (17€raHmAr FM-C)Zvl TtjE,rmc)F FoH-t
11 RE ROGRAPHIC S 7IF-7, AU 0,OPY 18 IN FrylS'280 PUJ E. THE_M OLI_Y'GQ4C It P M�
............................. ...............................
.................. ......
........................... ..................... .........
:w:::.:�:_;: .............;......... ........ ......... ..........
............ . .......................
..........................
.........................
..........
.............. .. ........................ ..... .......................
....................:: *%:%:%`:;::l:.
.... ........
............... ..................a............................
..................
.................... ..... .......... .... ......
.................... .. ................ ............I.....................................
............................
................... ........ ......
............................................ .......... ........ .. ......
..... .................................. .... .. ...............
T
..........
..........W
. . ..... Fo'
--s. r :.p ......
.... ......
........... ....
i
-IMR�MCW M OF E?
I r'loiln a3vWMVfM from
..........
below of 06fts S#RdMi older of invoim
6 ......... .
......................... -dW%M .......
..........
Lclaiiatddaezeei0d6U-f6r.&6.fIdIUGWm,
g ressom:
... ..........
NUM.of exclllpoaolw arganraation. city bf Pkilt WOA!
. ...... ..........
...................... ............ —
............... ............ ......... ... .... ...
.............
...........
:m
I uu4perN land that I will be liable:for payment of nits Lim which may bemme due farfailare
comply nith ihe:pr9VW9n--.endue Matev,city andLei'mempalimn
t1twa aria Comptr Four4arding exempt purchase:. Liability for the tax will bi ddwndaz-by
the prim pa[4 for the.ta�.ftenis purckand ordie-fiftmackctrza(W value for a p
.......... ...... ........ ...........
............ ....... .....
. .... .....
Aim&rs taudthatftisa ailsdemeanor to give!
which I kupw,of thr,ItmeWpurtbage,-will be-=W-lu a mniweC iiflrer ehizi i talented In .... ........
CarthIlestoand u be nod up'tolsm:iper:omur-
. ................7 ......
........... ...
ffunidpaMes are:grintat tax=mV t'sixtuir per-tWTccn0'C6urfi(rA0(PE4 ART 6,9ec6w-L
C3ty Worth
k
......................
.......... . ............................ . ................
........... .......
Six mi drus. hraclaoortmn :::::
amofil e
pro- edpSp . - 0
jq4trad .......
................
.....................
............ ............................................ ...........
.............
oat&.
.........................
..................................... ....
...........
TJ 119 CO tLi fl P a t 0 E1012-k D D t M I 113 110 a number-to be.•v"d,;Sales-and gs6.b4~.exqm*fion.numb fts'
..........
"lax emEwpt"numbers do not exi-qi::. ........ ............. .............
.............
Tbihi cortiricnte should ho
............................... .............................
Cuspptrallcr(IC Pubil r Ac"u ...•.Pis..............................
...............
...........................a..............................::........................ ............................
.............. ...............................
........... ................... ...............
.............................. ............
........................... .............................
.......................... ...
...........
..............................
..................
................................ ... ...
I�Twoiv
..........................
..............................
........................... DEPARTMENT .........
.......................
-PURCKASIN0.Div t�caxi .....................
........... ..... ....
.............................:
oF FowrMom k000ITRRccKmow.rw!FrRsrr
:xf-;fony AXI(wTei, T PAAi 7ff I UZ:......
...............A.......
:,;:.::...........:..................:#;VaI8tAi8-7-14440; ..........
................................ ... ....................... ....................
............. .. ......
::;::::::;: ::::::::r:::::::................. ............
............. ............—...4.............
.... ................................................ ....................................... .................
2000
BUILDING&CONSTRUCTION TRADES
STANDARD WAGE RATE
FOR TARRANT COUNTY
CLASSIFICATION HOURLY RATE CLASSIFICATION HOURLY RATE
AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC $1596 PLASTERER 13.29
AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC HELPER 8.81 PLASTERER HELPER 8.63
ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER 13.82 PLUMBER 16.26
ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER HELPER 9.79 PLUMBER HELPER 9.39
BRICKLAYER/STONE MASON 13.25 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER 11.88
BRICKLAYER/STONE MASON HELPER 9.86 REINFORCING STEEL HELPER 9.18
CARPENTER 13.00 ROOFER 13.17
CARPENTER HELPER 9.34 ROOFER HELPER 7.82
CONCRETE FINISHER 12.00 SHEET METAL WORKER 15.87
CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER 9.44 SHEET METAL WORKER HELPER 9.29
CONCRETE FORM BUILDER 11.59 SHEETROCK HANUER 12.70
CONCRETE FORM BUILDER HELPER 8.87 SHEETROCK HANGER HELPER 9.71
DRYWALL TAPER 11.87 SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER 16.93
DRYWALL TAPER HELPER 8.25 SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER HELPER 7.81
ELECTRICIAN JOURNEYMAN 16.29 STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL 14.66
ELECTRICIAN HELPER 10.20 STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL HELPER 7.91
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN 12.86 WELDER 14.87
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN HELPER 12.67 WELDER HELPER 9.67
FLOOR LAYER(CARPET) 13.58
FLOOR LAYER(RESILIENT) 14.48 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
FLOOR LAYER HELPER 8.56
GLAZIER 13.66 EQUIPMENT OPERATORS 14.66
GLAZIER HELPER 9.26 CONCRETE PUMP OPERATORS 13.30
INSULATOR 15.89
INSULATOR HELPER 9.46 CRANE,CLAMSHELL,BACKHOE,
LABORER COMMON 7.82 DERRICK,D'LINE SHO 13.03
LABORER SKILLED 9.66
LATHER 15.80 FORKLIFT OPERATOR 10.34
LATHER HELPER 11.75 FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR 11.66
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER 13.34 FRONT END LOADER OPERATOR 11.60
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER HELPER 7.85 TRUCK DRIVER 9.80
PAINTER 11.93
PAINTER HELPER 8.30
PIPEFITTER 14.33
PIPEFITTER HELPER 10.93
GSBS BATENHORST RVc
AnctirmdTURE LANDswt McjifTEcrURE I' INTERIOR DESIGN'I PLANNING
Fort Worth Botanic Garden
.Greenhouse Facility
Specifications
September. .08,.2005
D 7..
TIO�W
F .:R T' -W-0RTH..
Contacts:
Architect:
GSBS
7291 Glenview Drive
North Richland Hills,Texas 76180
Ph. 817-589-1722
Fax. 817-595-2916
Contact: Sharon Krueger,AIA
Civil Engineer:
Gonzalez and Schneeberg
660 N. Central Expressway,Suite 250
Plano,TX 75074
Ph. 972-516-8855
Fax. 972-516-8901
.Contact: Gene Gonzalez,P.E.
Structural Engineer:
FWNA—Frank Neal&Associates
1015 West Broadway
Fort Worth, TX 76104
Ph. 817-332-1944
Contact: Richard Williams, Graduate Engineer
Mechanical/Electrical Engineers:
2W3 Consulting Engineers
6001 Forest Lane
Fort Worth,TXT 76112
Ph. 817-446-9708
Fax. 817-446-9768
Contact: Walter Williams,P.E.
Greenhouse Consultant:
Stuppy Greenhouse Manufacturing,Inc.
1212 Clay, P.O.Box 1245E
North Kansas'City,MO 64116
Ph. 800-733-5025
Fax. 800-423-1512
Contact: Jerry Hains, Sales Represetative
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
CERTIFICATION SHEET
Architect Greenhouse Consultant
GSBS Stuppy Greenhouse Manufacturing,Inc.
0 AP ..
• gA T� !� ,t �4
oe o ° ;RAMASWAMY S.PRABHU
S :............ ...
C"
55839......::�:
;S;ONAL E-
Structural Engineer MEP Engineer
Frank Neal&Associates 2W3 Consulting Engineers
•. s�, �"._ EOF T
SS �
RANK WEST NEAL .0
'?435 ���� WALTER H. WILLIAM e
r� „A / 71993 r
o r"z .�s� a►
1
1NALTER S.GERARD /
.�w�
52704s
fi
GSBS CERTIFICATION SHEET-1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
ivision :: Section Title ?aje
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
00200 Geotechnical Data 39
01010 Summary of Work 3
01027 Applications for Payment 4
01230 Alternates 2
01270 Unit Prices 1
01290 Payment Procedures 4
01310 Project Management and Coordination 7
01320 Construction Progress Documentation 5
01330 Submittal Procedures 8
01400 Quality Requirements 6
01420 References 12`
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6
01600 Product Requirements 6
01700 Execution Requirements 6
01732 Selective Demolition 4
01770 Closeout Procedures 5
01781 Project Record Documents 3
01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 5
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02230 Site Clearing 3
02260 Excavation,Support and Protection 2
02300 Earthwork 8
02361 Termite Control 3
02553 Natural Gas Distribution -.5
02821 Chain-Link Fences and Gates 3'
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork 4
03200 Concrete Reinforcement 3
03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 5
03370 Concrete Curing 2
TM� DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04299 Unit Masonry 9
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 11
04860 Stone Masonry 11
GSBS T.O.C:1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
DMSION 5 -METALS
05120 Structural Steel 3
05311 Steel Roof Deck 3
05500 Metal Fabrications 3
DMSION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS -
06100 Rough Carpentry 5
06112 Framing and Sheathing 2
06180 Glued Laminated Structural Units 4 .
06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry 2
06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 5
DMSION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07190 Water Repellents 4
07210 Building Insulation 4
07411 Metal Roof Panels 15
07412 Metal Wall Panels 8
07551 APP Modified Biotuminous Membrane Roofing 6
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 6
07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties 4
07720 Roof Accessories 3
07841 Through Penetration Firestop Systems 4 �.
07842 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems 3
07920 Joint Sealants 7
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08111 -Standard Steel Doors.and Frames 6
08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 3
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 5 T
08510 Steel Windows 3
08710 Door Hardware 14
08800 Glazing 3
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09111 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 7
0991 T Exterior Painting 5
09912 Interior Painting 7
09931. Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes 5
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10155 Toilet Compartments 3
10431 Signage 4
10520 Fire-protection Specialties 6
10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 3
GSBS T.O.C.2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
Not Applicable
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13123 Greenhouse Systems 6
13915 Fire Suppression Piping 16
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 9
15083 Pipe Insulation 3
15140 Domestic Water Piping 7
15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 8
15194 Fuel Gas Piping 10
15410 Plumbing Fixtures 5
15415 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers 3
15430 Plumbing Specialties 10
15486 Fuel-Fired,Domestic Water Heaters 5
15732 Rooftop Air Conditioners 6
15767 Propeller Unit Heaters 3
15 815 Metal Ducts 5
15820 Duct Accessories 7
15838 Power Ventilators 4
15855 Diffusers,Registers,and Grilles 2
15950 Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 9
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
16001 Electrical Systems General 8
16030 Testing of Electrical Systems 4
16040 Identification of Electrical Equipment 2
16111 Conduits 6
1.6120 Wires and Cables 7
16130 Electrical Boxes 4
16190 Supporting Devices 3
16450 Grounding and Bonding 4
16470 ,Power and Lighting Panelboards. 4
16490 Switches and.Receptacles 4
16500 Lighting Fixtures,Mounting Poles,and Control Devices 11'
16721 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 6
GSBS T.O.C.-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 00200—GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1 GENERAU
A. The Geotechnical data is available to subcontractors and suppliers for review; all parties shall
avail themselves of this document, in preparing bids relative to the site and foundation construc-
tion.
B. The geotechnical data is enclosed herein for your use.
C. The geotechnical report,prepared by MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc., is defined as
ProjectNo.4902-03-3338,dated January,2004.
END OF SECTION 00200
GSBS 00200-GEOTECM'4ICAL DATA-1
MAC -TE' C.
REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
Prepared for:
CITY OF FORT WORTH
Fort Worth,Texas
Prepared by:
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc.
Fort Worth, Texas
January 2004
MACTEC Project No.,4902-03-3338
MACTEC
January30,2004
Ms.Nancy Richardson
Facilities Management
City of Fort Worth
319 West 10"Street
Fort Worth,Texas 76102
(8 17)392-8014 Phone
(817)392-8488 Fax
Reference: Geotechnical Exploration
Fort Worth Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility
Fort Worth,Texas
MACTEC Project No.4902-03-3338
Dear Ms.Richardson:
Attached is our geotechnical report for the above referenced project. This report provides recommendations
for foundation design and construction for the proposed project referenced above.
As your project progresses through the design and construction phases, we recommend that you retain
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc.to provide geotechnical and construction materials engineering,
testing,and inspection services for this project.
It has been a pleasure to perform this work foz you. If you have any questions regarding the information
contained in this report or if we can be of additional assistance please call.
Respectfully,
MACTEC ENGINEERING AND CONSULT
C. " -
�
'(E OF
S ed K. Haneefuddin, P.E. S1cf f.f'�ti�-A iiA EEFtt;•
ProjectManager p•••;•••••-.••................:..�v
O6-c €0^0
�! .. ,l5sE rf,Qo
f4itl�,LE
Patrick D.Bolton,P.E.
Principal Engineer B
Assistant Vice President
WITH PERMISSION
Distnbution: Client(3).
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc.
Ma LAW Engineering and Environmental Services
2200 Gravel-Drive-Fort Worth,TX 76116
817-583-7211-Fax:817-588-1420
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fort Worth Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility
Fort Worth Texas
Page
1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION. ................................................................................................:. 1
2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES.......................................................................................................:....... 1
3.0 FIELD EXTLORATION .............................................................................................................. 1
4.0 LABORATORY TESTING................... '................................................................................... 2
5.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS............................................................................. .. _............. 2
5.1 Site Geology...............................:................................................................. ............. .............2
5:2 Stratigraphy........:................ ........................................................................................................3
5.3 Ground Water Conditions..............................................................:..............:.........................:.......4 "
6.0 ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS...... .............................................................. .... 5
6.1 Suitable Foundations......:.................................................................................:............................... 5
6.2 Drilled Shaft Foundation System.........:.............................................................
6.2.1 Allowable Bearing Capacity...................................................., ...................................................6
622 Drilled Shaft Supported Grade Bams... .....................:..:.............:........................................:::..7
6.2.3 Group Effects.:..............................................:............................:.....:....................:....................7
6.2.4 'Drilled Shaft Soil Induced Uplift Loads............................................ ............'. ...:..................7 _
6.2.5 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations.........................................:.............................:....... 8
6:3 Slab-On-Grade Recommendations...... . . . . ........................ ................................................ 8
. .. . . .. .....
01 Subgrade Preparation for Slab-On-Grade-Floor....................................................................... 9
6.4 Stiffened Slab-On-Grade ..............................:................................................................::............9 • ,
6.4.1 Allowable Bearing Capacity.....:.............................................:.....................................................9
6.4.2 Post-Tensioning Design Parameters.........:............................::..............:...............:..................10,
'7.0 PAVEMENT RECOAffyMNDATIONS...................................................... ..... 11
7.1 Subgrade Preparation....... . ...: .. ...............................:.......................................................:.......:1 I
7.2 Recompacted Pavement Subgrade.........................................:...................................................:.13
7.3 Pavement Sections ...:........ ...................... ......................... .......................... :.....:.....,,..13
...... .... .. .....
7.4 Special Pavement Considerations .................................................................. ... ........ ......:,.15 .
8.0 SITE GRADING AND UTILITY EXCAVATIONS...................................................................16 .
8.1 Site.Grading and.Landscaping...........................:..:.........:.....................:...................::.:..........:...:16
•8.2 Utility Trench Excavations......................... ......................... ................................................16
. .
8.3 Field Supervision and Density Testing .....::.................................................................................17
9.0 LIMITATIONS............... . ..............................................:...........................................................17
FIGURES
Figure "
Site Location Map •
BoringLocation Plan...............:.....:......................................................•...:...................................................2
Logs of Borings.:.....:............: ' ' ....3 through 15
.................................................................................................
Key to Symbols and Descriptions
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
FORT WORTH BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
FORT WORTH, TEXAS'
1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION
The project consists of a-headhouse,four greenhouses,an office/breakroom'and a shop/garage for the Botanic
Gardens Greenhouse Facility to be located in the current Lockheed-Martin parking lot near the intersection of
Interstate 30 and Montgomery Street in Fort Worth,Texas(Figure 1). The headhouse will be approximately
3,692 square feet(SF).in plan area,the four green houses will be approximately 35,624 SF,the shop/garage
will be approximately 13,725 SF,and the office/breakroom building will be approximately 4;000 SF in plan
area. We assume that the buildings will have relatively light loads.'We.assume that the finish floor of the..
buildings will be within 2 feet of the current site,grades.
-2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES
Our services for -this .project were performed in- general conformance with our Proposal No..
PROP03FTWO.0395 dated 12/8/03. The purposes.of this geotechnical evaluation were to:.
• Explore the subsurface conditions at the site
Characterize the subsurface soil and groundwater conditions
• Provide recommendations for a suitable foundation system,and
• Provide comments and recommendations concerning pavement,site grading and drainage.
3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION
Thirteen borings were drilled at the locations marked on the site plan sent to us.Seven borings were terminated
at a depth of 25.feet, one boring was.terminated at a depth of 3 5.feet and five borings were-terminated at a
® depth of 40 feet:The approximate boring locations are shown on the enclosed Boring Location Plan(Figure 2).
A truck-mounted drill rig was used-to advance the borings and to obtain samples for laboratory:evaluation.
Undisturbed specimens.of the cohesive soils were obtained continuouslyto a depth of5 feet;and samples were
obtained from 7 to 8 feet and from 9 to 10 feet and at 5 foot intervals thereafter using standard,seamless tube
} samplers. The samples were extruded in the field, logged, sealed -and packaged to protect them from
disturbance and to maintain their in-situ moisture contents-during transportation to our laboratory. Sampling
depths for the soil samples are presented.on the Logs of Boring(Figures 3 through 15).
Ad4CTEC'Engineering and Consulting Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
.Page I
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
Foundation bearing properties of the sand encountered in-the borings was evaluated by Standard Penetration
tests in conjunction with split spoon sampling.The Standard Penetration test involves.driving a standard 2-inch
diameter sampler a total of 18-inches and recording the number of blows for each 6-inch increment or the
penetration fro 50 blows.The results oftlie Standard Penetration tests(blow count of last foot)are recorded at
the respective testing depths on the Logs.of Boring.
Limestone encountered in the borings was evaluated in the field by the Texas Department of Transportation ,.-
Penetrometer(TxDOT Cone) tests. The TxDOT.Cone is driven with the resulting penetration-in inches
recorded for 100 blows. The results of the TkDOT Cone tests are recorded at the respective testing depths on.
the Logs of Boring(Figures 3 through 15).
4.0 LABORATORY TESTING
The project geotechnical engineer examined the samples at our laboratory and revised the field classifications
as necessary. Selected samples were subjected to laboratory tests under the supervision of this engineer.
Moisture contents and Atterberg limit tests were performed to evaluate the potential volumetric change of the
different strata. Pocket penetrometer and unconfined compression tests were performed to estimate the —
compressive strength ofthe soil.To provide additional information about the swell characteristics ofthese soils
(at their in-situ moisture conditions), absorption swell tests were performed on selected samples of the dark
j brown clay soil. The results of these tests are provided on the Logs of Boring.
i 5.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
A brief description of the conditions that were encountered in the borings is presented.below.Amore detailed
description of the subsurface conditions is presented on the attached Logs of.Boring. It should be noted#hat
the boundaries between the various soil types are approximate and may vary. In addition,the depths shown on
the Boring Logs refer to the depths fi-om the ground surface that was present at the time of the field exploration
program.
5.1 Site Geology,
The site is located in an area underlain by alluvium deposits underlain by the Duck Creek Formation. The
alluvium deposits consist of silt,sand clay and gravel. The Duck Creek Formation consists of limestone.At
A"CTEC Engineering and Consulting Inc. Report No.4902-03-3338°
Page 2
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort A'orth, Texas January 30, 2004
this site the existing on-site pavement materials are underlain by layers of clay followed by sand and underlain
by gray limestone.
5.2 Stratigraphy
'~ The stratigraphy consists of 2.25 inches to 2:75 inches of asphalt on top of base material followed by dark
brown to brown clay with calcareous nodules to depths of 2 to 8.5 feet.In Boring B-9,the pavement materials
were underlain by dark brown and brown clay fill to a depth of 5 feet, in turn underlain by the natural dark
brown to brown clay with calcareous nodules.The dark brown and brown clay with calcareous nodules was
underlain by orangish tan clay with calcareous nodules to depths of 18.5 to 28 feet.In Borings B-4,B-5 and B-
7, a layer of light gray and tan sandy clay was encountered sandwiched between two layers of orangish tan
clay.In Boring B=12,light gray and tan sandy'clay was encountered between orangish tan clay and light gray
sand.In Borings B-2,B-4,B-5,B-7,B-10,13-11 and B-13,the orangish.tan clay with calcareous nodules was
underlain-by sand to the boring termination depth of 25 feet.
In Borings B-1,B-3,B-6,B-8,B-9 and B-12,the orangish-tan clay with calcareous nodules was underlain by
layer(s)of sand followed by gray limestone with shale seams to the boring termination depths.Gray limestone
with shale seams was encountered at depths of 28 to 31 feet in the.borings.In Boring B-6 and B-12,a layer of
tan weathered limestone was encountered above the gray limestone.In Boring B-8,a layer of tan gravelly sand
was encountered sandwiched between two layers of orangish tan clay.The.orangish tan clay was underlain.by
dark gray and gray weathered shale to a depth of 28 feet followed by gray limestone to the born— 'termination
r depth of 35 feet d
The dark brown to brown clay.with calcareous nodules exhibited liquid limits-ranging from 52 to 60 with
plastic limits ranging from'23 to 26 and with plasticity indices ranging from 29 to 34.The moisture content in
the dark brown to brown clay with calcareous nodules ranged from 13 to 27 percent.The absorption/swell test
results in the dark brown to brown clay with calcareous nodules ranged between 2.1 and 3.1 percent. The
orangish tan,clay with calcareous nodules exhibited liquid limits ranging from 30 to 46 with plastic limits
ranging from 16 to 22 and with.plasticity indices ranging from 14 to 24.The moisture content in the orangish
tan-clay with calcareous nodules ranged.from.9 to 23 percent.The unconfined compression test results in the
orangish tan clay with-calcareouszodules ranged between 2.6 and 7.7 kips per square foot(ksf).The light gray
and tan sandy clay encountered-in Borings B-4, B-5, B-7 and B-12.had unconfined compression strength
AdACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No. c IL7 C
1
Botanic Gardens Greenho:►se Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
ranging from 1.7 to 2.6(ksf).The gray limestone with shale seams exhibited TxDOT cone values ranging from
0.25 inches per 100 blows to 1.75 inches per 100 blows.
5.3 Ground Water Conditions
The borings were advanced using continuous flight auger drilling equipment. Depending on the soil type,this
method may result in relatively accurate short-tern ground water observations while drilling. Subsurface
ground water seepage was not encountered in Borings B-2,B-4,B-10 and B-11 during drilling and at boring.
completion.Ground water readings were taken after 24 hours in the borings drilled the previous day.Borings
B-10 and B-11 were dry after 24 hours.The following Table 1. lists the ground water readings in-rest of the
borings.
TABLE 1. GROUNG WATER READINGS -
Ground water Ground water at Boring cave in Ground water
Boring Number seepage while completion of depth after 24 reading after-24 -
drilling,feet drilling,'feet hours,feet hours, feet
J
B-1 29 30 No Dry
B-3. 28 30.5 33 29
B-5 24 Dry - -
B-6 19 ° 33 26 - -
B-7 23 Dry No Dry
i B-8 23 32 29 24
B-9 28 31 30 28•
B-12 27- 28 36 28
B-13 24.5 Dry No Dry
A more accurate determination of the level of the groundwater would.require the°installation of deep
groundwater monitoring'wells and a water level monitoring program extending over several months.
Furthermore;the presence and magnitude of groundwater will fluctuate seasonally due to variations in the
amount of precipitation and infiltration of this°site and surrounding-area. The presence or absence of
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No..4902-03-3338
y Page 4
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility;Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
groundwater should be verified prior.to construction that'would be adversely impacted by subsurface
groundwater.
The evaluation of the potential presence of pollution or ground water contaminants in the soil or ground water
at this site was beyond the scope of this project
6.0 ANALYSIS AND RECOAMNDATIONS
6.1 Suitable Foundations.
The Texas Department of Transportation's(TxDOT)empirical method of predicting Potential Vertical Rise
(PVR)was utilized to develop the foundation design criteria associated With soil movements resulting from
swelling. PVR values obtained using this method assume that the supporting soil is not subject to free water
sources and as*a result,never becomes fully saturated nor reaches its full swell potential. PVR values using
this method are typically much lower than values obtained from:laboratory swell tests. When this-design
method is used it is imperative that all potential free water sources are eliminated in.order to prevent excessive
upward movement caused by soil swelling. It is also imperative that measures be taken during design and
_ construction to reduce the risk of free water sources near the foundation.
The clay that was encountered at this site has moderate to high shrink/swell potential. A Potential Vertical
Rise (PVR) calculation was performed using the TxDOT,Method 124-E, assuming a dry,soil•moisture
condition.Based upon these calculations,it is estimated that the PVR of a slab-on-grade is on the order of 1.0
to 2.0 inches.
i .
Considerably more upward movement than the potential soil movement value estimated above will occur in
areas where water is allowed to pond near or beneath the structure for extended periods due to poor drainage,
T— leaking.utility lines,percolation in recessed landscape areas, or leaking sprinkler lines. The soil conditions
J
encountered at the site may also differ from those encountered at the boring locations;which could influence '
. the estimated soil 'movement
Recommendations for.two alternative foundation types are presented.These alternative foundation types.are:
' Drilled Shafts with Slab on Modified Subgrade
Stiffened Slab-On-Grade Foundation-
AM OTEC
oundation-MACTEC Engineering and Consulting Inc. Report No.:4902-03-3338
Page 5
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
Drilled shafts with slab on modified subgrade should be used if it is required to limit potential.building
movements to on the order of 0.5 inch,and to limit potential floor slab movements to on the order of 1.0 inch.
The.grade beams are supported by drilled shafts. The grade beams are separated from the active clays. The
floor is supported on a modified subgrade to reduce subgrade movements. There is a risk that subgrade
movement greater than 1.0 inch could occur because of leaking waterlines or other sources of water.
A stiffened slab foundation is recommended if foundation differential movements to the order of 2-inches can
be tolerated by the building. This foundation system consists of perimeter and interior grade beams that create
a stiffened slab to limit differential movements in the building superstructure. However,.since this foundation .
system is fully supported by expansive soils,there is an inherent risk of unacceptable.foundation movements
occurring. Should a leak develop in a utility line under the building,foundation movements could.result in
serious damage to the structure.
Because of the inherent risk of leaking utility lines at a•greenhouse facility, for the greenhouses-and the
headhouse, drilled shafts with slab on modified subgrade could be used, and for the shop/garage and
office/break room building either of the foundation systems could be used. Recommendations for.the two
.foundation systems are presented in-the following report sections.
6.2 Drilled Shaft Foundation System
6.2.1 Allowable Bearing Capacity
J
The drilled shafts should penetrate at least 3 feet into the gray limestone with shale seams to develop the
_�.
recommended end bearing value.We recommend that a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 40,000 psf be
used for the drilled shafts.Drilled shafts should have a minimum diameter of 18 inches to allow access-for
observation.
An allowable skin friction of 4,500 psf(compression)and an allowable skin friction of 3,500 psf(tension)are
recommended in the gray limestone. The recommended allowable end bearing value contains a factor of safety
of 3. The recommended skin friction values contain.a factor of safety 42. Settlements ofthe drilled shafts are
estimated to be less than 0.5 inch.•The settlement is expected to occur as the shaft is loaded.
MACTE.0 Engineering and Consulting,Inc. ' Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 6 �.
- Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
- 6.2.2 Drilled Shaft Supported Grade Beams
The grade beams should be supported by the drilled shafts. A minimum void space of 6 inches should be
provided between the bottom of these members and the subgrade.Structural cardboard forms are one acceptable
means of providing this void beneath these members.Care must be exercised during concrete placement to avoid
collapsing the cardboard void boxes. As a quality control measure during construction, "actual" concrete
quantities placed should be checked against"anticipated"quantities. Significant concrete"average"would be an
early indication of a collapsed void.
The exterior portions of the grade beams along the perimeter of the building should be carefully backfilled with
on—site clayey soils unless specified otherwise below. The back ill soils should be placed at moisture content
between optimum to+3 percentage.pofi is wet of optimum, The fill should be compacted to 95 percent of
maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTMD-698(Standard Proctor).
6.2.3 Group Effects
For groups of drilled shafts,where the spacing between shafts will be less than 2.5-shaft diameters (2.5D)
center to center,a reduction factor should be applied to the allowable skin friction for the determination of
required shaft penetrations. For shafts touching,a reduction factor of 50 percent should be used. For a spacing
of 2.5D, where D is the.diameter of the largest adjacent shaft, no reduction is necessary. A straight-line
interpolated reduction.shoul'd'be used between drilled shafts touching and a spacing of 2.51). . .
�- 6.2.4 Drilled Shaft Soil Induced Uplift Loads
I Drilled shafts will be'subject to uplift loads as•a result of swelling within the overlying clays.The drilled shafts
should have sufficient continuous vertical reinforcing steel extending to the base of the shafts to resist the
a
computed net uplift loads(uplift less dead load).
The magnitude of the uplift loads varies with the shaft diameter,soil parameters,free water sources, and the
depth of the active clays acting on the shaft.The uplift pressures can be approximated at this site by assuming a
i
uniform uplift pressure of 1,000 pounds-per square foot acting on the shaft perimeter for a depth of 10 feet
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc Report No. 4.9 Z-
OUNL
M.
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
6.2.5 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations
Ground water seepage was encountered in all the deep borings during drilling and at completion.Water was
observed in all the deep borings after 24 hours and all the deep borings caved in after 24 hours except Boring
B-1. Casing will be needed at this site during drilled shaft construction. Concrete used for the shafts should
have a slump of 6 inches plus or minus 1 inch and placed using a tremie to limit the free fall of the concrete to
five feet in a manner to avoid striking the reinforcing steel and walls of the shaft during placement. Complete
installation of individual shafts should be accomplished within an 8-hour period in order to help prevent
deterioration of bearing surfaces. The drilling of individual shafts should be excavated in a continuous
operation and concrete placed as soon as practical after completion of the drilling. The top of the drilled shafts
should be formed to prevent an enlarged top that could'be lifted by swelling clays.
We.recommend that MACTEC be retained to observe and document the drilled shaft construction. The
engineer,or his representative,should document the shaft diameter,depth,cleanliness,plumbness ofthe shaft,
and the type of bearing material.Significant deviations from the specified or anticipated conditions should be'
reported to the owner's representative and to the structural engineer. The drilled shaft excavation should be
observed to verify the bottom of the hole is dry and thoroughly cleaned of cuttings.No build-up of cuttings
J what so ever should be allowed.
Recommendations for underreamed shafts are not provided in this report as a layer of gravelly sand was
.encountered from a depth of 13 feet to 17.5 feet in Boring B-8.
6.3 Slab-On-Grade Recommendations
As discussed previously,soils are estimated to have potential vertical movements on the order of 10 to 2.0-inches.
Site preparation work will be required in order to lower the potential soil movements to'about 1' inch.
Recommendations for reducing the soil PVR are presented in the following section.
A polyethylene moisture barrier is recommended below the slab-on-grade floor slabs where floor coverings or
painted floor surfaces will be applied with products which are sensitive.tomoisture or if products stored.on the
building floors are sensitive to moisture. Procedures for installation of vapor barriers are recomimended'in ACI .
302 Section 2.4:1.
Mf!CTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Aeport No.4902-03-3338
Page 8
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas .Janua7y 30, 2004
"- 63.1 Subgrad6 Preparation For Slab-On-Grade Floor
The following subgrade preparation procedures will be required to reduce the soil PVR to about I inch.
I. Excavate to depth of 3 feet below existing grade. Excavation should extend to five feet outside
building lines or beneath adjacent sidewalks and entry areas,whichever is greater.
2. Scary,rework,and recompact the upper 8 inches of the exposed subgrade soil. The scarified soil
should be recompacted-to 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D. 698 at
moisture content between+1 to+4 percentage points above optimum.
3. Fill to final pad,grade using non-expansive select fill having a PI between 5 to 15. Compact at
optimum to+3 percentage points above optimum to a minimum of•95 percent maximum density as
determined by.ASTM D 698. Select fill limits should extend to building lines, entries and adjacent
sidewalks.
4. The moisture condition of the completed pad must be maintained until all slabs are in place:This will
be particularly important along the building perimeter where clay soils will be exposed in grade beam
-excavations.
All pavement and landscaped grades within 10 feet ofthe building should be sloped along maximum grades
allowed by local code to accommodate differential soil swell after construction and thereby rninimiz;ng
ponding conditions near the building caused by post-construction soil swelling.
6.4 Stiffened Slab=On-Grade
Either post-tensioned or conventionally reinforced mono]ithic stiffened slabs can•be considered for the
proposed building and should be designed by a structural engineer to withstand the estimated vertical soil
movements.
A polyethylene moisture-barrier is recommended below the slab-on-grade floor slabs where floor coverings or
- painted floor surfaces will be applied with products which are sensitive to moisture or if products stored on the
building floors are sensitive to moisture. Procedures for installation of vapor barriers are recommended in ACI
302 Section 2.4.1.
6.4.1 Allowable Bearing Capacity
Grade beams founded in the naturally occurring soil or in properly compacted fill soil may be designed using
an'allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds-per square-foot The grade beams are recommended to
�-
-have a minimum width of 10 inches to provide a margin of safety against local or punching shear failure of the
bearing soil
MWTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
-.. Page 9
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worlh Texas January 30, 2004
The exterior walls should contain vertical crack control joints placed at 10 to 12 foot on-center forthe height of
all walls to control cracking associated with differential foundation movements. It is also recommended that
pavement(or a minimum 5-foot wide sidewalk or seal slab)extend to the edges of the building to protect the --
active supporting soil from excessive moisture losses(and resulting settlements)after construction. Trees and
deep-rooted shrubs should be located no closer to the structure than one-half their ultimate mature height to
reduce the potential for foundation settlement caused by moisture absorption of the root systems.
It is common to experience some distress to structures due to ground movements. This includes cracks in the -.
brick and cracks'in ground supported slabs. Cracks in the exterior brick-walls are less noticeable with the use
of closely spaced vertical joints along the walls.
It is recommended that a MACTEC geotechnical engineer or a qualified engineering technician observe the
footing excavations prior to placing concrete. The foundation bearing-grade should be level-or suitably
benched.It should also be free of loose soil,ponded water and debris.p=ior'to the inspection.
6.4.2 Post-Tensioning Design Parameters
Design criteria for a slab designed in accordance with the Post-Tensioning Institute's (PTT) slab-on-grade
design method have been developed. The edge moisture variation distances(e.)for-center lift and edge lift
conditions were derived based on a Thornihwaite Index ranging.from 0 to-1 Hor the project site. The edge
moisture variation distances are based upon the PTT Manual criteria and are provided in Table 2.
TABLE Z. EDGE MOISTURE VARIATION DISTANCES (EM)
1
CENTER LIFT CONDITION
em=5.5 feet +`
l •
EDGE LIFT.CONDITION
em=4.5 feet
The Post-Tensioning Institute(PTT)method incorporated numerous design assumptions associated with the
derivation of required variables needed to determine the soil design criteria. The PTT method of predicting
differential soil movement is applicable only when site moisture conditions are controlled by the climate alone
on a well-graded site(i.e.no improper drainage,water leaks or free water sources). Under these conditions;
moisture increases within the'supporting soil and the resulting differential foundation movements are much
IkWTEC Engineering and Consulting Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 10
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facrl,, Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
lower than.differential movements that can occur due to post-construction movements due to localized
saturation caused by free water sources near or beneath the structures.
The estimated PTI differential movements(y.)are provided in Table 3.
TABLE 3. ESTIMATED PTI DIFFERENTIAL MOVEMENTS (YN)
ESTIMATE D PTI.
BORING NUMBER 'DIFFERENTIAL MO NTS
• (Y�).`(inches)= _ •
CC1H�N�Mil 'T FUDGE LIFT
>C:t?NDITIONCONDITION
All the Borings 1.6 1.2
^* ' The performance of a slab foundation can be significantly influenced by landscaping maintenance,recessed
landscaping additions near the structures,water line leaks and any other free water sources, and deep rooted
trees and shrubs. It should be recognized that a post-tensioned or conventionally reinforced slab-on-grade
foundationsystem placed at this site will be subjected to some differential movements as indicated above.
These movements can cause cracking of interior sheet rock walls and exterior brick walls. Occasionally,
differential movements can cause planarmovement of window frames and door frames requiring adjustments
to the.doors and windows.
�- 7.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
J We assume that a typical automobile or pickup truck is representative of-essentially all of the traffic on the
proposed parking area pavements. We further assume that only occasional heavy to medium truck traffic from
primarily waste disposal trucks and delivery trucks will be present on the parking area-pavements. The
T following recommendations are based upon these assumed conditions.
7.1 Subgrade Preparation
SurficW.clays present at.this site are active, and are subject to losses in shear strength with increases m
moisture content which normally occur beneath area paving. They typically react with hydrated lime,which
serves to improve their support value at higher moisture levels and provide a firm,•uniform'subgrade beneath
M4 MC Engineering and Consulting Inc. Report No 4902-03-3338,
Page I I
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
the paving.We recommend that sulfate tests be conducted to determine the amount of sulfates present in the
subgrade before using lime stabilization.If sulfates are present in the subgrade they react adversely with lime
to cause more damage to the pavement instead of stabilizing it.
We typically recommend stabilization of subgr ides beneath all flexible type pavements. Stabilization beneath .�
concrete pavement subject only to automobile traffic is optional. Based on the Atterberg limits tests,6 percent
hydrated lime by dry weight(27 pounds.per square yard per 6-inch depth)is recommended to stabilize the
existing clay subgrade soils. The lune should be thoroughly mixed and blended with the top 6 inches of the
subgrade(TxDOT Item 260)and the mixture compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density
as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698,within3 percentage points of the soil's optimum moisture
content.
Project specifications should allow a curing period between initial and final mixing of the lime/soil mixture.
After initial mixing,the lime treated subgrade should be lightly rolled and maintained at or within 5 percentage
points above the soil's optimum moisture content until final mixing and compaction..We recommend a 3-day
curing period for these soils. The following gradation requirements are recommended-for the stabilized
—� materials prior to final compaction:
Percent
Minimum Passing 13/4" Sieve 100
Minimum Passing No.4 Sieve 60
J All nonslaking aggregates retained on the No.4 sieve should be removed prior to testing.
We recommend that stabilization extend 1 to 2 feet beyond exposed pavement edges, if possible,in order to
' reduce the effects of shrinkage during extended dry periods. The prepared subgrade should be protected and
J moist cured or sealed with a bituminous material for a minimum of 7 days or.until the pavement materials are
placed. Pavement areas should be graded at all times to preventpondingand infiltration of excessive moisture
on or adjacent to the pavement areas.
j Due to the presence of expansive clay soils, some pavement movements should be anticipated,even if our
recommendations are strictly followed. Irispection'during construction is particularly important to insure
proper construction procedures are followed.
MACTEC Engineering apd Consulting,Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 12
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility, Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
7.2 Recompacted Pavement Subgrade
If subgrade stabilization is not performed,the upper six(6)inches of subgrade soil should be compacted at
optimum to+3 percentage points of optimum moisture.-The subgmde should be compacted to a minimum of
95%Standard Proctor density(ASTM.D 698). Only on-site soil(comparable to the underlying subgrade soil)
should be used for fine grading the pavement areas.After fine grading, the subgrade should again be watered
if needed and re-compacted in order to re-achieve the moisture and density levels discussed above and provide
a tight non-yielding subgrade. Sand should not be allowed for use in fine grading.the pavement.The subgrade
moisture content anddensity must be maintained until paving is completed. The subgrade should be watered
just prior to paving to assure concrete placement over a moist subgrade.
7.3 Pavement Sections
Recommendations for pavement are provided in the following Tables 4 and 5.The pavement sections provided
-in Table 4 are recommended for areas that will be subject to relatively light traffic loads,such as the parking
stalls for automobiles. The pavement sections provided in Table 5 are recommended for areas that will be*
subject to moderate traffic loads, such as,drives and areas subject to occasional truck traffic. The type and
— volume of traffic were not provided to us. We have assumed-traffic loading of 25,000 ESAL's;(Equivalent
Single Axle Applications)for the light duty pavement and a loading of 100,000 ESAL's for the medium duty
pavement. These are estimates and should be refined when better data is available.
J .Asphaltic concrete pavement should. be'placed in accordance with Item 340 of TxDOT's Standard
Specification, 1993 edition:The surface'course asphaltic concrete should comply with Type D of Item 340 and
the Base course asphaltic concrete should comply with Type B of TxDOT Item 340.
Crushed limestone base material should conform to Item 247,Type A,Grade 2 or better of TxDOTs Standard
Specification, 1993 edition.The base layer-should be constructed in lifts not exceeding 6 inches compacted
thickness and to a minimum density of 95 percent of maximum as determined by ASTM D 1557.
The concrete should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,5 0.0 psi. Concretequality will be
.� important in order to produce the desired flexural strength and-long-term durability, Assuming a nominal
maximum aggregate size of 1 to 1-3/8 inches,we recommend that the concrete have entrained air of 5 percent
(±1%)with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.5.0.
MACTEC Engineering and Conr ltmg,Inc. Report No.4902-03-3338 '
Page 13
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility.Fort AForth, Texas January 30, 2004
Tables 4 and 5 present the recommended pavement sections for this project:
TABLE 4.
LIGHT-DUTY PAVEMENT(Auto'Parking Areas)
SMAC SECTIONS
2.0 inches Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Type D
2.5 inches Asphaltic Concrete Base Course Type B
6.0 inches Lime Treated Subgrade
or
2.0 inches Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Type D
6.0 inches Crushed Limestone Base Material
6.0 inches Lime Treated Subgrade
PCC SECTION e —
5 inches Porfland Cement Concrete
6-inches Scarified and Compacted Subgrade
• A stabilized subgrade could be used to improve pavement performance and reduce maintenance.
TABLE 5.
11EDIETM- UTY PAVEMMNT_(Drive.Approadhes and Dri0ews�s:
With becasional'Heavy Truck.d',raffic
HMAC SECTIONS
2.5 inches Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Type D
3.5 inches Asphaltic Concrete Base Course Type B
6.0 inches Lime Treated Subgrade
or
� 3:0 inches Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Type D
7.0 inches Crushed Limestone Base Material
6.0 inches Lime Treated Subgrade
J PCC SECTION
6 inches Portland Cement Concrete** -
6 inches Scarified and Compacted Subgrade
**'Dumpster pads including the area.in front of the dumpsters where trash disposal equipmentpaiks should be
'thickened an additional two inches. '
Proper joint placement and design is-critical to pavement performance. Load transfer at all longitudinal joints
and maintenance-of water-tight joints should be accomplished by use of tie bars. Control'joints should be'
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No:4902-03-3338
Page 14
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility, Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
-� sawed as soon as possible after placing concrete and before shrinkage cracks occur. All joints including saw
joints should also beproperly cleaned and sealed as-soon as-possible to avoid infiltration ofwater,small gravel,
etc.
We have found that joint spacing on 12 to 15 foot centers have generally-performed satisfactorily. It is our
recommendation that the concrete pavement be reinforced with No.3 bars on approximately 18-inch centers in
each direction or equivalent reinforcing steel.
7.4 Special Pavement Considerations
Proofrolling can generally be accomplished using a heavy(25 ton or greater total weight)pneumatic tired roller.
making several passes over the areas. Where soft or compressible zones are encountered,these areas should be
removed to a firm subgrade..'Wet or very moist surflicial materials may need to be undercut and either dried
and replaced with proper compaction or replaced with a material that can be properly compacted. Any
resulting void areas should be backfilled to finished.subgrade in 6 inch compacted lifts compacted to 95
percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698.
Achieving the required field density is dependentupon the adequate pulverization of the clay fill materials,the
magnitude of compaction energy and the maintenance of field moisture near optimum. '
All joints and pavements should be inspected at regular intervals to ensure proper performance and to'prevent
- crack propagation:
-: The soils at the site are active and differential heave within'the parking area could potentially occur. The
service life of paving may be reduced due to.water infiltration into subgrade soils through.heave induced
cracks in the paving section. This will result in-softening and loss of strength of the subgrade soils. A regular
maintenance program to seal paving cracks and joints will help prolong the service life of paving.
The life of the pavement can be increased with proper drainage. Areas should be graded to prevent ponding
adjacent to curbs or pavement-edges. Curb areas should be backfilled as soon as practical.after the concrete=
has set,preferably with the on-site clay soils. Backfill materials, which could hold water behind the curb,
should not.be permitted. Flat pavement grades should be avoided. .
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No. 490243-3338
- Page 15
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
8.0 SITE GRADING AND UTILITY EXCAVATIONS
8.1 Site Grading and Landscaping
All grading should provide positive drainage away from the structure and should prevent water from collecting
or discharging near the foundations. Water must not be permitted to pond adjacent to the structure during or
after construction.
Surface drainage gradients should be designed to divert surface water away from the building and edges of
pavements and towards suitable collection and discharge facilities.Surface drainage gradients within 10 feet of
the buildings should be constructed with a minimum slope of 1 percent.
_. The roofs should be provided with gutters and downspouts to p;event the discharge of rainwater directly onto
' the ground adjacent to the building foundations. Downspouts should discharge directly into storm drains or
drainage swales,if possible.
Water permitted to pond in areas with unsealed joints next to the structure can result in on-grads slab or
pavement movements, which exceed those indicated in this.report. It is emphasized that predictions of
J
moisture related differential movements indicated in this report are based on empirical calculations and mm-
previous experience. In some cases movements can exceed those predicted,particularly when unusual sources
of water become available to the underlying clay.
t
Exterior sidewalks and pavements will be subject to some post construction movement. Flat grades should be
j avoided. Where concrete pavement is used,joints should be sealed to prevent the infiltration of water. Since
J • Some post construction movement of pavement and flatwork may occur,joints particularly around the Building
should be periodically inspected and resealed where necessary.
8.2 Utility Trench Excavations
Trench excavation for.utilities should be sloped or braced in the interest of safety. Attention is drawn to
OSHA Safety and Health Standards(29 CFR 1926/1910),SubpartP,regarding trench excavations greaterthan
5 feet in depth.
AMCTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 16
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
8.3 Field Supervision and Density Testing
Field density and moisture content determinations should be made on each lift of fill with a minimum of 1 test
per lift per 3,000 to 5,000 sf in the building pad area and 1 test per lift per 100-to 150 linear feet of utility
trench backfill. Supervision by the field technician and the project engineer is required.Some adjustments in
the test frequencies may,be required based upon the general fill types and soil conditions at the time of fill
placement
Many problems can be.avoided or solved in the field if proper inspection and testing services are provided. It
is recommended that all site and subgrade preparation and proofrolling be monitored by a qualified engineering
technician.Density tests should be performed to'verify compaction and moisture content of any earthwork.
Inspection shouldbe performed prior to and during concrete.placement operations. MACTEC employs a
group of experienced,well-trained technicians for inspection and construction materials testing who would be
pleased to assist you on this project
9.0 LI TATIONS
The professional services, which have been performed, the findings obtained, and the recommendations
prepared were accomplished in accordance with currently accepted geotechnical engineering principles and
J� practices. The possibility always exists that the subsurface conditions at the site may vary somewhat from
those encountered in the borings. If there are any unusual-conditions differing significantly from those
described herein, we should be notified.to review the effects"on the performance of-the recommended
foundation system..
The recommendations given in this report were prepared exclusively for the use of City of Fort Worth and their
( designconsultants. The information supplied herein is applicable only for the design of.the previously
PP PP � Y gn Pr t3'
described additions to be constructed at locations indicated at this site and should not be used for any'other
structures, locations, or for any other purpose. We are not responsible for the conclusions, opinions, .or
recommendations made by others based on the information submitted herein. This report presented
recommendations to guide preparation of project specifications•and should not be used in place of project,
specifications.'
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting Ina Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 17
Botanic Gardens Greenhouse Facility,Fort Worth, Texas January 30, 2004
We will retain the samples acquired for this project for a period of 30 days subsequent to the submittal date
printed on the report. After this period,the samples will be discarded unless otherwise notified by the owner in
writing.
J `
1
t
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting,Inc. Report No. 4902-03-3338
Page 18
FIGURES
w
NORTH
HA•RLEY o ��
, TRINITY 4
PARK
OrBRYCE
o
Lo
~ o
��,�-1 .�..•
>- SPRINGS ,��� 37
Lu JAPANESE�O 30 .
o GARDEN
o OF R
M
WEST FRWY ROSEDALE ST
o uP RR �. . o
CITY
-SITE > OF Q
z FORT WORTH a
N
W
S«,RCE FlElM WrES FIGURE 1.
�.
J> SITE.LOCATION MAP
MACTEC NO. DEsr�,m�+ DATE BOTANIC GARDENS
rt�nsioNs GREENHOUSFACILITY
MACTFr FNnINEFRING me t.I.IqLJLTING DIM*W By F "E FORT WORTH,TEXAS
umh,.iPoC i(� 8—
�-PA'F JZ 4902 33301,
JI"r d�ss,TH. '��".�� ���° COCKED BY APPROX. SCALE
NOT TO SCALE
�. �,ww��;�s�kbr�•�r r-w,ir� APW cuTE
/�3o•arc MACTEC PROJECT NO.4902"03-3338-01
—
ff —
I
1 c
or,
z M
z a o
! C-A
fl
1
rL
W OO F
N W W m
W �1
r
1 �
N N UZ q —
N
cm
` k O<
r
O r Z
T-
m O p —
2.1 � a
V
U
� t W
° c
pp Iii
F•- � � 1 N lVU O.
1
v a
O K
K 111
77M3A w[l 1ln0
---------._---_4. _._ ..---. .._._.._._. F.
w
i
dd XX U
gg•
WE E C9
�. U Zery` �
W
1 U A
iL.-
i � k/ man
j U
(
LOG OF BORING NO. B -1
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of•1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR"
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE., 12129/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
ar ae
m z ut GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
� F o � LL z was encountered In boring @ 29.0 feet while drilling.
o � z g w Y �' Water was observed @ 30.0 feet at completion of drilling
-14 0 � o o w w � � � � � a w� �. o activities.The boring was dry after 24 hours.
w m m o z v v z w c9 w a
F a o z o z rn y °mow O
_j IL 5vol . c z o tr a. � a a 2 U W LL ¢ . DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
rP--4.50:f-
P=4.5D+
22 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
19
5
7.0
® '13. 30 16 14 Stiff to Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
1015 ' 12
20 P=1.50 20 107.0 3.2 7.4
24.0
25 P=1.50 Medium Dense yellowish tan and light gray CLAYEY SAND
- 26.0
° o Very Dense tan GRAVEL
28.0
_ °' 5013.50- Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams 3p.p
35 100/1.75"
40 100/0.75" 40.0
End Of Boring @40.1)feet
REMARKS: THE AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
ION OF INTERSTATE 30
TUBE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK THD
ONE
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN RECOVERY
4902-0373338 FIGURE 3 NMACTEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B -2
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12129103 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
r� a �+ GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater
seepage was encountered In boring while drilling. Boring
o �' t _°z o U_ z was dry at completion of drilling activities.
'° m o _ p V z 0 w
4Z CFi O Z N a Wix
O
M to
Z Jco
°i o ate. a g g O N a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P=4.50+ Hard dark brown to brown CLAY-with calcareous nodules
P=4.5D+ 19 53 23 30 2.1
P=4.50+
5P=-4.50+ 16
7.0
P=4.50+ Very Stiff to Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous•.noduies
10 P=4.50+ 14
15 3 P=4.50+ �.
2D P=3.50 .16
23.0
Medium Dense light gray and-tan CLAYEY SAND
25 P=1.50 15 25.0•
End Of Boring Gm 25.0 feet
30
35
40
REMARKS:'*THE INTERSECTION BEET. OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMER
TUBE AUGER J. SPLIT ROCK CONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN. RECOVERY A �j
4902-03-3338- FIGURE4 &M 1CT1�C
LOG OF BORING NO. B -3
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR'
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: /2129/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
o z > GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
Uj
LL
o LL _Z ' was encountered in boring 28.0 feet while drilling.
w o �' z g >Y z Water was observed 30.5 feet at completion of drilling
x a � z 0 g a co 0 activities.After 24 hours,boring caved-in at a depth of 33
LL w r m o w uUi g z Uj 0 � feet and water was observed at a depth of 29 feet.
a.-1 a. i I N } > > u~i u~i D g w vii
vOi o z i.9 Lo ~- n v a ag a 0 co LL ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
�. 2.50 inches of ASPHALT an to of BASE material
P=4.50+ 19 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
P=4.50+
P=4.50+ i 6
5 P=4.50+
7.o
�-
P=4.50+ Stiff to Hand orangish tan CLAY with calcreous noduses
10 P--4.50+ 13 42 20 22
75 P=4.50+
with gravel
20 P=3.50 18 '110.0 5.0' 6.9
25 P=1.50 22
28.0
Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
N=64
30.0
30 Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams
35 10011:00"
40 10010.50" 40.0
End Of Boring 40.0 feet
REMARKS: THE AND MONTGOMERY STREET.ION OF INTERSTATE'30
TUBE AUGER SPOT- ROCK CONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN RECOVERY
4902-03-3338 FIGURE 6 &MACTEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B 4
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12130/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment
a
GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater
gy w seepage was encountered in boring while drilling. Boring
o z o sNc a4 z was dry at completion of drilling activities.
x a P O
UO c p Stu W m U p W to
lL Go co p W tai U _U Z O K it
CL
v z d o a. g a cOi u~i a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on to of BASE material
P=4.5D+ 1 B :Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
P=4.50+.
P=4.5D+ a.o
.5 P�.5p+ 14 38 20 18 Hard orangish tan CLAY with celcreous nodules
P=4.5D+
10 P-4.50+ 13
13.0
Stiff light gray and tan SANDY CLAY
15 •P=1.50 19 103.0 1.7 6.2
17.0
Very Stiff orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
20 P=2.00 .22
23.0
o . Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
60/10.00" 26.0.
25 End Of Boring a@ 25.0 feet
30
35
40
REMARKS: THE AND MONTGOMERY S REET ION OF INTERSTATE 30
TUBE AUGER SPLn= ROCK THD. NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE CONE PENRECOVERY
. /� � T (�
4902-03-3338 FIGURE'S NNI C JL EV
LOG OF BORING NO. B -5
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR*
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/30/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
ui _ GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
nLL z was encountered in boring a@ 24.0 feet while drilling.
U) �- z ❑ G w rn .� rn Boring was dry at completion of drilling activities. Water
ce w LL v �. !_ N °-�,Y o was observed at a depth of 23 feet at the end of the day.
Uj
cc LUm m 0 W W y U U Z W
H
vii o v� z a 2 o a a a v°m a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.50 inches of ASPHALT on too of BASE material
P=4.50+ Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules 2.0
P=4.50+ 16 46 22 24 Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nbdules
�,. P=4.50+
5 P-4.50+ 12
P-4.50+ 12
10 P=4.50+
• 12.5.
Hard light gray and tan SANDY CLAY
1'5 P-4.50+ 11
18.11•
Very Stiff orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
20, P=2.00 21
21.0
Medium Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
25.0
25
25 N=22 ZZ End Of Boring 25.0 feet
n+v
30'-
135 -
-40
40
N M N REMARKS: *THE INTERSECTION OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TUBE AUGER SPLrr- ROCK THD NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE. CONE RECOVERY
PEN. AJMACr4902-03-3336 FIGURE 7 11TEV
LOG OF BORING NO. B -6
PROJECT. BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR"
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/29/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
;e ui GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
i was encountered In boring Gm 19.0 feet while drilling.
Z o o w n ZU3Uj Water was observed @ 33.0 feet at completion of drilling
Y CL 3 i c°0 N'� o activities.Boring caved In @ 36.0 feet at the end of the _m
o° w m m c = w N. � L) 0 zz U)0Z. W day.Boring caved-Iri at 26 feet after 24 hours.
a.
1-
r°n o z i= o a a a. a 2 c°)m LL ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P=4.50+ 21 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
P=4.50+
P=4.50+ 17 4.0
P�5D+ Stiff to Hard orangish tan CLAY with caicreous nodules
5 .
P 4.5D+
10 P=4.5D+ 19 36 16 20
15 P-4.5D+ 15
20 P=1.50 9
23.0
o . Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
N=74
0-
25
o
28.0
Tan WEATHERED LIMESTONE
30 100/1.50" 30.0
Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams
35 100/0.50"
40 100/0.75" 40.0
End Of Boring @ 40.0 feet .
W P`I INTERSECTION OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TUBE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK THD CONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN. RECOVERY
4902-03-3338' FIGURE 8 fiMACTEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B -7
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12129/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.'
e a�
0 z a ut GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
z e � LL z ' was encountered in boring @ 23.0-feet while drilling.
v, in o a� z o w m m Boring was dry at completion of drilling activities and
0 0 z t N C" o after 24 hours.
.., o O O aw W W U 2 .� p • w rn
m m o z in O n v z W c0 W a
CC Z
o w w o it o o z O lr ¢ m
W o z i=,a o a O a a 7 v w a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P=4,50+ 17 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with.calcareous nodules
P=4.50+
P=4.50+ 13 4.0
5 P=4.50+ Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
" P=4.50+ 12 a.o
Hard light gray and tan SANDY CLAY
10 P=4.50+ 10
With gravel 12.0
Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
15 0=4.50+ ' 14 117.0 5.0 6.7
• 18.5
71/10.00" Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
0 20
°•" 61/11.00"
• 25 25.0
-- End Of Boring 25.0 feet
�•
30 -
35
40
y N M NREMARKS: THE
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TION OF INTERSTATE 30
TUBE AUGER SPLIT ROCK CONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN. RECOVERY
4902-03-3336 FIGURE 9 04MAC
LOG OF BORING NO. B -8
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/30/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
e � �
mi a° ui GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
,N w ' was encountered In boring @ 23.0 feet while drilling.
LU C, �- z o w n u ) Water was observed @ 32.0 feet at completion of drilling
z w N W o activities.Boring caved in @ 29.0 feet at the end of the
z w in'm o z v, -1 U z w o w day.Water was observed at a depth of 24 feet after 24
CL a i Z Z v~i ren > n.w D p hours.
o w q v� r- o 'o a s g z o ¢ m
rn o W z != n o a o a a a a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.75 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material a.
P=4.50+ 15 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules 2.0
P=4.50+ Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
P=4.50+ 14 35 20 15
5 P=4.50+
P=4.5D+
10 P=4.50+ 14.
13.0
68/11.50" Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
n 15 ..
'17.5
Very Stiff orangish tan CLAY with.calcreous nodules
20 P=3.5D 20
23.5
25
P=4.50+ z5 Hard dark gray and gray WEATHERED SHALE
28.0'
Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams
30 100/0.25"
i
35 1 DO/D.50" 35.0
End Of Boring @ 35.0 feet
40
Fi t'i I"I ANDREMARMOKNTGOMERY S: THE SE RSECTREET ION.OF INTERSTATE 30
TUBE AUGER sPLrr- ROCK THD CONE NO �-
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN RECOVERY
4902-03-3338 FIGURE 10 NMACTEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B -9
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12129103 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment
o LU -- GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
N F , LL Z ' was encountered in boring @_28.0 feet while drilling.
u}i y o z o w y Water was observed @ 31.0 feet at completion of drilling
v o w ° 5 '_ N �i o activities.After 24 hours,boring caved-in at a depth of 30
O LU y U F rn H
0: m m o z rn v j z w w a feet and water was observed at a depth of 28 feet
W O a Ir tY
IL y 2 N > > y y- O Z w J El
o w o � o v g 3 Z o� ¢ m
U) v z a v a a a v y LL ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on tat)of BASE material
23 Hard dark brown and brown CLAY with sand and gravel
(FILL)
P=4.50+
... 5 P=4.50+ 145.0
Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
7.0
P=4.50+ 14 Stiff to Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
10 P=4.50+
15 P=4.50+ 20 41 20 21
,.
20 P=1.75 22 101.0 2.6 7.8
- 25
N=37 Dense light gray SAND
26.0
50/1.50" Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
30 30.0
Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams
35. 100/0.75"
100/0.75" 40.0
40 End Of Boring @ 40.0 feet
a b REMARKS: *THE ION OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TUBE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK THD NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE CONE RECOVERY
4902-03-3338 FIGURE 11 ATMACTEC .
LOG OF BORING NO. B-10
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/29103 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
Wf GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: No groundwater
CL y W � seepage was encountered In boring while drilling. Boring
y w ~ o � L' z S Y z was dry at completion of drilling activities and after 24
n o o a w y c�i g o y F- F hours.
°�
to
m n W. w v v z a
�• _ Z 'y . U) Z 0.W O
r°n o a s o IL a v w U-- ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.75 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P--3.50 23 Very Dense to Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with
P--4.00calcareous nodules
P-4.504-
:5
-4.50+:5 P-4.50+ .21
7.o
P=4.50+ 13 Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
10 P=4.50+ 15 36 19 .17
5 P=4.50+ 13 117.0 7.7 7.8
20 P=4.50+
23.5
N=81 Very Dense light gray SAND'
25 End Of Boring 25.0 feet
30
.35
40
REMARKS: THE ION OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TUBE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK THD, NO
CONE
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN. RECOVERY
4902-03-3338 FIGURE 12 SMA-vC.TEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-11
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
.- CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR•
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12129103 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment.
F- ae u.T GROUNDWATER-INFORMATION: No groundwater
m° W w J seepage was encountered in boring while drilling. Boring
z �' o o ,u N z was dry at completion of drilling activities and after 24
O �'i t z o >Y z
U F O O W 0. W U N N= y O hours.
� LL m m G W f/� J U U Z �C7 W IL
oty FZ- o~. O a D Z O y N j a W O O
J U)
v°, o z i= a 2 c a M .a S IL v y a ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT cn top of BASE material
P-4 50+ Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules.
P=4.50+ 1 g 52 23 29 2.3
P=4.5D+•
5 P=4.'5D+ 18
P=4.50+
s.s
Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcmous nodules
10 P=4.5D+ 16
1 P=4.50+ 13
20 P=4.50+ 23
2z.o
Medium Dense light gray SAND
N=30 z5.o
25 End Of Boring @ 25.0 feet
30
35
40 —
REMARKS: THE
M N
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.'INTERSECTION OF INTERSTATE 30
SUSE AUGER SPLIT- ROCK ONE NO
C
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE ON RECOVERY O(MAC9-_j
TEC(�'4902-03-3338 FIGURE 131 EV
LOG OF BORING NO. B42
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR'
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/29/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment
a� a
Jz a, GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
e was encountered in boring @ 27.0 feet while drilling.
N w ~ o °� z g >Y Water was observed @ 28.0 feet at completion of drilling
oo o w w N o activities.After.24 hours,boring caved-In at a depth of 36,
W m m o � w z° w o w feet and water was observed at'a depth of 28 feet.
a a o Z m Z 'y y ° w O
vol o w z a 2 o oa a s a. 2 o w LL DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P=2.50 26 Very Stiff to Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous
P=3.00 • nodules
P=3.50 21 6D 26 34
5P--4.00
P=4.50+ 24
8.5
��50+ Hard orangish tan CLAY with calcreous nodules
10
75 1.P-4.50+ 22. ..
16.5
20
P=3.25 . •15 110.0 2.6 9.5 Very'Stiff light gray and tan SANDY•CLAY-
21.5
Dense light gray SAND
N=34
25
28.5
Tan WEATHERED LIMESTONE
3D 100/0.25" R,
31.0
Gray LIMESTONE with shale seams
35 100/0.50"
40 100/0.25" 40.0
End Of Boring @40.0 feet
hi M REMARKS: THE INTERSECTION OF INTERSTATE 30
AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
TUBE AUGER SPLIT. ROCK THO CONE NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE SPOON CORE PEN RECOVERY
4902-03-3338FIGURE 14 �MACTEC
LOG OF BORING NO. B-13
PROJECT: BOTANIC GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY SHEET 1 of 1
CLIENT: CITY OF FORT WORTH LOCATION: NEAR*
FORT WORTH,TEXAS
DATE: 12/29/03 SURFACE ELEV:
FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD: Boring was advanced using
continuous flight auger drilling equipment
e a�
m GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Groundwater seepage
w was encountered in boring @ 24.5 feet while drilling.
�' �' o �' n o Y Boring was dry at completion of drilling activities and
co LUo o w 0 ~ a y o after 24 hours.
1 ILW to U
co
W m tD Cc W U U Z LU b LU iL
iL
J 0 co
tl ff FQ W 2 j to to 7 iL W y
to 2 >- 5-3Z
ton a¢ z a c a a a col t~n L ¢ DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
2.25 inches of ASPHALT on top of BASE material
P=4.50+ 24 58 25 33 3.1 Hard dark brown to brown CLAY with calcareous nodules
P=4.50+
P=4.50+. 25
5 P=4.50+
6.0
Very Stiff to Hard orengish tan CLAY with calcreods nodules
„ P=4.50+ 16
10 P=4.50+ 16
15 P- m+ i6. 1ii.0 6.6 7.5
20 P=3.25
22.5
Very Dense tan GRAVELLY SAND
o N=73 Q 2S.0
25 End Of Boring @ 25.0 feet
30
35
40
REMARKS: *THE ISI I'�I W I"I AND MONTGOMERY STREET.
ION OF INTERSTATE 30
TUBE AUGER SPLIT. ROCK CO E NO
SAMPLE SAMPLE. SPOON CORE. PENRECOVERY
NM %c--J
Q �(' (�4902-03-3338 FIGURE 15 1 l1 EC
a dI
to V a F, �/] Tom►
4 �a v a"" z 3 010
o ." o
toil
•� tiD N C. _ N 6T
11 ID
r1 N r1 m C � N
t�i� E °0WA .� 0A�+ A 2A U
co O 0 qs ° G Ci d)
d) x °i ��� -� �1 A O
4-1y
00
d) pit
a
'd' N M to '
C
. z
. C � r3 � •aa�UU *
MD y
X02CL): � % off. o r� ',� .�^c F
ca
Fey" eo 0
La 0
>. `ob �. ..V.•'� •� m O•Cl p an 0
to
° y . LA
o o os a v O ry' N q
7 w 6 v� U 3 e w:=, v� U 5 w' c O a S�•. � Q o.
0 0 C7 O O C7 22
w WU O U O A, c ci o
0 o a ::� :• •� III ��� y
ca
d 0
C7 � v Uva � v Vco
t/ 0 0 o �.�
1
— o
a.
Or
a s O x c
w ^ x ri
d)z mm
813
Cyy .a e �� d Wz�'^maCu �-fl
O O Evo .�0:5 mo aGt o
C E
.•S �N C S'+
;2:
yO y N
GG Phi
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01010—SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Work phases.
3. Work under other contracts.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Specification formats and conventions.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse Facility.
1. Project Location: 3408 West Freeway,Fort Worth,Texas
B. Owner: City of Fort Worth,1000 Throckmorton,Fort Worth,Texas 76107.
1. Owner's Representative: Nancy Richardson
C. Architect: GSBS PC,7291 Glenview Drive,North Richland Hills,Texas 76180.
D. The Work consists.of the following:
1. The Work includes the construction of a new Greenhouse and Headhouse for the
City of Fort Worth. The structure is conventional construction with masonry
veneer and load bearing CMU, plus a greenhouse structure. The facility will
include toilets, work and educational rooms; in addition to the greenhouse. Site
improvements include utilities, new parking and drive pavement, walks:and re-
constructing existing asphalt paving.
E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
F. Before commencing Work, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and
completion dates;and move-out and-in dates of Owner's personnel for all'Work.
1.3. USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use.of premises for construction operations,including use of
Project site,during construction.period. .Contractor`s use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to.perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project
GSBS 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK-1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all tunes. Keep
driveways and entrances serving parking for Lockheed Martin clear and available at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
1.4 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat"numbering system.
1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable.as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2.. . Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used. in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are•to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally; the indicative or subjunctive mood ma'y'be used in the Section Text for
clarity:to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
GSBS 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon(:)is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
�a
GSBS 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
1.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Con-
struction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
B. Schedule of Values: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule.of Values with-other required administrative sched-
ules and forms,including:
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
C. List of subcontractors.
d. List of products.
e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
f. Schedule of submittals.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before
the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.
C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Include the following Project identification:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c: Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the fol-
lowing for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
h. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total.100
percent.
GSBS 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR I A y � `�,
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate evaluation of
Applications for Payment. Break subcontract amounts down into several line items.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the,Contract Sum.
4. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment
may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet in-
stalled.
5. Provide separate line items for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of
completion, and for total installed value.
6. Show line items for indirect costs and margins on costs only when such items are listed
individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Ap-
plications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total,cost and proportionate share
of general overhead and profit margin for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be
shown as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. --
7. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction
Change Directives change the Contract Sum.
D. Applications for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certi-
fied by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.
E. Payment-Application Times: Payment dates are indicated in the Agreement. The period cov-
ered by each application is the period indicated in the Agreement.
F. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as'the
form for Applications for Payment.
G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry, including notarization and execution by a per-
son authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor.. The Architect will return incomplete appli-
cations without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction'Change Directives issued prior to
the last day of the construction period covered'by the application.
H. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed original copies of each Application for Payment to the Archi-
tect within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete,_including waivers of lien and similar attach-
ments.
1. Transmit-each-copy with a transmittal listing attachments and recording appropriate in-
formation related to the application.
I. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from
every entity who may file a lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by
the payment. _
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested,prior to deduction for re-
tainage,on each item.
2. When an application showscompletion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
GSBS 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of lien for the period of
construction covered by the application.
a. Submit final Applications for Payment with final waivers from every entity in-
�m
volved with performance of the Work covered by the application who may file a
lien.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to
the Owner.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or co-
incide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
�. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final).
5. Submittal Schedule(preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. Copies of building permits.
8. Copies of licenses from governing authorities.
9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
10. Performance and payment bonds.
K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment. This application shall reflect Cer-
tificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated
portions of the Work.
1. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application
include the following:
a. Occupancy permits.
b. Warranties and maintenance agreements.
C. Test/adjust/balance records.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Meter readings.
f. Changeover information related'to Owner's occupancy.
g. Final cleaning.
h. Application forreduction of retainage and consent of surety.
L. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coin-
cide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements:
2.• Completion of items.specified.for completion after Substantial Completion.
3. Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner.
4. Certified property survey.
5. Proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid.
6. Removal of temporary facilities and.services.
'7. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
GSBS 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
1.3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
F END OF SECTION 01027
GSBS 01027-APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or-deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notifyeach party involved, in
writing, of the status of each altemate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications.to
alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule'contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES 01230- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No.One: Greenhouse Black Out System (reference specification section 13123 —
Greenhouse Systems,2.9 Black Out System)
B., Alternate No. Two: Greenhouse Benches (reference specification section 13123 —Greenhouse --
Systems,2.11 Benches)
END OF SECTION 01230
ALTERNATES 01230-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01270-UNIT PRICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of
measurement for materials or•services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by
appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents
are increased or decreased.
13 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead,and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices .and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced
in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 2-EXECUTION
m. 2.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No.One—Add per linear foot of 18"Diameter Pier.
B. Unit Price No.Two—Deduct per linear foot of 18"Diameter Pier.
C. Unit Price No.Three—Add per linear foot of steel casing.
END OF SECTION 01270
UNIT PRICES '01270- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation, of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1: Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative'forms
and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets,
Submittals Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments,provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one.line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
3, Provide•a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enoughdetail- to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased 'or fabricated
and stored,but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials,for each
T subsequent stage of completion,and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances:' Provide a separate line item in the Schedule.of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYNIENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion,and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. ®"
C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the fifth of
the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the --
last day of the month:
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within.24-hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien .
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment,submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage,on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item,submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors:
2. Schedule of Values.
„ 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
.the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, -but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes,fees,and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement,accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. .'Evidence that claims have been settled.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final,liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 0 13 10-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including,but not limited to,the following:
4,
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Project meetings.
3. Requests for Interpretation(RFIs).
I
B. See Division I Section 'Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
7
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction. operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation,connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after-its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled.for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for. required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components,including mechanical and electrical.
,B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include.such items as required notices,reports, and list of attendees
ww
at meetings.
.1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts ..
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to,the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals. '
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Content:- Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information,as applicable: —
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural,civil,mechanical,and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and.make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of _
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two minimum opaque copies of each submittal. Architect
will return one copy minimum.
4._ Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those —
Sections.
1.5- PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and -conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise _
indicated.
1. _ Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates-and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to.all invited attendees.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310--2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another mutually convenient
location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its.superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be'familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude'matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of Record Documents.
1: Use of the premises.
In. Work restrictions.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office,work, and storage areas.
S. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
U. Security.
V. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with'other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected.by the installation and its coordination or.integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect'
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress`of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration,including requirements for the following.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C, Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups. ...
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
1. Weather limitations.
in. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements. ..
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
U. Installation procedures.
V. Coordination with other work.
W. Required performance results.
X. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions.are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible•date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall berepresented at these R
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: - Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity, is on time,ahead-of schedule;or behind schedule,
in relation.to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule.will be expedited; secure commitments fromparties involved to - -
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present,including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the'schedule .have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION(RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
'n and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting,prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs-shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
2.. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
.� work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number,numbered sequentially. ,
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
.9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solutions) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions,measurements,photos,Product Data, Shop
Drawings,and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs:
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFT, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 1 Section"Contract Modifications."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
.the Contract Sum,notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
E. On receipt of Architect's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days.if Contractor
disagrees with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain; and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. .R.
Submit log monthly:
1.. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request,as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive,"and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 13 '�
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work,including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Field condition.reports.
B. See Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning,.scheduling,monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is,a method of planning and scheduling a constriction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
,. 1., Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into-smaller activities for
greater'detail.
F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal. —
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
S. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description; cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start
date,early finish date, late start date,late finish date,and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and-succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date,or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate •Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate eachconstruction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2=PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required.
by construction schedule. Include time required- for review, resubmittal, ordering, —
manufacturing,.fabrication,.and delivery when establishing dates.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is. longer than 20 days, unless.
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major-items,requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals,purchasing,fabrication,and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time' for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule,and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner._
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
�..
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
S. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work. --
6. Milestones: Include milestones. indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,
including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final
Completion.
D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily' construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Equipment at Project site.
3. Material deliveries.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Stoppages,delays,shortages, and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. "
9. Services connected and disconnected.
10. Equipment or system tests and startups.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing .conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule.Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled progress —
meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each:meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule-concurrently with the report of.each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every,change, including, but not
limited to,changes in logic,.durations,actual-starts and finishes,and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses,indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
., 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
itie
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in,performance of construction activs.
END OF SECTION 01320
ry
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
Li SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings,Product Data, Samples,and other submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for submitting test and inspection reports.
D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties.
E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications,and Record Product Data.
F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect`s responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architects responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
- 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, ,purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different'types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
' related construction activities.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.-
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner �a
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. ror
2. provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: -,
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier. mmµ
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A).
i.. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
L Locations)where product is to be installed,as appropriate.
1. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal..
1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken
and will be returned. -
G. Transmittal:, Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal'using a transmittal form. Architect will return.submitta.Is,
without review,received from sources other than Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators,installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of -
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed" or "Furnish
as Corrected"taken by Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project,subject to the following conditions:
1. As use for background drawing information only, after a mutual agreement for limitation
of distributing any file has been reached prior to release.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use,submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
.4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned,copy as a Project
Record Document.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a: Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c: Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f., Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. -
1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified:
m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 1 l inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will
return one copy.
,D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. , Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3., Disposition: Maintain.sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of"construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, .texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from.
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
. from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color,texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two.
Sample sets; remainder will be returned
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
.. G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. . Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of ..-
manufacturing experience where required.
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced .by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed-by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. „
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for.Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's.standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product,for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing '
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
O+ Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written-by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field. tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
1 Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and- graphic information, including, but not limited 'to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
7 calculations. Include page numbers.
R Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
7 product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following,as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and,if not, what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
w. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage,amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for
resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
H design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and.design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: ,In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit,three copies of a statement, signed and sealed.by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW "
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with W
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name.
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECTS ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and.may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 8
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
. , completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not. include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,coordination,testing,
or operation;they are not Samples.
D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
_ before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL,an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
•
-"° �l� �!�/v,an�
QUALITY REQURMENTS � p�
4��
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Source.Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant,mill,factory,or shop.
H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perfoim a particular construction operation,
including installation,erection,application,and similar operations.
L Using a term such as 'carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as 'carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different; but
apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply.with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as °
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include,proof of qualificationsin the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue. ^
2. 'Project title and number.
3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 '""
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements,. notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required;individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful.in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as-well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualif ed to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of-the•system, assembly, or product that.are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections.of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall'be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications; An NRTL, an-NVLAP,' or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. • NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of -
manufacturer's products that are similar in material,design,and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by.
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication, or construction. -"
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed,unless otherwise indicated.
J. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual'Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. ,-
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quahty-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will.furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections hot explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services ,required of Contractor by- authorities
having jurisdiction,whether specified or not.
1. Wheie services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4. '-
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services' are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report,in duplicate,of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
'D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3:- Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release,revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections..
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting.. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and*inspecting equipment at Project
' site.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and .
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,
and as follows:
B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2-EXECUTION
2.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
2. Comply.with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for.quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
�. SECTION 01420-REFERENCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
�. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown,"
"noted," "scheduled,"and"specified"have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. 'Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having.
jurisdiction,and rules,conventions,and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation,and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting,cleaning,and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use.
L "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards:- -Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced., Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with, standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise indicated.
REFERENCES 01420- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged'in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and
acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the
recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) _.
Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus(See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard(See FS)
FS Federal Specification T"
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard(See FS)
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service,Inc.
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD (See:MU SPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards -
NES National Evaluation Service(See ICC-ES)
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A: Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale
Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations". or in Columbia Books' "National .Trade &
Professional Associations of the U.S. �..
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
REFERENCES 01420-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
AA Aluminum Association,Inc.(The)
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AA13C Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists(The)
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute)
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies,Inc.(The)
AF&PA American Forest&Paper Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America(The)
AHA American Hardboard Association(Now part of CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
AI Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects(The)
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ATTC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee;Incorporated
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International,-Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts
REFERENCES 01420-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association
APA Architectural Precast Association
API American.Petroleum Institute
ARI Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME ASME International
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI AWCI International
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International)
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCSC)
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Industry Association(The)
BICSI BICSI
BIFMA BIFIVMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
CCC Carpet Cushion Council
REFERENCES 01420-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
CDA Copper Development Association Inc.
CEA Canadian Electricity Association
CFFA Chemical Fabrics&Film Association,Inc.
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CGSB Canadian General Standards Board
C1MA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA Ceilings&Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute ,
CPA Composite Panel Association
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI Carpet&Rug Institute-(The)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA CSA International
(Formerly: IAS-International Approval Services)
CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The)
CSSB Cedar Shake&.Shingle Bureau
CTI Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
ERA EIFS Industry Members Association
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association,Inc.
.� ESD ESD Association
FCI Fluid Controls Institute
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur
REFERENCES 01420-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
(The International Basketball Federation)
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball
(The International Volleyball Federation)
FM Factory Mutual System(Now FMG)
FMG FM Global
(Formerly: FM-Factory Mutual System)
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal&Air Conditioning Contractors
Association,Inc.
FSA Fluid Sealing Association
FSC Forest Stewardship Council
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America
GRI (Now GSI)
GS Green Seal
GSI Geosynthetic Institute
HI Hydraulic Institute
HI Hydronics Institute
H1ViMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood&Veneer Association
HPW H.P.White Laboratory,Inc.
IAS International Approval Services(Now CSA International)
IBF International Badminton Federation
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association,Inc.
ICRI International.Concrete Repair Institute,Inc.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,Inc.(The)
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America .
REFERENCES 01420-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
IGCC Insulating Glass-Certification Council
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance(The)
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America,Inc.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
ITS Intertek
ITU International Telecommunication Union
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
LMA Laminating Materials Association(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MFIVIA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
MH Material Handling(Now MI-RA).
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
MIA Marble Institute of America
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NADCA. National Air Duct Cleaners Association
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
NA1MA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association(The)
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association,Inc.
NCAA' National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
`REFERENCES '01420-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association _
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute
NCTA National Cable&Telecommunications Association
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association �.
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations
NFPA NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA National Glass Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority
NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSSGA. National Stone, Sand&Gravel Association
NTMA National Terrazzo&Mosaic Association,Inc.
NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association(Now RTI
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association(Now WDMA)
OPL Omega Point Laboratories,Inc.
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
REFERENCES 0.1420-8
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PDCA Painting.&Decorating Contractors of America
PDI Plumbing&Drainage Institute
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
RTI (Formerly: NTRMA-National Tile Roofing Manufacturers
Association)
(Now TRI)
SAE SAE International
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
SEI Structural Engineering Institute
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIA Security Industry Association
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association(Now IGMA)
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPUSPFD,-The Society of the .
Plastics Industry,.Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(The)
SPIISP,FD Society.of the Plastics Industry,Inc.(The)
Spray Polyurethane Foam Division(Now SPFA)
REFERENCES
[FT.
9S WORTH TEX.
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SPRI SPRI
(Single Ply Roofing Institute)
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI Steel Tank Institute
SWI Steel Window Institute
SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing, &Restoration Institute
TCA Tile Council of America,Inc. —
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance
TMS The Masonry.Society
TPI Truss Plate Institute,Inc.
TPI Turfgrass Producers International
TRI Tile Roofing Institute
(Formerly: RTI-Roof Tile Institute)
UL Underwriters Laboratories'Inc.
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association' —
USAV USA Volleyball
USGBC U.S.Green Building Council
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology,Inc.
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA window Covering Manufacturers Association(Now WCSC)
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council
(Formerly:-WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers
Association) —
WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA-National Wood Window and
Door Association)
REFERENCES 01420- 10
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
WI Woodwork Institute
(Formerly WIC-Woodwork Institute of California)
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
W ]Q IPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
BOCA BOCA International,Inc.(Now ICC)
CARO Council of American Building Officials(Now ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials
ICBG International Conference of Building Officials(Now ICC)
ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service,Inc.(Now ICC-ES)
ICC International Code Council
(Formerly: CABO-Council of American Building Officials)
-, ICC ES ICC Evaluation Service,Inc.
NES National Evaluation Service(Now ICC-ES)
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International,Inc.(Now ICC)
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and.acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.
CE Army Corps ofEngineers
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
DOC Department of Commerce
DOD Department of Defense
DOE Department of Energy
EPA• Environmental Protection Agency
REFERENCES .01420- 11
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
GSA General Services Administration
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration
PBS Public Building Service(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science e"
RUS Rural Utilities Service(See USDA)
SD State Department
TRB Transportation Research Board
USDA Department of Agriculture
USPS Postal Service —
E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list.
CBHF State of California,Department of Consumer Affairs
Bureau of Hbme Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission —
TFS .Texas Forest Service
Forest Products Laboratory —
END-OF SECTION 01420
REFERENCES 014201- 12
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities..
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for
temporary facilities and controls.
C. See Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements.
D. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat,ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
E. See Division 2 Section"Dewatering"for disposal of ground water at Project site.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: 'As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility Hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSMANCE
.A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,.NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install*service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall .assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pavement: Comply with Division pavement Sections.
B. Chain-Link Fencing.
C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls,and foundations adequate for normal loading:
B. Storage'and Fabrication Sheds: -Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT,
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove-until facilities "
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted,if necessary,to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion,restore these facilities to.condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Draip accumulated water promptly
from pans.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for-type,number, location,
operation,and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size,capacity,and power characteristics required for construction operations.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations,observations,inspections,and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills*security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s)for each field office.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers'including police and fire
departments and Contractor's home office.
2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2: Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before.Substantial •
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities,under conditions acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs,pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. _
Maintain Project site,excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Provide-temporary,directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all tunes.
F. Waste Disposal-Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning
requirements.
G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck'cranes and similar devices used, for hoisting materials are considered "tools.and
equipment"and not temporary facilities.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by.methods that comply.with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. -'
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent.soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Stormwater Control: Comply.with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from.damage from construction operations: Protect tree root
systems from damage,flooding,and erosion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
F. Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a
manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site.except by entrance'gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
' 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism,theft,and similar violations of security.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed,from exposure,foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
2. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply. with
NFPA 241.
- 1. Prohibit smoking in construction.areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to.be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse,limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.'
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, beating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-bour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties;product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated-and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a.product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance,and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer'sproduct is named and
accompanied by, the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation,to establish the significant qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3� SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution'Requests: Submit three copies,of each*request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title-and Drawing numbers and titles.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600_ 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples,where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having —
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead,stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information,including a proposal of change,if any,in the Contract Sum.
I Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architeds Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within -
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of'receipt of additional information or
documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form.of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies'.
opies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication' or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
numberand title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week• of receipt of a comparable.product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of-approval or rejection of proposed comparable
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional
information or documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval:• As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected,even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration,and loss,including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling,storing,unpacking,protecting,and installing..
., 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. - Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
p�
AlCM ®®6QQ'vAA��'}}
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0 � � ��
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties•specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract --
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written- warranty published by individual .
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents,either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification,ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation.
1. . Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. ,
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations.on other projects:
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be.matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance; and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish"salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
PRODUCT RE UIREMENTS 01600-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifioations name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers,provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products"Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers,provide a
product by.one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers,provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other'characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample,select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase. "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect .will select color, pattern, '
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns,textures" or similar phrase,Architect will select color;pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS t 01600-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will retum �-
requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and.evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. -�
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents; that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results,and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. 'Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners,if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART.3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
1 General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
- Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.
D. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
,1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice -
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
-" EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMNATION
A.' Existing Conditions: The existence .and location of site improvements; utilities, and other "
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site:
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates,. areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systemis are
to be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Eicisting Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility-structures, utility poles;lines,services, or other utility ,
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required tofit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
.other construction, verify dimensions-of other construction by field measurements before
E)ECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19..00
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered,together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered,notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
-. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location,level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement,utility slopes,and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines.and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor, levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys,weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party'member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
i A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points,and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls;major site improvements,and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions,-locations,
angles,and elevations of construction and sitework.
.D. ' Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features ,(real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official"property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation,as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified.to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check .Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements. ®"
G. Anchors .and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect. .�
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-74
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Allow for building movement,including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General:. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days. if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and-dispose of legally,according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper.execution of the Work, broom-clean•or vacuum the
entire work area,as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator'of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Waste Disposal: Burying or*burning waste materials on-site will not be.permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will riot be permitted.
G: During handling and installation, clean' and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already iri place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial.Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS- 01700-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction,completed or in progress,is subject to harmful,dangerous,damaging,or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units,repface'with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field' Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing.includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent.facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that.do not,operate properly. Remove and replace operating'components
that.cannot be repaired:
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces..
END OF SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished
materials.
C. See Division 2 Section"Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above-and below-grade
improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed,removed and salvaged,or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
services,use of elevator and stairs,and locations of temporary.partitions and means of egress.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under m
a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove,replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition,by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2-EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION •-
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
2.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify,disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
2.3 PREPARATION
.� A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to'remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,not hammering and -
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors,verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
2.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property,remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
2.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began. m
END OF SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
,. SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications,and Record Product Data.
D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
E. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel
F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUB STAN LkL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion,complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and.corrected (punch list), thevalue of items on
the list,and,reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3: Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications,and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. .Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information.
6.. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, 'and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make. final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
�- personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
9. Submit testladjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools,and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover .information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13: Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled --
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. --
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion,complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section 'Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected(punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment,and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance: On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
-
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will.notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification.of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
. including,if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls,floors,equipment, and building systems.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring1 vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1 l-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES,"Project name,and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning•Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
.A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770=3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions,
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter,and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris "and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums,shafts,trenches, equipment vaults,manholes,attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical, equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure. —
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean-exposed
surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. .�
Replace bumed-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed. by.hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
`r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents,insects,and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess 'materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
�" CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES _ 01770-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01781 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents,including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with.the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of'Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue-.or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the.actual'installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who .obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare.the
marked-up Record Prints..
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed. elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781"- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
.numbers,and similar identification,where applicable.
B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full
set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.
Erase,redraw,and add details and notations where applicable.
2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
J. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use
in recording information.
4. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop•Drawings for use as Record Transparencies.
Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications,addenda,.and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed product's and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished,including.substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded latera .
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD.SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required ,by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy, of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document.purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017-81 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 01782-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.- A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals,including the following:
1. Emergency manuals.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems,and equipment.
! 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.
1
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
i A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection.
Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 2 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
i
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUALS,GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain a title page,table of contents,and manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of'submittal.
-� 5. Name,address,and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name•and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01792- 1
FortWorth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, _
equipment,and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper;with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major .components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts,fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in "
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency
instructions,and emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem,piece of equipment, and component for
fire and equipment failure.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer,supplier,and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type
of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required'in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating
procedures,operating logs,wiring and control diagrams,and license requirements.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
-* 4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
® 7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic.systems.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources,and warranties and bonds,as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in,manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product; list name, address, and
®- telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance.service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. 'Color,pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection
procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and
maintenance,and repair instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,maintenance service
contracts,and warranty and bond information,as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name'and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name,address;and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of
parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of
equipment:
D. Maintenance Procedures: •Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions,and adjusting instructions,and demonstration and training videotape if
available,that detail essential maintenance procedures:
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent..
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product,material,and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 0223 0-SITE CLEARING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following.
1. Protecting existing trees to remain.
2. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements.
3. Disconnecting and capping or sealing site utilities.
4. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: interference with adjoining roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
site clearing.
C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation-control
measures are in place.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees to remain or to be relocated.
SITE CLEARING 02230- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition,as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEMIENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site, that complies with
EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction -
operations,in a manner approved by Architect.
3.4 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify,disconnect,and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
I. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.
35 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
SITE CLEARING 02230-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material,unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING 02236-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 02260-EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems:
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system
- capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and
superimposed and construction loads.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or
land surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify.
benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36K ASTM A 690/A 690K or ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C. Steel Sheet Piling- ASTM A 328/A 328K ASTM A 572/A 572K or ASTM A 690/A 690M;
with continuous interlocks.
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber,mixed hardwood,nominal rough thickness of 3 inches.
E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301,of compressive strength required for application.
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615K Grade 60,deformed.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop
during excavation support and protection system operations.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as
long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of
movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
D. Promptly repair damages- to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and
protection systems.
3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to
avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures,pavements,facilities,and utilities. ,.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches
below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by
removing excavation support and protection systems.
END OF SECTION 02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 02300-EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
mm A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks,pavements,and lawns and grasses.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and bacld-illing for utility trenches.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1'. . Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. 'Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed -by Architect. Authorized additional
excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation,as well as
remedial work directed by Architect,shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials-used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below
the ground surface.
EARTHWORK 02300- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
1. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill,or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated. '-
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: [ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and
SM] [AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-24, A-2-5, and A-3], or a
combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than [3 inches (75 mm)] <nsert
dimension>in any dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious
matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups [GC, SC, CL,ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and
PT according to ASTM D 2487] [A-2-6, A-2-7, A4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to
AASHTO M 145],or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained. within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at gime of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm)sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No.200(0.075-mm)sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone,and natural or crashed sand;ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200(0.075-mm)sieve.
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed --
stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm)sieve and not more than 12 percent passing.a.No.200(0.075-mm)sieve.
EARTHWORK 02300-2 "-
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm)sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200(0.075-mm)sieve.
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of [washed]crushed stone, or crushed or
-` uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a
1-1/2-inch(37.5-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8(2.36-mm)sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.� A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 2
Section"Site Clearing."
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2
Section"Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock,soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized-for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock,replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork,for installing services and other construction,and for inspections.
EARTHWORK 02300-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS `
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. 'Excavate trenches to indicated gradients,lines,depths,and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of
pipe or conduit,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of �-
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,joints,and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade. .
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material,4 inches deeper elsewhere,to allow fior bedding course.
3.6 SU13GRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect,without additional compensation.
3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
EARTHWORK 02300-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice.
B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings,and bodies of conduits.
C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Provide 4-inch-thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below
surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a
minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material,free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension,to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
G.. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
® 3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas,use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements,use satisfactory soil material.
- 3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
4. Under footings and foundations,use engineered fill.
EARTHWORK 02300-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or back-fill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight �-
according to ASTM D 698.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface,free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections,lines,and elevations indicated.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: ~~
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud,frost, snow,or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade,place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. —
2. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
EARTHWORK 02300-6 ""
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud,frost,snow,or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
- thickness,with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
-° B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing.capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgmde when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167,ASTM D 2922,and ASTM D 2937,as applicable .
E. When testing agency reports.that subgrades, fills, or back-fills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required,recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due-to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact,and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
EARTHWORK 02300-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash,and debris,and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK 02300-8 """
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 02361 -TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
B. See Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood preservative treatment by pressure process.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label.
B. Product certificates.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
I. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions,methods,volumes,and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to.apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is
located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered
Label.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying
that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
. infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered
during warranty period,re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion,provide 12 months' continuing service
including monitoring,inspection,and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a
standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period;and terns for future renewal options.
PART 2-PRODUCTS —
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Termiticides:
a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP;Termidor. ^^
b. Bayer Corporation;Premise 75.
C. Dow AgroSciences LLC;Dursban TC,Equity.
d. FMC Corporation,Agricultural Products Group;Talstar,Prevail FT,Torpedo. �..
e. Syngenta;Demon TC.
2.2 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide
concentration allowed for each specific use,according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as
wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil
within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously
compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing
compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. —
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction,
including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil
materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
S walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney
bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid
soil washout around footings.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat
adjacent areas including around entrance platform,porches, and equipment bases. Apply
overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or
ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be
penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,grading, landscaping,
or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 -3
SECTION 02553 -NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, valves, and service regulators for natural gas distribution outside
the building.
B. See Division 15 Section"Fuel Gas Piping"for natural gas piping inside the building.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gas Main: Utility's natural gas piping.
B. Gas Distribution: Piping from gas main to individual service-meter assemblies.
C. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet from service-meter assembly.
D. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to natural gas
utilization devices inside the building.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum,unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. PE pipe and fittings.
2. Valves.
3. Service regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
B. Shop Drawings: For natural gas service piping and service meter assembly. Include plans,
elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying natural gas and with authorities having
jurisdiction for natural gas systems.
B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1 or NFPA 54 for materials, installation, testing, inspection, and
purging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey,research public utility records,and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS --
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M,Type E or S,Grade B; Schedule 40,black.
1. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASMEB 16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads
complying with ASME B 1.20.1.
2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASMEB 16.5.
3. Unions: ASME B 16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass-to-iron
seat;ground joint.
B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. -"
1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket type or ASTM D 3261, butt type with dimensions
matching ASTM D 2513, SDR 11,PE pipe.
C. Transition Fittings: Manufactured pipe fitting with one PE pipe end for heat-fusion connection
to PE pipe and with one ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, steel pipe end for threaded
connection to steel pipe.
D. Service-Line Risers: Manufactured PE pipe fitting with PE pipe inlet for heat-fusion
connection to underground PE pipe; PE pipe riser section with protective-coated, anodeless,
steel casing and threaded outlet for threaded connection to aboveground steel piping.
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
E. Components,Tapes,Gaskets,and Bolts and Nuts: Suitable for natural gas and as recommended
by piping manufacturer.
2.3 VALVES
A. Valves, General: Manual operation, suitable for natural gas service, and with 100-psig
minimum working-pressure rating.
B. Threaded Valves, NPS 1 and Smaller: Include listing by agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Nonlubricated, Tapered Plug Valves: Brass or cast-iron body, with brass tapered plug; lever
operation; and complying with ASME B16.33,MSS SP-78,UL 842. Include lever and locking
device.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Essex Brass.
b. Lyall,R. W.&Company,Inc.
C. McDonald,A.Y.Mfg.Co.
d. Mueller Company.
D. PE Valves: Made for gas distribution, with nut or flat head for key operation; and complying
with ASME B 16.40,UL 842.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp.
b. Lyall,R.W.&Company,Inc.
C. Nordstrom Valves,Inc.
d. Perfection Corporation;Gas Products Div.
2.4 SPECIALTIES
A. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron,two-section box. Include top section with cover with "GAS" lettering,
bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-
iron extension of length required for depth of bury. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench
with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head and with stem of length required to operate valve.
B. Concrete Bases: Precast concrete made of 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength
reinforced concrete;at least 4 inches thick and 4 inches larger in each dimension than supported
item,unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Refer to Division 2 for excavating,trenching,and backfilling.
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 -3
- FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or piping section.
C. Inspect natural gas piping according to fuel gas code to determine that natural gas utilization m�
devices are turned off in piping section affected.
D. Comply with fuel gas code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating may be used,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground Piping: Steel pipe,malleable-iron fittings,and threaded joints.
C. Underground Piping: PE pipe,PE fittings,and heat-fusion joints.
D. Underground-to-Aboveground Piping Connections: Service-line riser.
E. PE-to-Steel Piping Connections: Transition fitting.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate types of shutoff valves to be used. If specific types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping
gas mains. --
2. Underground: Use PE valves.
3. Aboveground,NPS 2 and Smaller: Lubricated tapered plug valves.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install underground, natural gas distribution piping buried at least 36 inches below finished
grade.
B. Install underground,PE,natural gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not
install where condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
D. Terminate service-regulator horizontal vents or horizontal vent piping with reducing-elbow
fittings with large end as outlet. Install fitting outlet turned down with corrosion-resistant insect
screen in outlet.
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 -4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
E. Install PE shutoff valves on branch connections to existing underground,natural gas distribution
piping. Install valves with valve boxes.
F. Install metal shutoff valves on aboveground,natural gas distribution piping.
G. Connect gas distribution piping to natural gas source and extend to service-meter assemblies
and points indicated. Connect to building's natural gas piping if it is installed; otherwise,
terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges, as required for piping material. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping"for natural gas piping inside the building.
H. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having
threaded pipe connection.
„1 I. Do not use natural gas distribution piping as grounding electrode.
J. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and
signs on or near each service regulator,service meter,and earthquake valve.
1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator
of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
K. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape
over natural gas distribution piping during backfilling of trenches for piping.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test, inspect,and purge natural gas distribution according to requirements of fuel gas code and
utility.
B. Repair leaks and defective valves and specialties and retest system until no leaks exist.
C. Report results in writing.
D. Verify correct pressure settings for service regulators.
END OF SECTION 02553
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION 02553 -5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 02821 -CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Chain-Link Fences: Industrial.
2. Gates: Swing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and
finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage,
attachment,bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: 6 feet high. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements
indicated below:
1. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.148 inch..
a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.
b. Metallic(Zinc)Coating: ASTM A 392,Type II.
® 2. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
2.2 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round
pipe,and the following:
1. Group: IA,round steel pipe, Schedule 40.
2. Fence Height: 6 feet.
3. Strength Requirement: Light industrial according to ASTM F 1043.
4. Coating for Steel Framing:
a. Metallic coating.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.3 INDUSTRIAL SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single or double swing gate types.
1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1083 and
ASTM F 1043 for materials and protective coatings. '-
B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing with outside
dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following: --
1. Gate Fabric Height: 2 inches less than adjacent fence height.
2. Leaf Width: As indicated on drawings.
3. Frame Members:
a. Tubular Steel 1.66 inches round.
C. Frame Corner Construction:
1. Assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch-diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5
feet wide or wider].
D. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, center gate stops and
keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings
for padlocking;padlock accessible from both sides of gate.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B. Finish:
1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq.ft.zinc.
2.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Materials: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I aggregates complying with
ASTM C 33, and potable water.
1. Concrete Mixes: Normal-weight concrete with not less than 3000-psi compressive
strength(28 days),4-inch slump,and 1-inch maximum size aggregate.
PART 3 -EXECUTION —
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent
requirements specified.
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821 -2 """
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in
- firm,undisturbed soil.
C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm,undisturbed soil.
- 1. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
D. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, comer, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment.
E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c.
F. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567. Install braces at end
and gate posts and at both sides of comer and pull posts.
G. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567.
H. Bottom Rails: Install,spanning between posts.
I. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to inside of enclosing framework Leave 2 inches between
- finish grade or surface and bottom selvage,unless otherwise indicated.
J. Tie Wires: Attach wire per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals
and clothing.
K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the
fabric side.
3.2 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-
resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust
hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
END OF SECTION 02821
CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821 -3
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete,with shoring,bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
-- 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for.placement by
this section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
C. ACI 347-Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork.
D. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to code
requirements;resultant concrete to conform to required shape,line and dimension.
u, 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, 301, and 318.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for design,fabrication,erection and removal of aw-' 1 'E'--0
CIITf 'aEUV
15W.k� R�y
03100- 1 FT. EMS
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of
components to formwork.
B. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement,request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Plywood: solid one side; sound undamaged sheets with clean,true edges.
B. Lumber: stud grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. ,-
2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Preformed Steel Forms: Matched,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete
without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
B. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched,tight fitting,stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of
finished concrete surfaces.
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type,metal, cone type, 1" inch minimum back break dimension,
free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1" inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb
moisture,or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on
concrete.
C. Comers: Chamfer, 3/4" x 3/4"inch size; maximum possible lengths. r
D. Anchorages: Sized as required,of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork
in place while placing concrete. --
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXANIINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that
dimensions agree with drawings.
03100— 2
3.2 EARTH FORMS
A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.3 ERECTION-FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork,shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements,in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject
to over stressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage
concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a
— E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated
on Drawings.
F. Provide chamfer strips on external corners.
3.4 APPLICATION-FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices,and embedded items.
3.5 INSERTS,EMBEDDED PARTS,AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through
concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
m C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots,reglets,
recesses, sleeves,bolts,anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.
-. 3.6 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds,to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
3.7 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
03100— 3
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect erected formwork,shoring,and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with
formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges,ties, and items are secure.
3.9 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its
own weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish
concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not
be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
03100— 4
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel bars,wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete.
C. ACI SP-66-American Concrete Institute-Detailing Manual.
D. ANSI/ASTM A82- Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
E. ANSI/ASTM Al 85 -Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ANSFASTM A496 -Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ANSFASTM A497-Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
- E. ANSFAWS DIA- Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel.
F. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
G. ASTM A706-Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
H. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in
Reinforced Concrete Construction.
I. CRSI-Concrete.Reinforcing Steel Institute-Manual of Practice.
J. CRSI-Placing Reinforcing Bars.
1.4 SUBNHTTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 13 00.
03200- 1
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing
steel, bending and cutting schedules. —
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63, 65 and Manual of Practice, ACI 301, and
ACI 318.
B. Provide Architect/Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of
reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication
in sufficient time to allow inspection.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 Manufacturer's
Certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification
within the previous 12 months.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with placement of formwork,formed openings and other Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars,
unfinished
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM Al 85 Plain Type in flat sheets unfinished.
2.2.ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.
B. Bolsters,Bar Supports,Horizontal Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on
bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.
C. Special Chairs,Bolsters,Bar Supports,Horizontal Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed
Concrete Surfaces: Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required.
23 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice,ACI 318.
B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings, at point of-minimum stress.
03200—2
Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from
required position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Conform to-applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
END OF SECTION
03200-3
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place concrete foundation.
B. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work,
including joint sealants.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device anchors in formwork.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03100- Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 -Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 302-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete.
D. ACI 305R-Hot Weather Concreting.
E. ACI 3068- Cold Weather Concreting.
F. ACI 308-Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
G. ACI 318 -Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
H. ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates.
L ASTM C94-Ready-Mixed Concrete.
J. ASTM C150-Portland Cement.
K. ASTM C494- Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete.
L. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
1.5 SUBNHTTALS
03300- 1
A. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface
required with adjacent Work.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are
concealed from view.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
D. Conform-to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and
placement of form accessories.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I-Normal.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical: ASTM C494 Type A - Water Reducing, Type B - Retarding, Type C -
Accelerating, Type D- Water Reducing and Retarding, Type E-Water Reducing and
Accelerating, Type F- Water Reducing,High Range, Type G- Water Reducing, High
Range and Retarding.
B. Fly Ash Calcinated Pozzolan: ASTM C618 Class Cor F.
2.3 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D994;Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or
felt.
03300- 2 �.
2.4 CONCRETE MIX
A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1.
y B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
C. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Engineer.
D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.0 A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete
are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in.placing
concrete.
3.2 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304, ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement,inserts,embedded parts,formed expansion and contraction joints
are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
_. E. Install construction joint devices in coordination with plans. Set top to required
elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
F. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date,location,quantity,air temperature,
and test samples taken.
G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion,control,and construction
joints.
H. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur, except as
detailed.
I. Screed floors level,maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth rubbed finish.
03300- 3
B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
C. Steel trowel surfaces.
3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION .�
A. Immediately after placement,protect concrete from premature drying,excessively hot or
cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for
period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 3 days.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with Testing Laboratory.
B. Submit proposed.mix design to Engineer for review prior to commencement of Work.
C. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
D. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds of concrete placed.
E. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job
site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
F. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
3.9 PATCHING
A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of _
forms.
R
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify a,
Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed.
3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,
tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the
Architect/Engineer.
C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express
03300— 4 "
direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
03300- 5
SECTION 03370
CONCRETE CURING
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES.
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300- Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 302-Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
x
C. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
D. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
E. ASTM C309-Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
F. ASTM D2103 -Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 01600..
B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging including application
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound Type A: ASTM C309 Type 1 acrylic clear.
B. Water: Potable,not detrimental to concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
03370-1
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.2 EXECUTION-HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 3 08.
B. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days. —
C. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions in two coats with second coat applied at right angles to m
first.
3.3 EXECUTION-VERTICAL SURFACES
A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.
C. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions in two coats with second coat applied at right angles to first.
3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 0 15 00.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
03370-2 '
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
Not Applicable
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13123 Greenhouse Systems 6
13915 Fire Suppression Piping 16
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Applicable
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 9
15083 Pipe Insulation 3
15140 Domestic Water Piping 7
15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 8
15194 Fuel Gas Piping 10
15410 Plumbing Fixtures 5
15415 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers 3
15430 Plumbing Specialties 10
15486 Fuel-Fired,Domestic Water Heaters 5
15732 Rooftop Air Conditioners 6
15767 Propeller Unit Heaters 3
15815 Metal Ducts 5
15820 Duct Accessories 7
15838 Power Ventilators 4
15855 Diffusers,Registers,and Grilles 2
15950 Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing 9
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL
16001 Electrical Systems—General 8
16030 Testing of Electrical Systems 4
16040 Identification of Electrical Equipment 2
16111 Conduits 6
16120 Wires and Cables 7
16130 Electrical Boxes - - 4
16190 Supporting Devices 3
16450 Grounding and Bonding 4
16470 Power and Lighting Panelboards 4
16490 Switches and Receptacles 4
16500 Lighting Fixtures,Mounting Poles,and Control Devices 11
16721 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 6
GSBS T.O.C.3
CITE �EC"2Ek�LF
F1. °W STH, YEK.
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of masonry work as indicated in the contract documents..
1..2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of wall with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is
not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
2. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building
masonry walls or columns.
3. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after the building masonry
walls or columns.
B. Temporary Bracing: Take adequate precautions to prevent damage to walls by high
wind or other forces during erection. Where necessary,provide temporary bracing
until the designed lateral strength is reached.
C. Storage: Begin no masonry work until at least 1/z of all brick and/or CMU is on the job
site.
D. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such
masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means
of coveings spread on ground and over wall surface.
1. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
2. For class masonry units with initial rates of absorption (suction)which require
them to be wetted before laying, comply with the following requirements.
a. For units with surface temperatures above 32°F, wet with water heated to
above 707.
b. For units with surface temperatures below 32°F,wet with water heated to
above 130°F.
E. Cold Weather Protection:
1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.
2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until
top surface is dry to the touch.
3. Remove all masonry determined to be damaged by freezing conditions.
4. Perform the following construction procedures while masonry work is
progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures
existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout,temperature ranges
f
04200- 1
apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout
materials,maintain mixing temperature selected withing 10°F.
a. 40°F to 32°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between
40°F and 120°F.
2). Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures.
b. 32°F to 25°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F;maintain temperature of mortar on boards
above freezing.
2). Grout:Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
C. 25°F to 20°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F;maintain temperature of mortar on boards
above freezing.
2). Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
3). Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or
other heat sources.
4). Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
d. 20°F and below:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F.
2). Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
3). Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20°F at
time of laying.
4). Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of
at least 40°F for 24 hours after laying units.
Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160°F.
5. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following
manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures
expect for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry temperature ranges apply to
anticipated minimum night temperatures.
a. 40°F to 32°F:
Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least.24 hours by covering with
weather-resistive membrane.
b. 32°F to 20°F:
Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets or
similar protection for at least 24 hours,48 hours for grouted masonry.
C. 20°F and below:
Except as otherwise indicated,maintain masonry temperature above 32°F for 24
hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets,infrared
lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry maintain
WHOM
�-.n ti
04200-2 'lll�'�d�,�� Hr
heated enclosure to 40°F for 48 hours..
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer,for uniform texture and
color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and
requirements indicated.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners,jambs, shash, control
joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. All outside corners, door and
window jambs, window sills and exposed edges shall be a bull nose shaped unit.
B. Concrete masonry Units: Grade N-I for loadbearing units; Type I for non-load-bearing
units. Provide Class D-2 (2-hour)rated units where noted on drawings. Provide
hollow units made from Portland cement and lightweight mineral aggregate.
1, All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant and shall have the same
surface texture. Units shall have a linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.035%by test.
C. Size:Unless otherwise indicated,provide standard units to the following dimensions:
Nominal face dimensions of 16"long x 8"high x 8" thick.
2.3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing for Masonry
1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10',
with matching corner("L") and intersecting ("T") units. Fabricate from cold-
drawn steel wire with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods,into
units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and
partitions as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with
mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not
less then V2" elsewhere. Provide the following type of joint reinforcing unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry or if not
otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick Wythe and one side rod for
each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe.
2. For multi-wythe walls provide tab type consisting of single pair of side rods and
rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16"o.c. Space side rods for
embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe and extend ties to within 1"
of exterior face of facing wythe. Provide units with adjustable 2-piece rectangular
ties.
3. Wire-sizes: Fabricate with 9-gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Wire Finish:provide manufacturer's standard mill galvanized sinish except as
04200-3
otherwise indicated.
5. Individual Wire Ties for Masonry: Fabricate from 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire,
unless otherwise indicated, of the length required for proper embedment in wythes
of masonry.
a. For use with hollow masonry units laid cells vertical,provide rectangular
shaped ties.
b. Where spacing and back-up joints do not align,provide either offset or
adjustable 2-piece ties.
C. For interior wall, fabricate from steel wire with mill galvanized finish.
d. For exterior walls,fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot dip zinc
coating, or fabricate from steel wire with not less than 7-mil copper coating.
6. Anchoring and Ties: Provide straps,bars,bolts and rods fabricated from not less
than 16 ga. Sheet metal or 3/16" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 7.
B. Bond Breaker Strips: 15-1b. asphalt roofing felt or 15-1b. asphalt roofing felt or 15-1b,
coal-tar roofing felt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Dimensions are based on modular units. If units other than modular size are used,
coordinate any required dimension revisions with Architect prior to start of masonry
work.
B. Laying Masonry Units: Spread mortar beds smooth and full to cover all bearing areas.
Do not furrow. Butter head joints and shove units into place. Head joints shall be
staggered except where stack bond is specifically indicated. Make back joints full
against the backing materials as each course is laid.
1. Leave pipe spaces open on one full side until pipe work has been completed and
inspected.
2. The plan of walls and partitions shall be as accurate as is reasonable to build, but
in no case will variations more than 1/8" in 8 ft. be acceptable.
3. Fill the cells of exposed concrete masonry units with mortar for a width of 8" at
the jambs of all openings in walls.
4. Exposed ends of units at external corners shall be solid.
C. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the thickness shown,using units of nominal
thickness shown or specified.
1. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for work of other trades.
Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses.
2. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean
sharp,unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry
04200-4
cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
3. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
D. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in matching,running bond pattern or pattern as
shown on drawings,lay in running bond vertical joint in each course centered on units
n courses above and below. Lay ocncealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded
by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners,
unless otherwise shown.
1. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns,with
uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings,movement-type joints,
returns and off sets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at comers,jambs
and wherever possible at other locations.
2. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level,accurately spaced and coordinated
with other work.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back'/z-masonry unit length in each course;do
not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,wet units lightly(if specified to be
wetted),and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Build-In Work: As the work progresses,build-in items specified under this and other
sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,place a
layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
2. Fill CMU cores with grout 3 courses(24")under bearing plates,beams lintels,
posts,and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated.
G. Non-Loadbearing Interior Partition Walls: See drawings for heights.
H. Flashing:Build in flashings which enter the masonry,using the materials and
following the instructions of the pertinent sections of the specifications.
I. Miscellaneous Work:
1. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Furnish bedding
mortar and set loose lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames,maintain
them in position and build them in with anchors properly placed. Do not distort
frames by crowding.
2. Cut and form opening for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing
installations so that wall plates and escutcheons will completely cover the
openings. Cut edges shall be clean, sharp and straight.
3_ Fill the spaces around and behind metal door frames solid with mortar.
4. Point the opening around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar.
J. Curing:In dry weather,masonry exposed to wind and sun shall be wet with a fine
water spray several times each day for at least 6 days, starting as soon as the mortar
has set sufficiently to resist erosions.
K. Reinforcing Masonry Joints:Reinforce the bed joints of concrete masonry unit walls
and partitions with continuous joint reinforcement strips.
1. Furnish strips in long lengths. Width of strips shall be 2" less than nominal
04200-5
overall width of the wall or partition.
2. Lap strip ends 12" and bedside rods in mortar for complete cover and bond.
Install strips in bed joints spaced 16" o.c. for exterior walls and 24" o.c. for
interior partitions. Reinforcement shall extend into and bond the facing wythe in
walls.
L. Bonding: Tie together all masonry unit construciton within walls and at intersections
of wal)s by masonry bond and staggered vertical joints. Toothing will not be
permitted except where specifically authorized by the Architect. Where walls must be
built in advance of adjacent walls, form the stop-off by ranking back.
3.2 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed head and collar joints;butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head
joints.
B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on grade beams and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout.
C. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown except for minor variations required to maintain
bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated,lay walls with 3/8"joints. Cut joints
flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake
out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying,clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not
pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required,remove units;clean off mortar,and reset in fresh mortar.
3.3 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING
A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8"
on exterior side of walls and V2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing,
unless, otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by
use of prefabricated"L"and"T"sections. Cut and bend uints as directed by
manufacturer for continuity at returns,offsets, column fireproofing,pipe enclosures
and other special conditions.
Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically.
B. Reinforce masonry openings grater than V-0"wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing
placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8"apart,both immediately above lintels
and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of T-0"beyond jambs of the
opening,bridging control joints where provided
04200-6
3.4 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK
A. Provide anchoring devices of type indicated. If not indicated,provide standard type
for facing and back-up involved.
B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such emembers
to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural
member,unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry
joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections,unless
otherwise shown.
3. Space anchors as shown,but not more than 16" o.c.vertically and 24" o.c.
horizontally.
3.5 LINTELS
Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more thatn 1'-0" are
shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed-
in-place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and
installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls,use specially formed"U"-shaped lintel
units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout of consistency
required to completely fill space between reinforcing bars and masonry unit.
2. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into the masonry walls. Where reinforcing or
steel shapes are not specifically called out for lintels in brick walls, use one steel
angle for each 4"thickness for brick in wall.
3. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated
3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide vertical control joints @ 18'-0" o.c.max in masonry or as otherwise shown or
noted. Build-in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses.
Submit joint locations to Architect for approval.
B. See Division-7 for"Joint Sealers".
C. Build-in joint fillers where shown or specified in Division-7 section"Joint Sealers".
Joint width for sealants: 3/8"unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 REPAIR,PAINTING,AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose,chipped,broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new
units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout,pointed to eliminate
04200-7
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of masonry work as indicated in the contract documents..
1.2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of wall with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is
not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
_. 2. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building
masonry walls or columns.
3. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after the building masonry
walls or columns.
B. Temporary Bracing: Take adequate precautions to prevent damage to walls by high
wind or other forces during erection. Where necessary, provide temporary bracing
until the designed lateral strength is reached.
C. Storage: Begin no masonry work until at least'h of all brick and/or CMU is on the job
site.
D. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such
masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means
of coveings spread on ground and over wall surface.
1. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
®' 2. For class masonry units with initial rates of absorption(suction)which require
them to be wetted before laying, comply with the following requirements.
a. For units with surface temperatures above 32°F, wet with water heated to
above 70°F.
b. For units with surface temperatures below 32°F, wet with water heated to
above 130°F.
E. Cold Weather Protection:
n— 1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.
2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until
top surface is dry to the touch.
—Po 3. Remove all masonry determined to be damaged by freezing conditions.
4. Perform the following construction procedures while masonry work is
progressing. Temperature ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures
existing at time of installation except for grout. For grout, temperature ranges
�,
04200- 1
apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In heating mortar and grout
materials, maintain mixing temperature selected withing 10°F.
a. 40°F to 32°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between
40°F and 120°F.
2). Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures.
b. 32°F to 25°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F;maintain temperature of mortar on boards
above freezing.
2). Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
C. 25°F to 20°F:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F; maintain temperature of mortar on boards
above freezing.
2). Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
3). Heat both sides of walls under construction using salamanders or —
other heat sources.
4). Use windbreaks or enclosures when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
d. 20°F and below:
1). Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures
between 40°F and 120°F. _
2). Grout: Heat grout materials to 90°F to produce in-place grout
temperature of 70°F at end of work day.
3). Masonry Units: Heat masonry units so that they are above 20°F at
time of laying.
4). Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain an air temperature of
at least 40°F for 24 hours after laying units. T-
Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160°F.
5. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following
manner. Temperature ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures
expect for grouted masonry. For grouted masonry temperature ranges apply to
anticipated minimum night temperatures.
a. 40°F to 32°F:
Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with
weather-resistive membrane.
b. 32°F to 20°F:
Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets or
similar protection for at least 24 hours,48 hours for grouted masonry.
C. 20°F and below: —
Except as otherwise indicated, maintain masonry temperature above 32°F for 24
hours using enclosures and supplementary heat,electric heating blankets, infrared
lamps or other methods proven to be satisfactory. For grouted masonry maintain
04200-2 --
heated enclosure to 40°F for 48 hours..
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS,GENERAL
A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, for uniform texture and
color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and
requirements indicated.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners,jambs, shash, control
joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. All outside corners, door and
window jambs, window sills and exposed edges shall be a bull nose shaped unit.
B. Concrete masonry Units: Grade N-I for loadbearing units; Type I for non-load-bearing
units. Provide Class D-2 (2-hour) rated units where noted on drawings. Provide
hollow units made from Portland cement and lightweight mineral aggregate.
1. All units shall be from the same manufacturing plant and shall have the same
surface texture. Units shall have a linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.035% by test.
C. Size: Unless otherwise indicated, provide standard units to the following dimensions:
Nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high x 8" thick.
2.3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing for Masonry
1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10',
with matching corner("L") and intersecting("T")units. Fabricate from cold-
drawn steel wire with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into
units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and
partitions as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with
mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not
less then 1/z" elsewhere. Provide the following type of joint reinforcing unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry or if not
otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for
each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe.
2. For multi-wythe walls provide tab type consisting of single pair of side rods and
rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16"o.c. Space side rods for
embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe and extend ties to within 1"
of exterior face of facing wythe. Provide units with adjustable 2-piece rectangular
ties.
3. Wire-sizes: Fabricate with 9-gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Wire Finish: provide manufacturer's standard mill galvanized sinish except as
04200-3
otherwise indicated.
5. Individual Wire Ties for Masonry: Fabricate from 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire,
unless otherwise indicated,of the length required for proper embedment in wythes
of masonry.
a. For use with hollow masonry units laid cells vertical,provide rectangular �-
shaped ties.
b. Where spacing and back-up joints do not align,provide either offset or
adjustable 2-piece ties.
C. For interior wall, fabricate from steel wire with mill galvanized finish.
d. For exterior walls, fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot dip zinc
coating, or fabricate from steel wire with not less than 7-mil copper coating.
6. Anchoring and Ties: Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from not less
than 16 ga. Sheet metal or 3/16" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel,Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 7.
B. Bond Breaker Strips: 15-1b. asphalt roofmg felt or 15-1b. asphalt roofing felt or 15-1b,
coal-tar roofing felt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Dimensions are based on modular units. If units other than modular size are used,
coordinate any required dimension revisions with Architect prior to start of masonry
work. -�
B. Laying Masonry Units: Spread mortar beds smooth and full to cover all bearing areas.
Do not furrow. Butter head joints and shove units into place. Head joints shall be
staggered except where stack bond is specifically indicated. Make back joints full
against the backing materials as each course is laid.
1. Leave pipe spaces open on one full side until pipe work has been completed and
inspected.
2. The plan of walls and partitions shall be as accurate as is reasonable to build,but
in no case will variations more than 1/8" in 8 ft. be acceptable.
3. Fill the cells of exposed concrete masonry units with mortar for a width of 8" at
the jambs of all openings in walls.
4. Exposed ends of units at external corners shall be solid.
C. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the thickness shown,using units of nominal _
thickness shown or specified.
1. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for work of other trades.
Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses.
2. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown to fit -
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry
04200-4
cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
3. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
D. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in matching,running bond pattern or pattern as
shown on drawings, lay in running bond vertical joint in each course centered on units
n courses above and below. Lay ocncealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded
by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners,
unless otherwise shown.
1. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with
uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints,
—° returns and off sets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs
and wherever possible at other locations.
2. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated
with other work.
E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back V2-masonry unit length in each course; do
not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly(if specified to be
wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Build-In Work: As the work progresses,build-in items specified under this and other
sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
2. Fill CMU cores with grout 3 courses (24")under bearing plates,beams lintels,
posts, and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated.
G. Non-Loadbearing Interior Partition Walls: See drawings for heights.
H. Flashing: Build in flashings which enter the masonry, using the materials and
following the instructions of the pertinent sections of the specifications.
I. Miscellaneous Work:
1. Cooperate with other trades in installing their work in masonry. Furnish bedding
mortar and set loose lintels. Cooperate in setting bucks and frames, maintain
them in position and build them in with anchors properly placed. Do not distort
frames by crowding.
® 2. Cut and form opening for recessed items and for electrical and plumbing
installations so that wall plates and escutcheons will completely cover the
openings. Cut edges shall be clean, sharp and straight.
3. Fill the spaces around and behind metal door frames solid with mortar.
4. Point the opening around flush-mounted electrical outlet boxes with mortar.
.� J. Curing: In dry weather, masonry exposed to wind and sun shall be wet with a fine
water spray several times each day for at least 6 days, starting as soon as the mortar
has set sufficiently to resist erosions.
K. Reinforcing Masonry Joints: Reinforce the bed joints of concrete masonry unit walls
and partitions with continuous joint reinforcement strips.
1. Furnish strips in long lengths. Width of strips shall be 2" less than nominal
04200-5
overall width of the wall or partition.
2. Lap strip ends 12" and bed side rods in mortar for complete cover and bond.
Install strips in bed joints spaced 16" o.c. for exterior walls and 24" o.c. for
interior partitions. Reinforcement shall extend into and bond the facing wythe in
walls.
L. Bonding: Tie together all masonry unit construciton within walls and at intersections
of walls by masonry bond and staggered vertical joints. Toothing will not be
permitted except where specifically authorized by the Architect. Where walls must be
built in advance of adjacent walls, form the stop-off by ranking back.
3.2 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed head and collar joints; butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head
joints.
B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on grade beams and in all �.
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout.
C. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown except for minor variations required to maintain
bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8"joints. Cut joints
flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. .
Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake
out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not
pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
3.3 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING
A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8"
on exterior side of walls and 1/z" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing,
unless, otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by
use of prefabricated"L" and"T" sections. Cut and bend uints as directed by
manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures
and other special conditions.
Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically.
B. Reinforce masonry openings grater than l'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing
placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart,both immediately above lintels
and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the
opening,bridging control joints where provided.
04200-6 �-
3.4 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK
A. Provide anchoring devices of type indicated. If not indicated,provide standard type
for facing and back-up involved.
B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such emembers
to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry
joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless
otherwise shown.
3. Space anchors as shown,but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 24" o.c.
horizontally.
3.5 LINTELS
Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown.
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more thatn F-0" are
shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed-
in-place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and
-� installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed"U"-shaped lintel
units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout of consistency
- required to completely fill space between reinforcing bars and masonry unit.
2. Steel Lintels: Build steel lintels into the masonry walls. Where reinforcing or
steel shapes are not specifically called out for lintels in brick walls, use one steel
angle for each 4" thickness for brick in wall.
3. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide vertical control joints @ 18'-0" o.c. max in masonry or as otherwise shown or
noted. Build-in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses.
Submit joint locations to Architect for approval.
B. See Division-7 for"Joint Sealers".
C. Build-in joint fillers where shown or specified in Division-7 section "Joint Sealers".
Joint width for sealants: 3/8" unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 REPAIR,PAINTING,AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped,broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new
units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate
04200-7
evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent
work to provide a neat, uniform appearance,properly prepared for application of
caulking or sealant compounds.
C. Clean exposed brick masonry surfaces by bucket and brush hand cleaning method or
by high pressure water method. Comply with requirements of BIA Technical Notes
No. 30"Cleaning Brick Masonry".
Use commercial cleaning agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at end of each day's work and after
final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings.
END OF SECTION
04200-8
SECTION 04340
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units.
B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Placement of steel anchors for beams.
B. Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Placement of fabricated steel items.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04100-Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar and grout.
B. Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels and fabricated steel items.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ACI 530-Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
B. ACI 530.1 -Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C. ASTM A82- Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ASTM A123 -Zinc(Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
E. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process.
F. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
G. ASTM C90-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. 11VIIAC -International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended
Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
I. RVHAC -International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended
Practices and-Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry-Construction:
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: D IIAC -Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
04340-1
B. Hot Weather Requirements: IlVIIAC-Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units(CML): ASTM C90, Type I-Moisture Controlled
light weight.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; steel wire,hot dip galvanized to
ASTM A641 Class 3 after fabrication, cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM
A82, 3/16 inch(4.8 mm) side rods with.148 inch cross ties.
B. Reinforcing Steel: specified in Section 03200.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry
work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place —
until building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.3 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints
of uniform thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches(200 mm).
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
04340-2
A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
B. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.
D. Interlock intersections and external corners.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made,remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges.
G. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control
joint.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and
below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
mm D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2
inch(13 mm)of dimensioned position.
F. Embed anchors embedded in concrete attached to structural steel members.
3.6 LINTELS
A. Do not splice reinforcing bars.
B. Support and secure reinforcing'bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2
inch(13 mm)of dimensioned position.
C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
D. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary
supports.
E. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.7 GROUTED COMPONENTS
04340-3
A. Lap splices minimum 57 bar diameters.
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2
inch(13 mm)of dimensioned position.
C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
3.8 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch(1.5 mm).
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft(6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch
in 20 ft(13 mm/6 m)or more.
C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch(6 mm)per story non-cumulative; 112
inch(13 mm)in two stories or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft(3 mm/m) and 1/4 inch in
10 ft(6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 3 0 ft(13 mm/9 m).
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft(3 mm)m).
3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases,pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Coordinate with other
sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.12 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Without damaging completed work,provide protective boards at exposed external
comers which may be damaged by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
04340-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 04860-STONE MASONRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry:
1. Anchored to unit masonry backup.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for concealed flashing, horizontal joint
reinforcement,and veneer anchors.
2. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation"for cavity-wall insulation.
C. Products installed,but not furnished,in,this Section include:
1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry specified in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include test data indicating compliance
with physical properties required by referenced ASTM standards.
B. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. .
2. For each color of mortar required.
13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE VMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6f MS 602.
""" STONE MASONRY 04860- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LIlvIESTONE
A. Limestone: Comply with ASTM C 568.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,designed for:
a. Leuders Buff Limestone, Hog Creek Quarry (Mezger Enterprises, Inc., David
Echels mobil 817-874-7820).
2. Substitution of equal product to be approved by the City of Fort Worth.
B. Mortar: Buff color.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or H, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lune: ASTM C 207,Type S.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry.
mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: --
a. Davis Colors;True Tone Mortar Colors.
b. Lanxess Corporation;Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
C. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime or masonry --
cement and mortar pigments, all complying with'specified requirements, and containing no
other ingredients.
1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or,if not indicated,as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
1) Holcim(US)Inc.;Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime.
STONE MASONRY 04860-2
7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
7
2) Lafarge North America;Eaglebond.
3) Lehigh Cement Company;Lehigh Custom ColorPortland/Lime Cement.
b. Colored Masonry Cement:
1) Essroc,Italcementi Group;Brixment-in-Color.
2) Holcim(US)Inc.;Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.
3) Lehigh Cement Company;Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.
F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
I. For pointing mortar,use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite,or other sound stone;
of color necessary to produce required mortar color:
G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed,and not containing a retarder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.
b. Bonsal.
C. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. DAP Inc.
g. Laticrete International,Inc.
h. MAPEI Corp.
i. Summitville Tiles,Inc.
j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands;H.B.Fuller Company.
H. Water. Potable.
2.3 VENEER ANCHORS
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch-diameter, stainless-steel
wire.
C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch-thick by 7/8-inch-(22-mm-)wide
stainless-steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0:3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude
of 0.06 to 0.10 inch.
i� STONE MASONRY 04860-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal
anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces w
perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements[available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
a: Dur-O-Wal,a Dayton Superior Company;D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
C. Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.;DW-10,DW-10HS,or DW-10-X.
d. Wire-Bond; 1004,Type III or RJ-711.
2. Structural Performance Characteristics: ' Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both
tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch .
3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-
stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting
wire tie.
4. Wire Ties: Triangular-,rectangular-, or T-shaped wire.
2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing[,where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and
where indicated,] complying with [SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual] [Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim]" and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240K Type 304,0.016 inch thick.
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, '
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following]
[provide one'of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into
the_Work include,but are not limited to,the following]:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.;Peel-N-Seal.
2) Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company;Dur-O-Barrier-44.
4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace&Co.-Conn.;Perm-A-
Barrier Wall Flashing.
.5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall
Flashing:
6) Hohmann&Barnard,Inc.;Textroflash.
7) Polyguard Products,Inc.;Polyguard 300.
8) Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall
Flashing.
9) Williams Products,Inc.;Everlastic MF-40.
STONE MASONRY 04860-4 �'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that
are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors and
attachments.
B. Asphalt Dampproofing: Cut-back asphalt complying with ASTM D 4479, Type I or asphalt
emulsion complying with ASTM D 1227,Type III or IV].
C. Weep Hole/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope,made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch
in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in
cavity behind stone masonry. Use only for weep holes.
2. Round Plastic Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by thickness of stone
masonry.
D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not .
degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Provide the following configurations:
a. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches wide,with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.;Mortar Break.
.,, b. CavClear/Archovations,Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
C. Dur-O-Wal,a Dayton Superior Company;Polytite MortarStop.
d. Mortar Net USA,Ltd.;Mortar Net.
E. Cavity-Wall Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board insulation, ASTM C 1289, Type I aluminum-
foil faced,Class 2 glass-fiber reinforced.
2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS
-� A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry
surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended
use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Diedrich Technologies,Inc.
b. Dominion Restoration Products.
C. EaCo Chem,Inc.
d. Hydrochemical Techniques,Inc.
e. Prosoco,Inc.
STONE MASONRY 04860 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.7 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing,do not
retemper or use partially hardened material. --
B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270,Proportion Specification.
1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type N.
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix pordand cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water,according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose
damp sand,and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
F. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Cut stone to produce pieces of 7-5/8"high x 4"thick nominal x random lengths. Dress joints
(bed and vertical)straight and at right angle_to face unless otherwise indicated.
B. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq.in. in area.
C. 'Shape stone for type of masonry(pattern)as follows: _
1. Sawed-bed, range ashlar with uniform course heights as indicated and with random
lengths.
D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
1. Finish: Split face,Lueders buff cut stone,with no rock face.
STONE MASONRY 04860--6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Finish for Sills,Lintels,Caps: Machine finish.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning
stone installation.
B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing.
3.2 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY,GENERAL
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces.
2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces.
B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable
for intended use.
C. Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated random lengths, and
uniform joint widths,with offset between vertical joints as indicated.
D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor
variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than
1/4 inch at narrowest points or more than 5/8.inch at widest points.
F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
G. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall,and where indicated.
1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up the face of sheathing at
least [8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] [16 inches (400 mm)], and behind
weather-resistant sheathing paper.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches
into masonry.at each end.
3. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches at ends.
4. At ends of head and sill flashing turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.
5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and tum flashing
down to form a drip.
STONE MASONRY 04860-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of -
metal drip edge.
7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal flashing termination.
8. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
H. Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofmg as follows:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds,joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade
elevations.
I. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base of
cavity walls,above shelf angles,and at flashing.
1. Use open head joints to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 16 inches o.c.
3. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in"Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article.
J. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated.
Use open head joints to form vents.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY
A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into'dovetail slots in concrete.
B. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with individual wire veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Embed anchors in unit masonry mortar joints or grouted cells for distance at least
one-half of unit masonry thickness.
C. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry joint-
reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
D. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical rods inserted through anchors and through
eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
E. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with adjustable, screw-attached veneer anchors unless
otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to framing with two screws.
F. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway,but not less than 1-1/2
inches,through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic veneer
anchors as stone is set.
STONE MASONRY 04860- 8
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional
anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints,and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12
inches.
H. Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches.
I. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
into mortar joints as stone is set.
J. Provide -I-inch cavity between stone masonry and backup construction unless otherwise
indicated. Keep cavity free of mortar droppings and debris.
1. Place mortar spots in cavity at veneer anchors to maintain spacing.
2. Slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity.
K. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than %i inch. Rake joints to uniform
depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
3.4 POINTING
N
A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.
Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing
mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed.
B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch
deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.
C. Tool joints,when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard,with a smooth jointing tool to produce the
following joint profile:
1. Joint Profile: Smooth, flat face recessed 1/4 inch (6 mm) below edges of stone (raked
joint.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fns and
smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean stone masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking
tape.
"" STONE MASONRY 04860-9
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner, remove cleaner promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Note No.20 Revised Z using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
3.6 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste,including mortar and excess or soil-
contaminated sand,by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. M
END OF SECTION 04860
STONE MASONRY 04860- 10
SECTION 05120
_ STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members, and all accessory members associated with
connections,bracing, etc.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36- Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A325 -High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
C. AWS A2.0- Standard Welding Symbols.
D. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
E. AISC-"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"with Commentary,
except: Paragraph 4.2.1 delete the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the
Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for his design adequacy of any connections
designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."
F. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings including Commentary and Supplements thereto as issued.
G. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.. Shop Drawings:
1. Connections.
2. Field welder's qualifications.
1.4 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify all field measurements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members including rolled steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36.
B. Unfinished Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A.
05120-1
C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1;type required for materials being welded.
D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15,Type 1,red oxide.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures,appearance,and quality
of welds,and for methods used in correcting welding work.
2.3 FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces with shop primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. --
3.2 ERECTION
A. Comply with AISC Code and Specifications and code of Standard Practice and with
specified requirements. Maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection.
B. Set Structural members to the line and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various
members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.
Clean,bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before
assembly.
C. Field weld components indicated on Drawings or shop drawings.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect and Engineer.
E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop
painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Welding: Inspect during erection of structural
steel. Record types and locations of defects found in
work. Record work required and performed to correct
deficiencies. .�
05120-2
B. Inspection by Independent Certified Inspector.
+-s END
OF SECTION
VIC A F, CUB
CITY 2fff
\
05120-3 FT. rl'�om gf� 7�.
SECTION 05311
STEEL ROOF DECK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel roof deck and accessories.
_.. B. Framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.
C. Bearing plates and angles.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural framed openings larger than 18 inches.
B. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Structural framed.openings larger than 18 inches.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISI- Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. ASTM A36- Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A446- Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)by the Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality.
D. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process.
w E. ASTM A611 - Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural.
F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
G. SDI-Design Manual for Composite Decks,Form Decks,Roof Decks.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
- A. Design metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Roof Decks.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, support locations,projections, openings and
reinforcement,pertinent details, and accessories.
C. Product Data:Provide deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural
properties, and finishes.
05311 -1
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate specific installation sequence, and
special instructions. �-
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum
5 years documented experience.
B. Design deck layout, spans,fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in
the State of Texas.
1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING W
A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B. Separate sheets and store decking on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A611,painted.
B. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36 steel,unfinished.
C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
D. Touch-Up Primer:Zinc chromate Red oxide type.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber,one inch thick;profiled to fit tight to the
decking.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Metal Decking: Sheet steel, configured as follows: --
Span Design: Multiple
Minimum Metal Thickness
(Excluding Finish): 22 gage
Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch fluted profile to SDI 1R
05311-2 �"
Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch
Side Joints: Lapped
Flute Sides: Plain vertical face
B. Fasteners: Stainless Galvanized hardened steel, steel-tapping,painted to match
precoated deck color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal decking in.accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bear decking on steel supports with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.
C. Fasten ribbed deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with
fusion welds or mechanical fasteners as directed.
D. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Mechanically fasten malelfemale side laps at as directed.
F. Reinforce steel deck openings from 6 to 18 inches in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel
angles. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each
side of opening and fusion weld or mechanically attach to deck at each flute.
G. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and
walls,columns, and openings.
H. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds,
burned areas, and damaged surface coating,with touch-up prime paint.
END OF SECTION
05311 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Shelf angles.
3. Steel weld plates and angles.
4. Miscellaneous steel trim.
° 5. Metal bollards.
6. Loose steel lintels.
B. See Division 5 Section"Gratings"for metal gratings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces,General: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,cold-formed steel tubing.
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53K standard weight(Schedule 40),unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel
fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade,and class required.
""" METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.3 Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings,
either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts,
washers,and shims as needed,hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1. Products:
a. Benjamin Moore&Co.;Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM 18/19.
b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
C. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
d. International Coatings Limited;Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
e. PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc.;Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
f. Sherwin-Williams Company(The);Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
g. Tnemec Company,Inc.;Theme-Zinc 90-97. '
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20,high-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds
in steel.
D. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
PART 3-Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location,with edges and surfaces level,plumb,and true.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade 'surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be
fastened to in-place construction. "-
3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in forinwork for items that-are to be built into
concrete,masonry,or similar construction.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges,shims,or leveling nuts. After
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with
nonshrink,nonmetallic grout.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 -
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
4
C. Bollards:
1. Anchor.bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill
*" annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink,nonmetallic grout.
2. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
3. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface to shed water.
D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05500
"�" METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
MR
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3. Wood blocking,cants,and nailers.
4. Plywood backing panels.
7
1.2 SUBMITTALS
7 A. Product Data: For each.type of process and factory4abricated product
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Power-driven fasteners.
5. Powder-actuated fasteners.
6. Expansion anchors.
7. Metal framing anchors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products,provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria.":
1. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Laminated veneer lumber.
3. Rim boards.
4. Miscellaneous lumber.
'" ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated,provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project'
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2:2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2[,except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX).
1. Pmervative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, milers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers,and waterproofing.
2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in.AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood)].
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B. Exposed Framing Indicated to Receive a Stained or Natural Finish: Provide material hand-
selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces
and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes,
shake, splits,torn grain,and wane.
1. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural grade; SPIB.
2. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch; Select Structural grade; WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, Select Structural grade; SP113.
4. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir, Select Structural grade;NLGA.
5. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-south; Select Structural grade;WWPA.
6. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir(south), Select Structural grade;NeLMA,WCLIB, or
WWPA.
7. Species and Grade: Western cedars, Select Structural grade;WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction,including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No.2 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine,No.2 grade; SPIB.
2. Western woods,Construction or No.2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PSI, Exposure 1, C-D
" Plugged,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch
nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.
µ ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated,flat washers.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable
products by one of the following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products,Inc.
2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
3. Harlen Metal Products,Inc.
4. KC Metals Products,Inc. .
5. Si3npson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.
6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co.,Inc:
7. USP Structural Connectors.
D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer,that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published
values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A.653M, G60 coating designation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction,"unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Do not splice structural members between supports,unless otherwise indicated.
E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
' F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule,"in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.
4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code.
5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in SBCCI's Standard Building Code.
6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-
Family Dwellings.
7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener' Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),
" "Alternate Attachments,"in ICC's International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBS from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5
SECTION 06112
FRAIVIING AND SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof sheathing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. APA: American Plywood Association.
B. NFPA: National Forest Products Association.
C. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store,protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 06100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, SPIE,WWPA.
B. Rafter Framing: #2 grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing sanded
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions,
manufactured by Simpson or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FRAMING
A. Set structural members level and plumb,in correct position.
B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain
structure safe,plumb,and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation
of permanent bracing.
C. Place horizontal members flat,.crown side up.
06112- 1
3.2 SHEATHING
A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet
ends over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing
members.
B. Secure wall sheathing with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position,maximum.
END OF SECTION
06112-2
SECTION 06181
GLUED LANUNATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glued laminated wood beams.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06112 -Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing
1.3 UNIT PRICE-MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Glue Laminated Structural Beam Members:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes unit member shop finished, connectors and brackets,
placed and anchored.
B. Connections:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes fabrication,finishing, and installation.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. APTC: American Institute of Timber Construction.
B. ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee.
C. ANSI A190.1 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
D. ASTM A36-Structural Steel.
E. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Galvanized) coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes,Plates,Bars, and Strip.
F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
G. ASTM A325 -High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
s
H. ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under
Exterior(Wet Use)Exposure Conditions.
I. AWPA-American Wood Preservers Association.
J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
.. 06181-1
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Roof Live Load: 20 lbs/sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 0 13 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and
cambers,bearing and anchor details,bridging and bracing, framed openings.
C. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application
technique and resultant performance information.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform welding Work in accordance with AWS Dl.I.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS -�
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units
with three years experience.
B. Erector: Company specializing in approved by manufacturer.
C. Design structural members under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design ofthis work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning; and other load criteria
1.10 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect members to APTC requirements for individually wrapped.
C. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. --
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to grading rules. Design.for the following
values:
1. Bending(Fb): 2400 psi
2. Tension Parallel to Grain(Ft): 1100 psi
3. Compression Parallel to Grain(Fc): 1650 psi.
06181-2
4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom(Fcl): 650 psi
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Top: (Fcl): 650 psi.
6. Horizontal Shear(Fv): 165 psi
7. Modulus of Elasticity(E): 1.6E6 psi.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural
grade.
B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit.
D. Fabricate member with camber built in.
E. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated,without permission
F. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded and ground
smooth.
G. After end trimming, seal with sealer coat in accordance with RITC requirements.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Prime connectors, except where cast in concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that supports are ready to receive trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area rafters.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of support items.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural members level and plumb,in correct positions or sloped where indicated.
B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently
secured.
C. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized
modification.
06181 -3
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: '/2 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
06181 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
mm SECTION 06201 -EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plywood soffits.
B. See Division 6 Section "'Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for [shop-fabricated exterior
woodwork] [exterior woodwork not specified in this Section].
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 7: Certificates of chain-of-custody signed by manufacturers certifying that
products specified to be made from certified wood were made from wood obtained from
forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria." Include evidence that mill is certified for chain-of-custody by
an FSC-accredited certification body.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria":
1. Exterior plywood soffits.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2:1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process:
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Plywood: AWPA C9. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 18
peicent.
2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
2.3 PLYWOOD SOFFITS
A. Plywood Type: Exterior,Grade A-C.
B. Thickness: As indicated.
C. Face Species: Southern pine or Western red cedar.
D. Surface: Smooth.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails'or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate.
1. For applications not otherwise indicated,provide hot-dip galvanized steel fasteners.
B. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, [ype P, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants';recommended by sealant manufacturer and
manufacturer of substrates for intended applioation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prime lumber to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime --
ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section"Exterior Painting."
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 06201 .
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate cabinets.
3. Plastic-laminate countertops.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips
m unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details,attachment devices,and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on
W one side and one edge.
2. Plastic-laminates,for each type,color,pattern,and surface finish.
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards."
C. Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 12,
"Principles and Criteria."
1.4 PROTECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental.Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,,wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
- humidity at-occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork
by one of the following:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: —,
1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1,Medium Density Overlay.
2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1,made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde. .
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or
Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.
B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals
mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-
developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from
softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel
manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less
per ASTM E 84.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8 Section Door Hardware (Scheduled by
Describing Products)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of
opening,self-closing.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9,B02011.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted,solid metal,4 inches(100 mm)long,5116 inch(8 mm)in diameter.
E. Catches: Magnetic catches,BHMA A156.9,B03141. .m.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156:9,B05091.
1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11,E07041.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA Al 56.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Adhesives,General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Where necessary for fitting at site,provide allowance for scribing,trimming,and fitting.
1. . Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim:
1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered
construction. Do not glue for width.
2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members,except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation
�. require field assembly.
C. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish:
1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
2. WI Construction Style: Style A,Frameless.
3. WI Construction Type: Type I,multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.
4. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
5. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts,doors,and fixed panels.
6. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Same species and cut indicated for
exposed surfaces.
7. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed
surfaces.
- 8. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
9. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers, unless located directly under tops. ,
D. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:
1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
2. WI Construction Style: Style[A,Frameless.
3. WI Construction Type: Type I,multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.
4. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
5. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:
a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade [HGP].
C. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
d. Edges: Grade HGS.
6. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure
decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
7. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
8. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
9. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full and complete range of solid colors,wood grains,patterns,gloss and matte finish.
10. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers,unless located directly under tops.
E. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
2. Colors; Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's
full and complete range of solid colors,wood grains,patterns,gloss.and matte finish.
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
4. Core Material at Sinks: exterior-grade plywood.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and
polishing until after installation.
B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWI Finish System: Acrylic lacquer.
3. WI Finish System: 2,water-reducible acrylic lacquer.
4. Staining: None required.
5. Sheen: Satin,31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb,true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim
as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work,refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails [or finishing screws]for exposed fastening,countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F.. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of.lumber.available)to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any,
between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood
base if finished.
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to.provide
unencumbered operation.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c.
H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant
- specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07190-WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior water repellent coatings for:
a. CMU
2. Extended written warranty.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01300,unless otherwise indicated. Substitution requests must be submitted 14 day
prior to bid date.
B. Product Data:Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Statement of qualifications.
2. Statement of compliance with Regulatory Requirements.
3. Field Quality Control Submittals as specified in Part 3.
4. Manufacturer's field reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualification:Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of
specified products.
B. Installer's Qualifications:Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in
complexity to those required for this Project,plus the following:
1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.
2. Not less than 3 years experience with systems.
3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.
C. Product Qualifications:
- 1. Comply with the provisions of the following standards:
a. Surface Appearance-No change in the surface appearance or texture.
b. ASTM C 88"Lost of Soundness due to Weathering-no loss
C. Breathability"Federal Specification SSW—110C-98.5%Moisture Vapor Transmission
d. Penetration-visual penetration-0.20 inches average
GSBS 07190-WATER REPELLENTS-1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Regulatory Requirements:Products shall comply with State and local regulations concerning AIM
(Architectural,Industrial and Maintenance)coatings regarding Volatile Organic Content(VOC).
1. The use of 1,1,1 trichloroethane shall not be allowed.
1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's
identification.
B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Surface Preparation:Contractor or Applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean,dry substrate
free from oil,dirt,grease,efflorescence or any other coating which may inhibit penetration and adhesion of water
repellent. This requirement applies to new construction,renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be
completely dry prior to applying product.
A. B. Environmental Requirements:
1.1.Temperature:Product may be applied at any temperature providing that there is no frozen moisture present in
the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate.
Optimal temperatures should be above 40°F(5°C)or below 95°F(35°Q.
2.Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture.Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of
48 hours after rain or power washing.
3.Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected within 12 hours.
4.Do not use spray methods of application under windy conditions.
B. C. Protection:
I.Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building being treated.Ventilation systems
and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered.
2.Protect shrubs,metal,glass,vehicles,and other building hardware from over xvy.
1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer shall stand behind installed system for period of 10 years vertical and 5 years horizontal from
Date of Substantial.
Completion against all the conditions indicated below. When notified in writing from Owner,
Manufacturer shall,promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies.
1. Loss of water repellency:
a. No more than 0.5 mil/20 minutes(80 mph wind driven rain equivalent).
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the
Work include,but are not limited to acceptable manufacturers and products:
GSBS 07190-WATER REPELLENTS-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Professional Products of Kansas,Inc.,4456 S.Clifton,Wichita,KS 67216,(800)676-7346
2.02 WATER REPELLANTS
A. Professional®Water Sealant,Extra Strength:Penetrating silicone rubber water repellent for use on vertical
or horizontal porous concrete,porous brick,sandstone,limestone,wood,and stucco.Penetrates without
altering the natural appearance of the substrate. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic,it is not
affected by UV rays,salts,acid rain,etc.Breathable,it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing
liquid penetration.Flexible,it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement.Provides superior
waterproofing protection.
1. 1. Form:Liquid
2. 2. Color:Clear
3. 3. Active Substance:RTV Silicone Rubber
4. 4. Percent Active Material: 8%
5. 5. Flash Point: 105°
B. Professional®Water Sealant,Super Strength:Penetrating silicone rubber water repellent for use on vertical
split face block,concrete block,and fluted block.Penetrates without altering the natural appearance of the
substrate. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic,it is not affected by UV rays,salts,acid rain,
etc.Breathable,it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration.Flexible,it bridges
hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides superior waterproofing protection.
1. 1. Form:Liquid
2. 2.' Color. Clear
3. 3. Active Substance:RTV Silicone.Rubber
4. 4. Percent Active Material: 15%
5. 5. Flash Point: 105°
C. The water sealant product listed above is selected as a standard of quality and based on manufacturers
recommendations for execution.Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with
effectiveness of testing samples submitted,recommendation of application rates suggested,approved
manufacturers standards and as a minimum,that specified herein.
1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and performance
standards.Products must be a penetrating,permanent waterproofing treatment using a silicone
rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes,urethanes or polysiloxanes.Silane and siloxane
based products will not be considered because of their lack of elongation(4000/6),allowing for
thermal expansion and contraction.
2.03 CURED PROPERTIES
A. Sealant must penetrate the surface of the material to which it is applied to be effective. The solvent portion
evaporates.The active ingredients react to form silicone rubber,which remains below the surface and
prevents water from.penetrating while permitting.water vapor transmission.The silicone rubber retains its
GSBS 07190-WATER REPELLENTS-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
characteristic 400%elongation which allows for bridging of hairline cracks,expansion and contraction,
building movement and extremes of temperature.
B. Sealant is unaffected by ultraviolet light,ozone,water,deicers and acids. It allows moisture vapor to
escape while preventing liquid penetration.It cures to a clear,flat finish,which is extremely durable.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and
identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Required joint sealants have been installed.
3. New masonry and mortar has cured a minimum.of 28 days.
4. Surface to be treated is clean,dry,and contains no frozen moisture.
5. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Verify masonryjoints found to be unsound,hollow,or otherwise defective,have been raked out to a
depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar.
2. Verify cracks that exceed 1/64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Product shall be applied as supplied by the manufacturer without dilution or alteration.
B. Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer or written in this
specification.
C. Follow manufacturer's recommendations concerning protection of glass,metal and other non-porous
substrates. Contractor will be responsible to clean all surfaces that are contaminated by the water
repellent.
D. Follow manufacturer's recommendation concerning protection ofplants,grass and other vegetation.
Contractor will be responsible for replacing all plants,grass or vegetation damaged by the water
repellent.
E. Brush apply water repellent only at locations where overspray would affect adjacent materials and where
not practicable for spray application.
F. Start application at top of wall and work down surface with fog coal to break surface tension.
Immediately apply treatment at full strength keeping a wet edge at all times. Avoid letting water repellent
dry between passes.
GSBS 07190-WATER REPELLENTS-4 -
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
- A. Spray Test:After water repellent has dried,spray coated surfaces with water.
1. After surfaces have adequately dried,recoat surfaces that show water absorption.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Furnish written certification that surface preparation method and final condition has
manufacturer's approval and comply with the warranty.
2. Test area:Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test results shall
determine application rate.
C. Test Area:
I. Before a sealer application the following field evaluation will be done. The cost of the field testing
will be the responsibility of the Water Repellent Manufacturer.
2. Prepare a three feet by three feet area to be sprayed with the water repellent. The area will be
determined by the Owner. Apply the water repellent at a rate of 100 square foot/gallon.To produce
a 6 to 8 inch rundown below the spray pattern.
3. After allowing five days for the sample to cure run a RILEM uptake test on the treated area.
Place one tube on the brick and one tube.on a mortar joint. Owner must be present for the
- application of the water repellent and the test.
4. Acceptable minimum results are as stated in the warranty provisions. Coverage rate used to pass
this test section must be used on entire project.
3.05 CLEANING
A. As Work Progresses:Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods
as recommended by water repellent manufacturer.
B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed.
3.06 COMPLETION
A Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as directed
by the Owners Representative at contractor's expense without extension of time.
END OF SECTION 07190
a
GSBS 07190-WATER REPELLENTS-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cavity-wall insulation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:.For each type of product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance characteristic
specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and
related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on
tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches.
1. Manufacturers:
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. Atlas Roofmg Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company. _
C. Rmax,Inc.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Johns Manville.
3. Knauf Fiber Glass. .-
4. Owens Conning.
B. Foil-Faced,Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612,Type IA or Types IA and IB; faced on
1 side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively; and with a nominal density and
thermal resistivity,respectively,of 3 lb/cu.ft.and 4.3 deg F x h x sq.#./Btu x in.at 75 deg V
2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass,Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Coming.
B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
1. 3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
B. Foil Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: 2 layers of 0.5-mil-thick polyester film laminated to an
inner layer of 1-mil-thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate in flat
condition of 0.0 g/h x sq.m and withmaximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
5.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Zero Perm" by Alumiseal
Corporation.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
„ manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
D. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head,self-tapping steel drill screws;with fender washers.
" E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.6 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
-- 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged,dry,,and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice,rain,and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to'make
m up total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended.by insulation manufacturer.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection course with joints butted.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24
inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions.
Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall
ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry
Assemblies."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated,complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive,mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder in location indicated of construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness; and
application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers,taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers
to tips of spindles.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4
7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs.
-- Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings;and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane-sealant to flanges of metal framing including
runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping
joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's
written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners
' as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07411 -METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory-formed and field-assembled standing-seam metal roof panels.
B. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted
finishes.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance class indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with
penetrations and roof-mounted items.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Material certificates.
E. Field quality-control inspection reports.
F. Product test reports.
G. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or mutually agreed location.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Structural failures,including rupturing,cracking,or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the
hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A.653M,G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792K Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40;structural quality.
3. Surface: Smooth,flat finish.
4. Exposed Finishes:
1) High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with
fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating
performance requirements of AAMA 2604.
5. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release-paper backing, 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel
manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Isocyanurate Insulation: 3"thick reinforced isocyanurate foam core faced both sides with non-
asphaltic glass fibers chemically bonded in the manufacturing process. Insulation shall meet the
requirements of Factory Mutual Class I Roofs.
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils (1.0 mm) thick minimum,
consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS-
modified asphalt adhesive,with release-paper backing;cold applied.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper,minimum 5 lb/100.sq.ft.,rosin sized.
2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M;regular, 1/2-inch thick.
B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying
with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to
substrate:
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAA41 NG
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Fiat-Shaped,Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inches.
C. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flange.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare
steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641K Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,*0.0625-inch-
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and -.
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-
steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or
neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer
head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities.
2.8 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Architectural Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Factory-formed, designed 'to be field
assembled by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type
indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps.
Include clips,cleats,pressure plates,and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Comply with ASTM E 1514. �.
2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Comply with ASTM E 1637.
3. Manufacturers:
a. AEP-Span.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
C. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.
d. CENTRLA Architectural Systems.
e. MBCI;Div.of NCI Building Systems.
f. VICWEST;Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products.
4. Type: Vertical rib,seamed joint as indicated on Drawings.
5. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet,0.0269 inch thick.
a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
b. Color:.As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.'
a. Material: Metallic-coated-steel sheet.
7. Joint Type: As standard with manufacturer.
8. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
9. Batten Material: Same material,finish, and color as roof panels.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
10. Clips: One piece.
•� a. Material: Metallic-coated-steel sheet.
11. Sealant: Factory applied battens.
12. Panel Coverage: 18"nominal.
13. Batten Height: 2"
14. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
.2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,ridge closures, clips,flashings, sealants,
gaskets,fillers,closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels,
-« unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof.
panels.
2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch- thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand
negative-load requirements.
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch-thick, stainless-
steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheet.
4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell,expanded,cellular,rubber or crosslinked,polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include eaves, rakes, corners; bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C. Gutters: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet. Match profile of gable
trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in
minimum 96-inch- long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters.
Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof
fascia and rake trim.
D. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; in 10-foot-long
® sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match metal roof
panels.
-- E. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from 0.04784nch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; with welded top
box and bottom skirt, and integral.full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum
0.0598-inch-thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to
withstand indicated loads,of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof
panels.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a --
strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." --
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof sheathing
under metal roof panels. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated
on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50
mm).
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low
temperatures.,Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with
end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not
less than 3-1/2 inches.Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge,unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the
Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Provide metal closures at peaks and rake edges.
4. Flash and sea]metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves,rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Aluminum Roof Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed
to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1. Coat'back side of aluminum roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will
contact wood,ferrous metal,or cementitious construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.
1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.4 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF
PANELS
A.. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
1. Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24
inches o.c. Securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to roof deck with screws
spaced 24 inches o.c.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.5 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory-applied sealant.
3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool
so clip,metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
B. Batten-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each batten-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self-drilling fasteners.
2. Apply battens to metal roof panel seams, fully engaged to provide weathertight joints.
3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and _
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, .e
and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels 'are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean-finished surfaces as recommended by metal
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 8 --
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07412-METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, insulated, concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall
panels.
B. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted
- finishes.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses,based on testing according to ASTM E 1592.
B. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal wall panel assemblies with thermal-resistance
value(R-value)indicated when tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 518.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal wall panel and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal wall panels, including plans, elevations, sections,
details,and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions,joints,panel profiles, comers, anchorages, attachment
system,trim,flashings, closures,and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal wall panel installation with
penetrations and wall-mounted items.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412- 1
Fort Worth'Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal wall panel assemblies
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.
B. Surface-Buming Characteristics: Provide insulated metal wall panels having insulation-core
materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical -"
products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
" a. Structural failures,including rupturing,cracking,or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
•PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS ...
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the
hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth,flat finish.
3. Exposed Finishes:
`* a. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005
mm)for epoxy primer and 0.8 mil(0.02 mm)for topcoat.
b. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with
fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance
requirements of AAMA 2604.
4. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.3 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS
A. Refer to Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws,bolts,nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,-and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-
steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or
neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel
hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal wall panels.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer
head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers,sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities.
w
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Backer Board: Hardboard complying with AHA A135.4, Class 1 tempered, 1/4 inch thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. Concealed-Fastener, Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Factory-formed, designed to be field
assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically
attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side
laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AEP-Span.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
C. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.
d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
e. MBCI;Div.of NCI Building Systems.
f. Metal-Fab Manufacturing,LLC.
g. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
b. Reynolds Metals Company.
i. VICWEST;Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products.
2. Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet,0.0269 inch minimum thick.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Panel Coverage: 12"minimum. „-
5. Panel Height: 7/8"minimum.
6. Reveal Joint: 4"minimum wide.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel
assembly including trite,copings, fasciae,mullions, sills, comer units, clips,flashings, sealants,
gaskets,fillers,closure strips,and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall
panels.
2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell,expanded,cellular,rubber or crosslinked,polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene;minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible,closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills,jambs, comers, endwalls, framed
openings,rakes,fasciae,parapet caps, soffits,reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with
same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0179-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet, in 10-foot- long
sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match metal wall
panels.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. *Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp
and buckle.
2. Fabricate wall panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication tolerances
and to withstand design loads.
B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening nibs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Where indicated, fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
F. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Substrate Board: Install substrate board over wall sheathing on entire wall surface. Attach with
substrate-board fasteners.
1. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to
direction of metal wall panel seams with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt
substrate boards together.
2. Comply with UL requirements for fire-rated construction.
B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous
wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts,unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall
panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
I. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete,and elsewhere as indicated or,if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.
6. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and ,..
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed
to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
1. Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall panels will
contact wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
1. Sea] metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-6 —'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.3 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL
PANELS
A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire wall. Comply with
installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
1. Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24
inches o.c. Securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall sheathing with
screws spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps.or integral pockets within panels,
spaced at intervals recommended by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely
in place. Maintain cavity width between insulation and metal liner panel of dimension
indicated.
B. Blanket Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in
thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
- surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece
lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder. Comply
with the following installation method:
4. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over
insulation with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Comply with the following installation method:
a. Over Framing Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and
perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by
panels fastened to secondary framing.
5. Retainer er Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and
®° taut,nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
C. Sound-Absorption Insulation: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated for metal liner
panels, cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts .of wire mesh to form
acoustical spacer grid.
3.4 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints.
Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side
of metal wall panels.
�" METAL WALL PANELS 07412-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Provide sealant tape at Iapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and
protruding equipment,vents,and accessories.
4. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end
laps, and on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type,
ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weatherproof to driving
rains.
5. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed,with butyl-rubber
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim,
copings, comers, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, -`
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. —
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,
and sealant.
END OF SECTION 07412
METAL WALL PANELS 07412-8
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07551 -APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes APP-modified bituminous membrane roofing.
i
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature,the temperature at
which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofing asphalt and 75 centipoise for
mechanical spreader-applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F,
measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1A QUALITY ASSURANCE
! A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system
manufacturer and covered under the specified single-source roofing system guarantee.
- C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or as arranged by Contractor.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by
manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system
that fail in materials or workmanship within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Failure includes roof leaks. Guarantee shall cover primary components of the roofing system,
including roof insulation,insulation fasteners,bituminous membranes and walkpads.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. APP-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
C. GAF Materials Corporation.
d. Johns Manville International,Inc.
e. Performance Roof Systems,Inc.
f. U.S.Intec,Inc.
2.2 APP-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS
A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I, polyester-reinforced APP-
modified asphalt sheet;smooth surfaced;suitable for application method specified.
B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I, polyester-reinforced, APP-
modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as
follows:
1. Granule Color: White.
2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS -
A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type,minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.(0.16 kg/sq.m).
B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-
fiber sheet,dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897,Type II,venting,nonperforated,heavyweight,asphalt-impregnated
and-coated,.glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels
on bottom surface.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type H, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet,
dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
B. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I, polyester-reinforced APP-modified asphalt
sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified.
C. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I, polyester-reinforced APP-modified asphalt
sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified,and as follows:
1. Granule Color: White.
2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing membrane.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312,Type IV,or as recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for application.
D. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-
part asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with
roofing membrane and base flashings.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos fee, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to
substrate,tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength,and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177K glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2
inch with primed surface to receive torch-applied membrane. DensDeck Prime.
B. Substrate Board (option): ASTM C-728 high density perlite board with special coating and
designed for torch application of membranes. JM 1/2-inch DuraBoard.
Substrate Board must be approved by primary roofing manufacturer and included under the
specified guarantee's coverage.
C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470,designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on
both major surfaces.
B. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers,
binders,and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to a design slope of
1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. Form crickets with %z-inch per foot
sloped material to achieve required design slope. Tapered insulation shall be Perlite Board, as
specified above.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated
to adhere roof insulation to substrate,if required.
C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728,perlite insulation board.
D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208,Type II,Grade 1,cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728,perlite insulation board.
G. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208,Type II,Grade 1,cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
2.9 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Pads: Polymer-modified,granular surface-textured,slip-resisting pads,manufactured
as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/8 inch thick,
minimum.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal-(89-mm actual-)width wood nailer strips of
same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following spacing:
1. Spacing as required by manufacturer in their published specifications or in writing by
manufacturer's authorized technical representative for the specific slope at this project.
C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures
of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness.
Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of
each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm)
in each direction.
F. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
G. Base Layer and Tapered Insulation: Over metal deck,Install each layer of insulation with joints
butted tightly. Long edges must be supported by metal deck ribs w/ no cantilevered edges.
Vertical joints must be offset by a minimum 6-inches in all directions from previous layer.
Loose lay.
Cover Board to receive torch-applied membrane. Install over all roof area,covering base layer
and tapered insulation. Install with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck as required
to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.
3.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines
for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."
a. Backnail roofing membrane sheets to nailer strips according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing
membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered
at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
C. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building,or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
D. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten to wood substrate.
2. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive to other types of
substrate.
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
E. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing
manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing
membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants,installing as follows:
1. Torch apply to substrate.
2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period
required by manufacturer.
3. Embed granules and bring bitumen to the top surface using a torch and hot trowel at all
areas where membrane is to be adhered to a granule surface, such as at endlaps of cap �mm
sheet and flashing details. An asphalt-to-asphalt bond is mandatory. Inattention to this
point will result in rejection of the roof installation.
F. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets,without stretching,and maintain uniform side
and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps,leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
G. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.
3.3 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces,at roof edges,and at
penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing
membrane and 4 inches(100 mm)onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing
maximum 6-inches on center using minimum 1-inch metal capped fasteners.
D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on
membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive, if not indicated, of
manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Walkway Strips: Install walkway cap sheet strips over roofing membrane.
1. Install walkway strips by torch application or cold adhesive, as directed by primary
roofing manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 07551
APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -6 '�
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
,- SECTION 07620- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manufactured reglets.
2. Formed roof drainage system.
3. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim.
4. Formed steep-slope roof flashing and trim.
5. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METALS
_g A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209,Alloy 3003,3004,3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming
and structural performance required,but not less than H14,finished as follows:
1. Mill Finish: Standard one-side bright.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system containing not less
than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Clear Anodic Finish: Class IL AA-M12C22A31,complying with AAMA 611.
B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality,mill phosphatized for field painting.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators,sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type Il (No.30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated..
1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper,minimum 3 lb/100 sq.ft..
C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts,and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or —
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, Basketed, with
hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,nonsag,nontoxic,nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C.920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with- limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part,noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded'for 15-mil dry
film.thickness per coat.
2.4 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type,material, and profile indicated,formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-
mitered and-welded comers and junctions.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cheney Flashing Company,Inc.
b. Fry Reglet Corporation.
C. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
d. Hickman, W.P.Company.
e. Keystone Flashing Company,Inc. .
f. Sandell Manufacturing Company,Inc.
2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.0187 inch, Aluminum, 0.024 inch, Galvanized steel, 0.0217
inch thick].
2.5 FABRICATION,GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used,form expansionjoints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep,filled
with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible,noncorrosive metal,and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured.
2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters:. Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-
stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of .size
recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion
joints, expansion joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories.from same
metal as gutters.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with
metal hangers,from same material as downspouts; and anchors.
1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material:
a. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: [0.0217 inch (0.55 mm)] <Insert thickness>
thick.
2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding
10-foot-long,sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide joint cover plates.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners,seal,and solder or weld watertight.
C. Base Flashing: As required by roofing manufacturer.
D. Counterflashing: As required by roofing manufacturer.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: As required by roofing manufacturer.
2.8 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Drip Edges: As required by roofing manufacturer.
B. Eave,Rake Flashing: As required by roofing manufacturer.
2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form bead and sill flashing with 2-inch-high end dams.
Material as required by roofing manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. General: Ancbor.sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in —
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. —.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds,and elastomeric sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1: Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1
inch(25 mm)deep,filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails
and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1. Galvanized or Prepainted,Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.
3. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered,removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show
in finished Work.
1. Do not solder prepainted,metallic-coated steel sheet.
3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed
with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to
firmly anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end
closures and sea]watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
SHEET METAL FLASHNG AND TRIM 07620-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to
hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight.
3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows,doors,and louvers.
END OF SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07710-MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Copings.
2. Roof edge flashings.
3. Roof edge drainage systems.
4. Counterflashings and reglets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject 'to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products.that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
r, manufacturers specified.
2.2 EXPOSED METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and
finish indicated,finished as follows:
1. Surface: Smooth,flat finish.
2. Mill finish.
3. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with color coats
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying
with AAMA 2604.
4. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II,0.010 mm-or thicker coating,complying with AAMA 611.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated,finished as follows:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with color coats
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying
with AAMA 2604.
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker coating,complying with AAMA 611.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240K Type 304, No. 4 (fine reflective, polished
directional satin finish.
D. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653K G90 coating designation,
structural quality, and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply .with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Smooth,flat finish.
2. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with color coats
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying
with AAMA 2604,except as modified for below:
a. Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.
2.3 CONCEALED METALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and
structural performance indicated,mill finished.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221,alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
of use and structural performance indicated,mill finished.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M,Type 304.
D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653K G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners,protective coatings, separators; sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
withstand design loads. —
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color
of sheet metal
C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing'and trim and remain
watertight.
D.. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-.2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities.
2.5 COUNTERFLASHINGS AND REGLETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Castle Metal Products.
2. Cheney Flashing Company.
3. Fry Reglet Corporation.
4. Hickman,W.P. Company.
5. Keystone Flashing Company.
6. Merchant&Evans,Inc.
7. Metal-Era,Inc.
8. MM Systems Corporation.
B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into
reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed
metal in thickness indicated:
1. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.0250 inch thick.
3. Prepainted,Zinc-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
C. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
countertlashing pieces, and compatible with flashings indicated with factory-mitered and -
welded corners and junctions,from.the following exposed metal in thickness indicated:
1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
2.• Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick.
3. Prepainted,Zinc-Coated Steel: 0.028 thick.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified
in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items
as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems.
1. Install manufactured roof specialties with. provisions for thermal and structural
movement.
2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Install manufactured roof-specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without
warping,jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning,buckling,or tool marks.
D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no unplanned joints within 18 inches of
comers or intersections.
F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will
penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood
screws.
'G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties.
END OF SECTION 07710
r
MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07720-ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
re_ 1. Roof curbs.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, intemally .reinforced and capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be
supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with
stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting
flange- at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop
Drawings of equipment to be supported.
1. Manufacturers:
a: Colony Custom Curbs.
b. Commodity Products Company,Inc.
_M ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Conn-Fab Sales,Inc.
d. Curbs Plus Inc.
e. Custom Curb,Inc.
f. LM Curbs.
g. Loren Cook Company.
h. Metallic Products Corporation.
i. Pate Company(The).
j. Roof Products& Systems Corporation.
k. Roof Products,Inc.
1. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
in. ThyCurb;Div. of Thybar Corporation.
n. Uni-Curb,Inc.
o. Vent Products Company,Inc.
2. Load Requirements: 750 lbs. ,
3. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.
4. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch(2.28 mm)]<Insert thickness>thick.
5. Liner: Same material as curb,of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
6. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs.
7. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
8. Factory insulate curbs with [1-1/2-inch-cellulosic-fiber board insulation.
9. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base
flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to
minimum height of 12 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
10. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water
diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory
installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking,and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic.action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood,ferrous metal,or cementitious construction.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and
cover with a slip sheet,or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,jogs in
alignment,excessive oil canning,buckling, or tool marks.
E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
END OF SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07841 -THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-
resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty
openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide .through-penetration firestop
systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating
of construction penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings,where systems protect penetrating
items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage,provide products that,after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
-., both during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-
resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved,either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping,provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors."
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements"Article. Provide rated systems bearing
classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure thatthrough-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems
indicated on Drawings: ,®
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration
firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following
manufacturers:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2. Grace,W.R&Co.-Conn.
3. Hilti,Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Nelson Firestop Products.
6. NUCO Inc.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
7. RectorSeal Corporation(The).
_w 8. Specified Technologies Inc.
9. 3M;Fire Protection Products Division.
10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
11. USG Corporation.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-
penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed
to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use
only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved
-, by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturees written installation instructions
.- and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support
fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
.. penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth,uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
D. Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the
fimstop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or
firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. Include the following information
on labels:
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -3`
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name,address,and phone number.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect through-
penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
END OF SECTION 07841 —
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -4 �.
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07842-FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:
1. Floor-to-floor joints.
2. Floor-to-wall joints.
3. Head-of-wall joints.
4. Wall-to-wall joints.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of
fire according to requirements indicated,resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.
B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with
assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join,
indicated as determined by UL 2079.
1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test_
C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor
assemblies and exterior curtain walls,provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below
and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as
determined by NFPA 285 and UL 2079.
1. UL-Listed,Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding
fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of j oint.
2. OPL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems: F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-
resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint.
D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view; provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively,as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.4 . QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-
resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article:
1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1
"Performance Requirements"Article and comply with the following: —
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system
designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.
C. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other "
construction until building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each
installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint systems that
may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,those systems indicated in the
Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fire-resistive joint
systems indicated for each application in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of
Part 3.
2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article
and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated.
B. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions:
Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product
Category)MN.
END OF SECTION 07842
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
_ 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
B. See Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways,
and curbing.
C. See Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
�. A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing:- Submit samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to
manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate
for the types of Project joints.
C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, toverify selections made
under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution:
�' JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants,which are specified by reference to this Section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part2
articles.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type,grade,class,and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that-will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Multicomponent Nonsag Immersible Polysulfide Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Pecos Corporation; GC-2+
b. PolySpec Corp.;T-2235-M.
2. Type and Grade: M(multicomponent)and NS(nonsag).
• 3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T(traffic),NT(nontraffic),and I(immersible), Class [1] [2]. .
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated,O.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
-" 1. Products:
a. Pacific Polymers,Inc.;Elastoseal 230 Type I(Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.;PSI-7000.
2. Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS(nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated,O.
E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation;.898.
b. Tremco;Tremsi1600 White.
2. Type and Grade: S(single component)and NS(nonsag).
. 3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint'substrates
indicated,O.
F. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant[ES-<#>]:
1. Products:
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 500.
b. Pacific Polymers,Inc.;Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II(Gun Grade).
C. Polymeric Systems Inc.;PSI-270.
d. Tremco;Dymeric.
2. Type and Grade: M(multicomponent)and NS(nonsag).
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Class: 25.
4. Additional Movement Capability: 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in
compression for a total of 65 percent movement.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, , and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
G. Multicomponent Nonsag Immersible Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Pacific Polymers,Inc.;Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II(Gun Grade). -
b. Pecora Corporation;Dynatred.
C. Tremco;Vulkem 227.
d. Tremco;Vulkem 322 DS.
2. Type and Grade: M(multicomponent)and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use[s]Related to Exposure: T(traffic),NT(nontraffic)and I(immersible.
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated,O.
H. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 550.
b. Meadows,W.R,Inc.;POURTHANE.
C. Pacific Polymers,Inc.;Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type I(Self Leveling).
d. Pacific Polymers,Inc.;Elasto-Thane 227 Type I(Self Leveling).
e. Pecom Corporation;Urexpan NR-200.
f. Polymeric Systems Inc.;PSI-270SL.
g. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.;Permathane SM 7201.
h. Tremco;THC-901.
i. Tremco;THC-900.
j. Tremco;Vulkem 245.
k. Pecora Corporation;Urexpan NR 300,Type H.
1. Pecora Corporation;Urexpan NR 300,Type M.
2. Type and Grade: M(multicomponent)and P(pourable).
3. Use Related to Exposure: T(traffic).
4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
I. Multicomponent Nonsag Immersible Urethane Sealant:
1. Products:
a. Tremco;Vulkem 116.
b. Tremco;Vulkem 921.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Type and Grade: M(multicomponent)and P(pourable).
3. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic), NT (nontraffic)] and I
(immersible),Class 1.
4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834,Type O P, Grade NF.
w- B. Products:
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600.
® 2. Pecora Corporation;AC-20+.
3. Schnee-Morehead,Inc.; SM 8200.
4. Sonneborn,Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.
5. Tremco;Tremflex 834.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants,primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin)or any of the types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to producing optimum sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at
temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg Q. Provide products with low
"- compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal,to control sealant depth, and
to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant.
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air.
-
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates[,where recommended in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer,] based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint sealant bond,do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining �.
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated.
B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application,and before skinning or
curing begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal
continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient
temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08111 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART] -GENERAL
1.1 SUNEVIARY
A. This Section includes standard hollow-metal steel doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
compliance,fire-resistance rating and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide a schedule of standard steel doors and frames using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated Door Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized,wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames,tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amweld Building Products,LLC.
2. Benchmark Doors; a division of General Products Co.,Inc.
3. Ceco Door Products;an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
4. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
5. Deansteel Manufacturing,Inc.
6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.;an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
7. Kewanee Corporation(The).
8. Mesker Door Inc.
9. Pioneer Industries,Inc.
10. Republic Builders Products Company.
11. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale,pitting,or surface defects;pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653K Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating designation.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591K Commercial Steel (CS), Class B
coating;mill phosphatized.
E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls
according to ASTM A 153/A 153K Class B.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated.
H. Grout: Comply with Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."
I. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of 4 inches for standard steel door frames
built into concrete or masonry, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
J. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665,Type I(blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6-to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively;passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
K. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section"Glazing." _
L. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 -2 _
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces,without visible joints or seams on exposed faces. Comply with ANSI A250.8.
µ 1. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors
complying with ANSI A250.8.
2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Square edge.
3. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model
and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B(Heavy Duty),Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to
comply with exterior door requirements. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated
below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-
endurance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B(Heavy Duty),Model 1 (Full Flush).
2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
u A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face comers and seamless face joints.
2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply
with exterior frame requirements.
-- 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face comers and seamless face joints.
2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
E. Jamb Anchors: Masonry, stud-wall, compression, or postinstalled expansion type; not less than
0.042 inch thick.
F. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.042 inch thick.
�. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material
as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same
material as frames in which they are installed.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where.practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure
proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
B. Standard Steel Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
C. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously;grind,fill,dress, and make smooth,
flush,and invisible.
2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints;
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs
by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot ^
welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from-top and bottom of frame.
Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. _.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according
to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section
"Door Hardware."
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 -4
Fort Worth*Botanic,Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as indicated
on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
comers of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or frame.
2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of doors and frames.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Steel Finish: Factory priming for field-painted finish.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
B. Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel
doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with
Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors, sidelights and other openings, of
size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and
plaster containing antifreezing agents.
2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit
Masonry Assemblies."
D. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames. Shim as necessary.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
E. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with
standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
F. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before fmal
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace ..-
defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
G. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of -
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 -6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08331 -OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:
1. Insulated service doors.
2. Fire-rated service doors.
B. See Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of
door components:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. 8., acting inward and
outward.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
mm• A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b
and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS MY
�q 1
9
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Mahon Door Corporation.
2. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company,Inc.
3. Metro Door.
4. Overhead Door Corp.
5. Raynor.
6. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains:' Interlocking slats in a continuous length for width of door of thickness and
mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of
door.
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS)
sheet;complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G90(Z275)coating designation.
2. Slat type: Flat profile.
3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type
thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely
within metal slat faces.
B. Endlocks: Malleable-iron casings,secured to curtain slats to comply with wind load.
C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl,
rubber,or neoprene;as a cushion bumper for interior door.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles or channels and angles,with sufficient depth and strength to
retain curtain,to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for
guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. .
E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Material and finish to match curtain slats, with sufficient depth and a*
strength to retain curtain,operate smoothly,and to withstand loading.
F. Integral Sills: Integral part of frame assembly;fabricate of same sheet metal.
G. Smoke Seals: UL-listed and tested smoke-seal perimeter gaskets.
H. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets
fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-
inch-thick,replaceable,continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
1. Jamb Seals: Replaceable,adjustable, continuous,flexible, 1/8-inch-thick seals of flexible
vinyl,rubber,or neoprene at doorjambs for a weathertight installation.
I. Push/Pull Handles: Galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door.
1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches high.
1
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -2 -
m Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
J. Slide Bolt: Engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,located on both left and right
jamb sides,operable from coil side.
K. Locking Device Assembly: Lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and
adjustable locking bat to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Lock cylinder is specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
L. Manual Door Operator: Push-up(lift-or pull-up)operation not exceeding 25 lbf.
C 2.3 FINISHES
A. Galvanized Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors,inserts,hangers, and equipment supports
U
1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion, and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
Ifl I�
END OF SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08410-ALUM[NLTM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1.1 GENERAL
A. System Description: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems,with a 4-1/2"x 2"pro-
file, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated
without failure,based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those in-
dicated for this Project. Failure includes air infiltration and water penetration exceeding speci-
fied limits; and framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movement,to glazing units.
B. Glazing:Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.
-, C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior
from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance.
D. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of with-
standing wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers'ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads-for
Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure,"whichever are more stringent.
1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of
clear span or 3/4 inch,whichever is smaller,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not
evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function
normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of
clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront-system•members that do not deflect an amount
which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead
load. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of glazing or other
fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between
members and operable windows and doors.
° F. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leak-
age through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfin/sq. ft. of fixed wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq.ft.
G. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum dif-
ferential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq.ft.(299 Pa).
H. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that ac-
commodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the follow-
ing maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging
GSBS 08411-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or
other operating units to function properly,and other detrimental effects.
I. Condensation Resistance: Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor(CRF)
of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
J. Submittals: .Product Data for each product specified and the following:
1. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and attach-
ments to other work.
a. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware
types,quantities, and locations.
2. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's
standard sizes. Where fmishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sam-
ple sets showing the full range of variations expected.
K. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this
Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
L. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of entrance
and storefront systems and are based on the.specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers'
systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
M. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding
Code—Aluminum."
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-
lowing.
1. Butler Manufacturing Company;Vistawall Architectural Products. -,
2. Efco
3. International Aluminum Corporation;U.S.Aluminum.
4. Kawneer Company,Inc.
5. Pittco Architectural Metals,Inc.
6. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
B. Materials: As follows:
1. Aluminum:. Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated,complying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M).
b. Extruded Bars,Rods, Shapes,and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
GSBS 08411-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
d. Bars,Rods,and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
'e. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
2. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural
shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570
(ASTM A 570K for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
3. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
4. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient
glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of
type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with
system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
5.. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for
joint type.
6. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as
specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
7. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 re-
quirements,except containing no asbestos,formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
C. Components: As follows:
1. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum
0.125-inch- thick, extruded tubular rail-and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers
with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and flllet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie-rods. Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing
stops and preformed gaskets.
2. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforce-
ments that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous
shims for aligning system components.
3. Fasteners,and Accessories; Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
a. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads.
b. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware ap-
plication, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match
framing members or hardware being fastened,unless otherwise indicated.
4. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel in-
serts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.
5. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,nonstaining,nonbleed-
ing flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufac-
turer.
6. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping.
D. Hardware: Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recom-
mended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish,
'unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fabrication: Fabricate components that,when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with
ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication,
clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
GSBS 08411-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse -202.19.00
1. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations,
before finishing.
2. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
3. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occur-
ring or migrating within the system to the exterior.
4. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before fin-
ishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest
extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter
and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
5. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against gal-
vanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape rec-
ommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or
masonry,protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
6. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting
stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as re-
quired for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
7. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support
imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to
greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required,for installing hard-
ware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing compo-
nents.
a. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other
locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised
into door edge.
F. Aluminum Finishes: Comply*with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products"for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
1. Class I,Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fab-
ricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium-matte;Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker)complying with A.AMA 607.1.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of industry colors and color
densities. ,
G. Steel Priming: Comply with NAAI ffs "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer. Perform manufacturer's standard
cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. ,Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel. Apply manufacturer's stan-
dard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
1.3 EXECUTION
A. Installation, General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling,
and installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame
joints*to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement
joints'. Seal joints watertight.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic ac-
tion
stion by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or.tape recommended by
GSBS 08411-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect
against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or
migrating within the system to the exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construc-
tion, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Seal-
ants.
E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades with-
out warp or rack of framing members.
F. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or
rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufactur-
ers'written instructions.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
G. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants,"
unless otherwise.indicated.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following
maximum tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet
; 1/4 inch over total length.
2. AIignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch .
Where surfaces meet at comers,limit offset from true alignment-to 1/32 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
J. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth,
operation,and weathertight closure.
K Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds,and dirt from surfaces.
END OF SECTION 08411
GSBS 08411-ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08510-STEEL WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENES
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-formed,welded steel windows.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to steel window manufacturer for installation of
units required for this Project.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated,based on testing according to the test method indicated.
1. Positive-Pressure Test: ASTM E 2010.
2. Neutral-Pressure Test: UL 9.
3. Fire-Protection Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory"or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency-
-4.
gency.-4. Provide steel windows labeled with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of steel windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
�• b. Structural failures including excessive deflection.
C. Water leakage or air infiltration.
d. Faulty operation of operable sash and hardware.
... e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
f. Insulating-glass failure.
-, 2. Warranty Period: Two year(s)from date of Substantial Completion.
STEEL WINDOWS 08510- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Windows:
a. DV Fyre-Tec,Inc.
b. Optimum Window Manufacturing Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Formed Steel Window Members: Provide frame and ventilator members mechanically
formed from metallic-coated,low-carbon,cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653.
1. Cold-formed,welded steel windows.,
B. Trim members, screen frames, retainers for weather stripping, flashing, and similar items shall
be manufacturer's standard.
C. Glazing beads shall be manufacturer's standard.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of bronze,brass, stainless steel, or other metal, that are warranted
by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with trim, hardware, anchors, and other
components of steel windows.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Provide units of stainless steel, hot-dip zinc-coated
-—steelbrmm,gess,-er-imn-eompVmg-wiffi- rS-TM�A423. RFovi sieat.
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Piovide compressible weather stripping designed for .-
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and to be completely concealed
when steel window is closed.
G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide manufacturer's standard, .�
permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
Ii. Glass: Uncoated clear float glass complying with Division 8 Section"Glazing."
I. Glazing Product. for Fire-Protection-Rated Windows: Fire-protection-rated glazing product
complying with Division 8 Section"Glazing."
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel windows of type and in sizes indicated to comply with SWI standards.
Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
STEEL WINDOWS 08510-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling ventilator framing.
2. Prepare window ventilators for glazing.
B. Window Types: Provide the following types of steel windows:
1. Fixed windows.
2.4 STEEL FIlJISBES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, scale, and other contaminants; follow
with a iron-phosphate pretreatment applied according to window manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Shop Prime Coat Finish! After fabrication,provide manufacturer's standard epoxy prime coat.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, operators,
accessories,and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion. Anchor securely to
surrounding construction with approved fasteners.
1. Separate corrodible surfaces subject to electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials.
END OF SECTION 08510
STEEL WINDOWS 08510-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. See Division 8 door sections for door silencers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware,as well as procedures and diagrams.
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and use same door numbers as in the
Contract Documents.
b. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand,fire rating, and material of each door
and frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening
including name and manufacturer.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor,Architect,and Owner about door hardware and keying.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated,based on testing according to NFPA 252.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply .with requirements in.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference
decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING —
A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
B. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
Nancy Richardson,Architectural Services Section(Owner's Representative)
Facilities Management Division,TPW
319 W. 10th Street
Fort Worth,TX 76102
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified m
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion,except as follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and door hardware sets indicated in
Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets"Article.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size,finish or color indicated, and.products
complying with BHMA standard referenced.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations,as follows:
1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description,quality,and function.
2.2 HINGES,GENERAL
A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves) into
wood doors and flames,provide only template-produced units.
B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel,,with stainless-steel pin.
C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in
hinge pin,prevents removal of pin while door is closed;for outswinging exterior doors.
D. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and flames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head, machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors.
Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(B.H).
2. Hager Companies(HAG).
3. PBB,Inc.(PBB).
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.4 SPRING HINGES
A. Self-Closing Hinges: BHMA A156.17.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH).
2. Hager Companies(HAG).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. PBB,Inc.(PBB).
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.5 PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES
A. Pivots: BHMA A156.4.
B. Self-Closing Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.17.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
2. Hager Companies(HAG).
3. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
4. McKinney Products Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(MCK).
5. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.6 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Standard: BHMA A156.26, Grade 1-150.
B. General: Minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches;
fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components
finished after milling and drilling are complete.
1. Fire Pins: Steel pins to hold labeled fire doors in place if required by tested listing.
C. Continuous,Barrel-Type Hinges: Hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extends entire -�
length of hinge.
1. Base Metal for Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel.
2. Base Metal for Interior Hinges: Stainless steel.
3. Base Metal for Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies(HAG).
b. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(MCK).
C. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
D. Continuous,Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum,pinless, geared hinge leaves;joined by a
continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap;with concealed,self-lubricating thrust bearings.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies(HAG).
b. McKinney Products Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(MCK).
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co.(PEM).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES,GENERAL
-" A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping,
pinching,or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall. not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
C. Lock Trim:
1. Levers: Falcon Quantum-Gala
2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors.
E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match door hardware set.
2.8 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply
with the following:
1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.
2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12.
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2,Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Best Access Systems;DiV.of The Stanley Works(BAS).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural. Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(CR).
C. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(FAL).
d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
f._ Weiser Lock; a Masco Company(WEI).
g. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(YAL).
C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts;BHMA A156.13,Grade 1.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Best Access Systems;Div.of The Stanley Works(BAS).
b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(CR).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Falcon Lock;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(FAL).
d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
f. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(YAL)
D. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12,Grade 1; Series 5000.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(FAL).
b. Schlage Commercial Lock Division;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
2.9 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5,Grade 1
1. Manufacturers:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.(ARM).
b. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(FAL).
C. Marks USA(MKS).
d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
e. Weiser Lock;a Masco Company(WEI).
f Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company
(YAL)• w
2.10 DOOR BOLTS
A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors.
B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1,
C. Surface Bolts: BHMA Al 56.16,Grade 1.
1. Flush Bolt-Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- diameter rods of brass, bronze, .or stainless
steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer
rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
C. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH).
D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16,Grade 1;designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH).
E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3,Grade 1;designed for mortising into
door edge.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Glynn-Johnson;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
2.11 EXIT DEVICES
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3,Grade 1.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping,
pinching,or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with*NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection,based on testing according to UL 305.
E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire and panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.,
F. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3.
G. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices
complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which
they have been tested.
2.12 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5,'Grade 1.
B. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30,Grade 1.
C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel,or nickel silver,and complying with the following:
1. Number of Pins: Six.
'2. High-Security Grade: BHMA A156.5, Grade IA, listed and labeled as complying with
pick-and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437(Suffix A).
DOOR HARDWARE 087101-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable
cores.
E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
F. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
G. Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(CR).
2. Falcon Lock;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(FAL).
3. Schlage Commercial Lock Division;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(SCH).
4. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(YAL).
2.13 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into master key system.
1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
2. Existing System: Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.
B. Keys: Nickel silver;permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the
notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock,provide three cylinder change.
keys and five master keys.
2.14 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 wall-mounted metal cabinet with baked-enamel
finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders,
key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150
percent of the number of locks.
2.15 OPERATING TRIM
A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.
B. Materials: Fabricate stainless steel,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies(HAG).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company.(1VS).
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
2.16 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
1. Interior,Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
2. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA.101. Door closers shall not
require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to
minimum required width.
C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer
device with fire alarm system.
.u. D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions
and requirements for opening force.
E. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4,Grade 1.
.m 1. Manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
b. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(NDC).
C. Rixson Specialty Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(RIX).
d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
F. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3.
2.17 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull
side,by height specified in door hardware sets.
B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA Al 56.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from [the
following material:
1. Material: 0.050-inch-stainless steel.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH).
b. Hager Companies(HAG).
C. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
d. Pawling Corporation(PAW).
e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.18 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Al 56.16,Grade 1.
1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated.
Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are
not appropriate,provide overhead holders.
B. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA Al 56.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for
drilled-in application to fame.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH).
2. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(DOR).
3. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).
4. Hager Companies(HAG).
5. IVES Hardware;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(RIX).
7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT).
9. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div. of The Stanley Works(STH).
2.19 DOOR GASKETTNG
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.
B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke,
light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles,forming seal when doors are closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that'are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-
control ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency,for sound ratings indicated,based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
G. Manufacturers:
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 10 -
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Hager Companies(HAG).
2. National Guard Products(NGP).
3. Pemko Manufacturing Co.(PEM).
2.20 THRESHOLDS
A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide
thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.
C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies(HAG).
2. National Guard Products(NGP).
3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).
2.21 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
x Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if
different from specified standard.
B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for
application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hirdware in fire-rated applications.
C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18,as indicated in door hardware sets.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DI-Il A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for
surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W Series.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 11
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DIM "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be -
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system
cabinet,as determined by final keying schedule.
F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
G. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely
from an open position of 30 degrees.
2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction,adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees,the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare.inspection reports. --
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Door Hardware Set No.l
Door No. 100A; each to have the following:
Entry/Office Lockset,key lock outside
F21-1,F21-2
Push/Pull
Concealed closer
Threshold
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 12 "�
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
Door Hardware Set No.2
Door No. 109A, 109C;each to have the following:
Entry/Office Lockset,key lock outside
ANSI F21-1,F21-2
Closer
Threshold
Door Hardware Set No.3
Door No. 101B, 108, 109B;each to have the following:
Deadlocking Padlock
Door Hardware Set No.4
Door No. 100B, 100C;each to have the following:
Entry/Office Lockset,key lock outside
ANSI F21-1,F21-2
Concealed closer
Threshold
Door Hardware Set No.5
Door No. 101A; each to have the following:
Entry/Office Lockset,key outside only
ANSI F04-1,F04-2
Threshold
Door Hardware Set No.6
Door No. 101C, 103;each to have the following:
Entry/Office Lockset,key lock outside
Concealed closer
Threshold
Door Hardware Set No.7
Door No. 105; each to have the following:
Privacy Lockset
ANSI F02-1,F02-2
Threshold
OFFICIAL RECO2D
n w4mm, mt,.
DOOR HARDWARE - 13
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
Door Hardware Set No.8
Door No. 106, 107;each to have the following:
Entry/Restroom Lockset,key each side
ANSI F09-1,F09-2
Concealed closer
Door Hardware Set No.9
Door No. 104, 110A, 110B;each to have the following:
Storeroom/Office Lockset,key lock outside
ANSI F07-1,F07-2
END OF SECTION 08710
0
DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 14 -
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
1.1 GENERAL
A. Performance Requirements: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal
movement and wind and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attribut-
able to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or
-gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
1. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Pro-
17vide glass liter for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less
than thicknesses and in strengths(annealed or heat treated)required to meet or exceed the
�'"1 following criteria:
a. Glass Thicknesses: Reference Architectural drawings for Glazing thickness
7 B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each glass product and glazing material,.submit the
following:
7 1. Samples: In the form of 12-inch-square Samples for each type of glass, other than clear
products, and of 12-inch-long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two
strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
2. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and loca-
tion.
C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below,unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these pub-
lications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
E. Insulating-Glass Certification.Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and
testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorpo-
rated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products indicated in schedules below.
B, Glass Types—General:Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated.
1. Select products to comply with performance requirements indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Exterior glass thickness: '/4"nominal,minimum
GSBS 08800-GLAZING-1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Interior glass thickness: '/"nominal,unless noted otherwise.
4. Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide
strength necessary to resist specified loads.
.5. Fabricate glass with bite and edge clearance dimensions, including tolerances as recom-
mended by manufacturer and FGMA"Glazing Manual."
6. Where governing authorties requires safety glazing,provide certified safety glazing. -�
7. Cut tempered glass to size and drill holes prior to tempering.
8. .Grind edges smooth using approved manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Glass Type I-1: Sealed insulating units.
.1. Product: 1"Insulating Unit Atlantica with Sungate 500(3)";PPG. (Basis of Design)
2. Total thickness: 1 inch nominal
3. Exterior pane:Low-emissivity,high performance tinted glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass
b. Color:Atlantica(formerly Solargreen)
4. Interior pane:Transparent float glass
a. Fully tempered float glass
b. Color: Clear
Minimum performance criteria for 1"insulating units.
U factor- .29
R-value-3.5
Shading Coefficient-.41
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient-.35
'Visible Transmission-.65
Relative Heat Gain- 86
D. Glass Type S-1:Float glass.
1. Annealed(untreated)
2. Color. Clear
E. Glass Type: S-2:Float Glass.
1. Fully Tempered.
2. Color: Clear
1.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory-assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers
forming air-tight,dehydrated air space(s)
1. ASTM E 774, Class A
2. Spacer seals:Manufacturer's standard
3. Spacer comer construction:Manufacturer's standard
4. Drying Agent:Manufacturer's standard
B. Float Glass:Quality q3,unless otherwise indicated
1. For mirrors: Quality q or q2
2. Annealed:ASTM C 1036,Type I
3. Heat strengthened:ASTM C 1048,Kind FT,Type I
GSBS 08800-GLAZING-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
4. Fully tempered:ASTM C 1048,Kind FT,Type I
a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel.
C. Float Glass: One-way mirrored. Mirropane E.P. as manufactured by Pilkington. Substitutions
to be considered in accordance with Division 1 "Product Requirements".
1.4 EXECUTION
F. Comply with.combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials,unless more stringent requirements are indicated,including those in ref-
erenced glazing publications.
G. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation.
H. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics.
J. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction opera-
tions,including weld splatter.
K. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped,cracked,abraded, or damaged in any way, in-
�w
cluding natural causes,accidents, and vandalism,during construction period.
L. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recom-
mended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
GSBS 08800-GLAZING-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 09111 -NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Inferior framing systems(e.g., supports for partition walls,framed soffits,furring,etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response.Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413
by a testing and inspection agency.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
21 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members,General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION'SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
-""
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with.clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type
indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an
independent testing agency.
B. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel.sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. -`
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated,provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide
lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep
flanges in-thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated ,assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1. Available--Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.;Fire.Trak.
b. Metal-Lite,Inc.;The System.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide
flanges.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-'Cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick,in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844
that apply to framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls,install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C. Install tracks(runners)at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing.full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section(for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs.at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
"�' NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09111
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 09911 -EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Galvanized metal.
3. Aluminum(not anodized or otherwise coated).
4. Wood.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2,with the proposed product highlighted.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and- listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual'for products and paint systems indicated.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI#4.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI#3.
B. Bonding Primer(Water Based): MPI#17.
C. Bonding Primer(Solvent Based): MPI#69.
D. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
system indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer. MPI#76.
C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#26.
D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#134.
E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI#95.
2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex(Flat): MPI#10(Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#11 (Gloss Level 5).
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.6 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI#8(Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel(Semigloss): MPI#94(Gloss Level 5).
2.7 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI#81 (Gloss Level 5).
2.8 FLOOR COATINGS
4 A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer(Water Based): MPI#99.
B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer(Solvent Based): MPI#104.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only alter unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt,
incompatible paints and encsPsulants.
OaFICIA11 HUV
cirf SKIMP,
FT,
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099 �gL1=
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting,holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking,runs,sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage.from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or m
defaced painted surfaces.
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates,Traffic Surfaces:
1. Clear Sealer System: MPI EXT 3.2G.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(solvent based). �^
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(solvent based).
C. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete.floor sealer(solvent based).
2. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI EXT 3.2H.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
C. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex semigloss. .�.
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. "
C. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel semigloss.
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1 D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel semigloss.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI EXT S.1K.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.
C. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex semigloss.
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel semigloss.
E. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5 AH.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior latex: semigloss.
END OF SECTION 09911
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 09912-INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units(CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Aluminum(not anodized or otherwise coated).
6. Wood.
7. Gypsum board.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A: MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
-- 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied. _
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 'PAINT, GENERAL.
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one.another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products 'recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Chemical Components of Field Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, -"
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following
chemical restrictions;these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop: -�
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. .-
3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
C. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Dimethyl phthalate.
In. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalene.
W. Toluene(methylbenzene).
X. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
" C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI#4.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI#50.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI#45.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint
systems indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI#79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI#76.
C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer(Water Based): MPI#107.
-� D. Waterbome Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#134.
E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI#95.
�w
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI#39.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.6 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex(Low Sheen): MPI#44(Gloss Level 2).
B. Interior Latex(Eggshell): MPI#52(Gloss Level 3).
C. Interior Latex(Satin): MPI#43 (Gloss Level 4).
D. Interior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#54(Gloss Level 5).
E. Interior Latex(Gloss): MPI#114(Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg).
2.7 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd(Eggshell): MPI#51 (Gloss Level 3).
B. Interior Alkyd(Semigloss): MPI#47(Gloss Level 5).
C. Interior Alkyd(Gloss): MPI#48(Gloss Level 6).
2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel(Semigloss): MPI#81 (Gloss Level 5).
2.9 ALUMINUM PAINT
A. Aluminum Paint: MPI#1.
2.10 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer(Water Based): MPI#99.
B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer(Solvent Based): MPI#104.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2.• Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-4 —°
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated.
mm B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting,holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking,runs,sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections. Gut in sharp limes and color
breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical' and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including,but not limited to,the following:
.- 1. Mechanical Work:
A. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factoryprimed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting-
E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in anundamaged condition.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades,'touch up and restore damaged or
�. defaced painted'surfaces.
3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates,Traffic Surfaces:
I. Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2F.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(solvent based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(solvent based).
2. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer(water based).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex low sheen, eggshell,satin, or semigloss.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.2C.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. -�
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd flat, eggshell,or semigloss.
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.IA.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel semigloss. --
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.IE.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd flat, eggshell, or semigloss.
3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.1M.
a. Prime'Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint.
C. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 53A. .-
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex flat,low sheen,eggshell,satin,or semigloss.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C.
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd eggshell or semigloss.
E. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prune Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex low sheen,eggshell,or satin.
2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd eggshell or semigloss.
END OF SECTION 09912
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-7
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 09931 -WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Exposed glue-laminated beams and columns.
b. Exposed dimension lumber(rough carpentry).
C. Dressed lumber(finish carpentry).
d. Exposed wood panel products.
2. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed glue-laminated beams and columns.
b. Exposed dimension lumber(rough carpentry).
C. Dressed lumber(finish.carpentry).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual'for products and fmish.systems indicated.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) 'as
- materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer,based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
2.2 WOOD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI#91.
2.3 PRIMERS AND SEALERS
A. Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI#5.
B. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI#6.
C. Exterior Oil Wood Primer: MPI#7.
D. Wood Preservative: MPI#37.
E. Alkyd Sanding Sealer: MPI#102.
F. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI#84.
G. Shellac: MPI#88.
2.4 VARNISHES
A. Exterior Marine Spar Varnish(Gloss): MPI#28,Gloss Level 7.
B. Exterior Varnish(Semigloss): MPI#30,Gloss Level 5.
C. Interior Varnish(Semigloss): MPI#74,Gloss Level 5,alkyd type.
2.5 POLYURETHANE FINISHES
A. Two-Component Aliphatic Polyurethane(Clear): MPI#78.
B. Interior,Oil-Modified, Clear Urethane(Satin): MPI#57, Gloss Level 4.
C. Interior,Oil-Modified,Clear Urethane(Gloss): MPI#56,Gloss Level 6.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 -2 '�
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
D. Moisture-Cured Clear Polyurethane(Gloss): MPI#31.
1. VOC Content: E Range of[El] [E2] [E3].
2.6 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC FINISHES
A. Waterborne Clear Acrylic(Satin): MPI#128,Gloss Level 4.
B. Waterborne Clear Acrylic.(Semigloss): MPI#129, Gloss Level 5.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. , Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an
-- electronic moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning.application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate
and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting.
Specification Manual,"to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.3 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Exposed Glue-Laminated Beam and Column Substrates:
1. Varnish System: MPI EXT 6.1K.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
a. Three Finish Coats: Exterior marine spar varnish(gloss).
2. Clear,Two-Component Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 6.1H.
a. Three Finish Coats: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane(clear).
B. Exposed Rough Carpentry Substrates:
1. Varnish System: MPI EXT 6.2K. -
a. Three Finish Coats: Exterior varnish marine spar,high gloss.
2. Clear,Two-Component Polyurethane System: MPI EXT.6.2H.
a. Three Finish Coats: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane(clear).
C. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Varnish System: MPI EXT 6.3F. —
a. Three Finish Coats: Exterior varnish marine spar,high gloss.
2. Clear,Two-Component Polyurethane System: MPI EXT 6.3G.
a. Three Finish Coats: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane(clear). _
D. Exposed Wood Panel-Product Substrates:
1. Varnish Over Semitransparent Stain System: MPI EXT 6.41
a. Stain Coat: Exterior semitransparent stain(solvent based).
b. Three Finish Coats: Exterior varnish marine spar,high gloss. --
2. Varnish System: MPI EXT 6.4H.
a. Three Finish Coats: Exterior varnish marine spar,high gloss.
14 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Exposed Glue-Laminated Beam and Column Substrates:
1. Alkyd Varnish Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.IC.
a. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish semigloss.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.ID.
a. One Factory-Applied Finish Coat: Matching field-applied finish coats.
b. Two Field-Applied Finish Coats: Interior,oil-modified,clear urethane satin.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Exposed Rough Carpentry Substrates:
1. Alkyd Varnish Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.2P.
a. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish semigloss.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.2H.
a. Three Finish Coats: Interior, oil-modified,clear urethane satin.
C. Finish.Carpentry Substrates:
1. Alkyd Varnish Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3J.
a. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish semigloss.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.3K.
a. One Factory-Applied Finish Coat: Matching field-applied finish coats.
�- b. Two Field-Applied Finish Coats: Interior,oil-modified,clear urethane satin.
D. Exposed Wood Panel-Product Substrates:
1. Alkyd Varnish Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.4G.
a. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer.
b. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish semigloss.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.4J.
a. One Factory-Applied Finish Coat:.Matching field-applied finish coats.
b. Two Field-Applied Finish Coats: Interior,oil-modified,clear urethane satin.
END OF SECTION 09931
CIT E ER2Y
,17 p a g M
6
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09�33T=S—
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stainless-steel units as follows:
1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced,Floor anchored.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
-' 2.1 METAL UNITS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering-
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Bradley Corporation;Mills Partitions.
2. Hadrian Inc.
3. Knickerbocker Partitions Corp.
4. Metpar Corp.
5. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company.
C. Stainless-Steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A 666, Type 302 or
304,stainless-steel sheet, leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured f nish on exposed faces. Exposed surfaces are
protected from damage by application of strippable,temporary protective covering before
shipment.
D. Door,Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless,metal facing sheets are pressure laminated to
core material. Units have continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge
closures. Exposed surfaces are free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. Corners are sealed by welding,or clips.
Exposed welds are ground smooth.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for
doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155- 1
Fort Words Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grafi bars
mounted on units.
3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at
locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves(Caps): Stainless steel,ASTM A-666,Type 302 or 304.
F. Brackets(Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets:stainless steel..
2. Full-Height(Continuous)Type: Manufacturer's standard design;stainless steel.
3. Partition Systems,Inc.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1. Material: Stainless steel.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with —
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or _.
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, -use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant,protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for
setting and securing continuous head .rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters
for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at.pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated,provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear
opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors
open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with.accessibility requirements of'authorities having jurisdiction at
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. -
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard.rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
S. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides
of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets
attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or file joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10155
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plaques.
- 2. Dimensional characters.
3. Schedule of required signage:
a. Street number and address as required by the City of Fort Worth, applied to entry
fence or other location per Fire Department requirements.
b. Toilet identification wall signage for (3) toilets, including gender and accessible
compliance.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S.Architectural&"Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities;Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1. Show-sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others,and accessories.
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements,including tactile characters and
Braille,and jayout for each sign.
C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.-
1.4
equired:1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
SIGNAGE 10431 -'1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26B 26K of alloy and temper recommended by sign _
manufacturer for casting process used and for use and fmish indicated.
B. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584,Alloy UNS No. C85200(high-copper yellow brass).
C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet),Type UVA'(UV absorbing).
D. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) ~�
with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing,suitable for exterior applications.
2.2 PLAQUES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale,sand holes,and other defects, as follows:
1. Plaque Material: Aluminum.
2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture.
3. Border Style: Double-raised line border.
4. Mounting: Concealed studs,noncorroding for substrates encountered.
5.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp comers,and precisely formed
lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of
characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign
manufacturer for casting process used*and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the "-
following requirements.
1. Character Material: Aluminum.
2. CoIor(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Mounting: Concealed studs,noncorroding for substrates encountered.
B. Molded Plastic Characters: Thermoformed or Injection molded.
C. Cutout Characters: Provide characters with square-cut, smoothedges. Comply with the -„
following requirements:
1. Acrylic: 0.25 inch thick.
a. Metal face laminated to acrylic base.
1) Stainless-Steel Face:Brushed finish.
SIGNAGE 10431 -2 --
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Vinyl: Pressure sensitive,3.5 mils thick.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Mounting: Flush with concealed noncorroding studs for substrates encountered.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop
welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces'without distortion or discoloration of
exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and
"- contact surfaces.
2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water
penetration.
3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be
inconspicuous.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or
thicker, over a satin(directionally textured)mechanical finish,complying with AAMA.611.
2.7 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES
A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy, background and frame colors, provide colored
°— coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for
optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for
application intended.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
® A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
-. SIGNAGE 10431 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. �-
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, insTall signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door. -
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply.
1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth,nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for
vinyl-covered or rough-surfaces.
2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth,nonporous surfaces.
3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth,nonporous surfaces.
4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
surfaces.
5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with
predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting
methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure
attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled
holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate
as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for
mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings
securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting,wall construction,and
condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing
and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated.
E. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated.
1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on
back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement.
2. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through
face of plaque into wall surface.
END OF SECTION 10431
SIGNAGE 10431 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 10520-FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets.
3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
- 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style,
and details of installation.
B. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, razing, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fine-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
'indicated are accommodated.
B. Apply decals or vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is
- complete.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520- 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. —
b. Faulty operation of valves or'release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering.products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified. -,
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008K Commercial Steel(CS),Type B. —
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated,and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304.
D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, —
70 percent copper).
E. Copper-Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, �.
60 percent copper).
F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036,Type I,Class 1,Quality q3,3 mm thick.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2 -
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
G. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048,Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class I (clear).
H. Break Glass: Clear float glass,ASTM C 1036,Type I, Class 1,Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single
strength.
I. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm
thick.
J. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type H, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh ml (diamond), 6 mm
thick.
K. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), [1.5] [3] [6] mm
thick,with Finish[1 (smooth or polished)] [2(patterned,textured)].
L. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4: Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5. Fire End&Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7, JL Industries,Inc.
8. Kidde Fymetics.
9. Larsen`s Manufacturing Company.
10. Modem Metal Products;Div. of Technico.
11. Moon American.
12. Potter Roemer;Div. of Smith Industries,Inc.
13. Watrous;Div.of American Specialties,Inc.
B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
and mounting bracket indicated.
1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA•10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging. _
C. Stored-Pressure Water: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. nominal capacity, with water in stainless-steel
container;with pressure-indicating gage.
D. Wet-Chemical : UL-rated 2 A:1-B:C:K, 2.5-gal. nominal capacity, with potassium acetate,
potassium citrate, or potassium carbonate-based chemical in stainless-steel container, with
pressure-indicating gage.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
E. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL•-10-B:C, 2.5-lb nominal.capacity, with
sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
F. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 2.5-1b nominal
capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Manufacturers:
1. Fire End&Croker Corporation.
2. General Accessory Mfg.Co.
3. JL Industries,Inc.
4. Kidde Fymetics.
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
6. Modem Metal Products;Div.of Technico.
7. Moon American.
8. Potter Roemer;Div.of Smith Industries,Inc.
9. Watrous;Div.of American Specialties,Inc.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated.
D. Cabinet MaterialStainless-steel sheet.
E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall; with no
trim.
F. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
G. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
H. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame.
I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass(clear).
J. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type,trim style,and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
X. Accessories: '
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire-protection cabinet,with plated or baked-enamel finish:
2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and
mounting clip,secured to cabinet.
3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word"FIRE"embossed
into face.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door. to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle.
5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size,spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER"
6. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is
opened and that is powered by batteries.
L. Finishes:
I. Stainless Steel: Satin,directional polish,No. 6.
2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Manufacturers:
I. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
.� 5. Fire End&Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7. JL Industries,Inc.
8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
9. Potter Roemer;Div.of Smith Industries,Inc.
B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated,with plated or baked-enamel finish.
I. Color. Red.
C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
I. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
® red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind
smooth.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-
rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick; fire-barrier material. Provide
factory-drilled mounting-holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards,from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum
1/2 inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged,
defective;or undercharged units.
B. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated,at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. �.
C. Fire-Protection.Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to'inside surface of fire-protection cabinets,square and plumb.
D. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
E. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
F. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
G. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-6
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Warm-air dryers.
3. Underlavatory guards.
4. Custodial accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,-provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Specialties,Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
B. Toilet Tissue(Roll)Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-4288.
2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
C. Waste Receptacle:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-277.
2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin.
D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-,Design Product: Bobrick B-4112.
2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
E. Grab Bar:
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel,0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth,No.4,satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-112 inches.
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
F. SanitaryNapkin Disposal Unit:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-270.
2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
G. Mirror Unit
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-290 2436.
2. Size: 24"x 36".
2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the following:
1. American Dryer,Inc.
2. American Specialties,Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. World Dryer Corporation.
B. Warm-Air Dryer.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties 0180-93.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
..4. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin)not to exceed 4"deep.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products,Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro,Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 2.02.19.00
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for .supply and drain piping assemblies,'that
prevent direct contact with and bums from piping, and allow service access without
removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial,molded-plastic,white.
2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to*compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Specialties,Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
B. Mop and Broom:
1. Description: Unit with shelf,hooks,holders,and rod suspended beneath shelf.
2. Length: 36 inches.
3. Hooks: Three.
�. 4. MopBroom Holders: Four,spring-loaded,rubber hat,cam.type.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,No.4 finish(satin).
,- a. Shelf. Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART.3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 10801
.TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
SECTION 13123—GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing C-8151
B. Drawing C-8242
C. Drawing C-8241
D. Drawing C-8152
E. Drawing C-8150
F. Drawing C-8153
G. Drawing C-8239
H. Drawing C-8240
I. Drawing C-8248
w 1.2 DESCRIPTION
M a. The greenhouses shall be a System 2000® "Classic" manufactured by Stuppy Greenhouse
Manufacturing,Incorporated in North Kansas City,Missouri or equal as approved by the City
of Fort Worth.
b. The greenhouses shall be furnished and installed according to specifications and drawings.
c. Greenhouse dimensions are two each 42 feet wide by 90 feet long.
d. Greenhouses are gutter connected
e. No equipment or materials should be ordered or fabricated prior to approval of shop draw-
ings.
f. If another model of greenhouse is substituted,the manufacturer shall apply for permission to
quote 14 days prior to bid date and submit sufficient shop drawings to the owner(architect)
for written approval prior to bid.
1.3 PLANS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Product
a. Design Criteria
1. Greenhouse frame shall be designed to meet local building code.
2. Provide structural prints and calculations sealed by a registered professional engineer in
the state of Texas.
"" GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 13123 - 1
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
B. Provide complete shop drawings, including the placement of equipment, plumbing fixtures,
electrical outlets,lighting,and doors
1.4 ERECTION OF GREENHOUSE
A. A qualified greenhouse specialty greenhouse contractor approved in writing by the
manufacturer shall erect the greenhouse.
B. The greenhouse contractor shall have at least five- (5) year's experience in building
greenhouses of the type specified.
C. The General Contractor shall have all site conditions correct and ready prior to greenhouse
erection.
D. No masonry, foundation, or footer installation shall be made prior to approval of greenhouse
plans.
PART 2-MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.1 STRUCTURE
A. Approved manufacturer is Stuppy Greenhouse Manufacturing,Incorporated—1212 Clay,North ..
Kansas City,and Missouri 64116—(800)733-5025.
B. The greenhouses will be a System 20008 "Classic" with column and truss spacing as
designated by local code
C. Sidewall height shall be 12-feet.
2.2 COMPONENTS
a. Primary Structural Steel Members
1. All steel members shall comply with ASTM A500 dimensional tolerances.
2. Columns shall be fabricated 3 inch by 3 inch 1/4"wall steel with ASTM Grade 500 B and
shall have a 10" square base plate. Columns are to be hot-dipped galvanized after weld- -'
ing on base plate.
3. All other steel tubing will meet Allied Tube and Conduit"Gatorshield"specifications for
corrosion resistance.
4. No steel roll formed members are allowed for the main structure system.
5. Truss top cords will be fabricated from 3 inch by 2-inch 15-gauge steel with minimum
yield strengths of 50,000 psi.
6. Truss bottom cords will be fabricated from 3 inch by 2-inch 15-gauge steel with mini-
mum yield strengths of 50,000 psi.
7. Truss webbing will be fabricated from steel with minimum yield strengths of 50,000 psi.
Truss webbing will be attached to top and bottom cords with aluminum connections to
enhance corrosion resistance.Welded trusses are not allowed.
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 13123 -2
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
8. Roof purlins will be 3 inch by 2-inch 15-gauge steel. Purlins will have a bolted connec-
tion to trusses.Welded trusses are not allowed.
9. Endwalls will be framed with 3 inch by 2-inch 15-gauge rectangular steel tubing with
minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
10. Sidewall girt is to be 2 inch by 3 inch 15-gauge rectangular steel tubing with minimum
yield strength of 50,000 psi
11. Gutters are to be extruded aluminum
12. No wood members are required or allowed to complete structure.
2.3 DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES
a. Doors to be 42 inches wide by 84 inches tall steel insulated ADA approved doors. All doors
to be equipped panic/exit hardware.
b. Lock sets are to be included in hardware package
i. If locksets are to match existing building, architect shall provide appropriate informa-
tion to greenhouse manufacturer prior to bid date.
c. Doors are to comply with ANSI A2503,Level 3.
d. Hardware is to be furnished and installed by greenhouse supplier/contractor
e. One(1)8 foot wide by 8 foot tall insulated roll-up door is to be included.
f. All doors should be finished with appropriate framing around openings.
g. Refer to drawings for appropriate door location.
2.4 VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
a. Horizontal Air Flow Fans —Acme HAF20A fans or equal as approved by the City of Fort
Worth.Quantity of 18 to be installed.
b. Exhaust Fans —Acme DCA54J (lhp motor) fans with shutters or equal as approved by the
City of Fort Worth. Quantity of 4 to be installed.
1. Fans must include automatic shutters,inlet/outlet guards,and belt lighteners.
2. Exhaust fans and horizontal air flow fans are to be manufactured by Acme Engineering,
Inc.
3. Exhaust fans are to be designed to accommodate cross pull ventilation.
4. Exhaust fans are to have aluminum fan blades.
5. Steel propeller fans are not acceptable.
`- 6. Please refer to drawings for appropriate location of all fans.
c. Motorized Inlet Shutter
1. Four (4) WAAC3333 Inlet Shutter (s) to be installed in sidewall structure. Motor and
linkage to operate shutter (s) is to be included. Shutters and motor/linkages are to be
manufactured by Acme Engineering,Inc.or equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
2. Please refer to drawings for appropriate location of shutters.
d. Inlet Vents and Vent Operators
1. A single run of vents shall be made up of a top rail and bottom rail of extruded aluminum
and bolted together in accordance with manufacturer instructions. All vents shall have
provisions made at the hinge point to prevent creeping of the vents. Vent size to be 48
inches tall by 88 feet long
2. Vent opener is to be a VC2000 motor with an internal limit switch as manufactured by
Wadsworth Controls or equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
3. Please refer to drawings for proper location of vent. "FR IwI ROD
CITY chh"k"Iff
AnH u
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 1 2j'-:1 ' ��'
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.5 HEATING EQUIPMENT
A. Greenhouse is to be equipped with four(4) SEP 230,000 BTU heaters or equal as approved by
the City of Fort Worth.
B. Heaters are to have stainless steel burners and exchangers.
C. Heaters with aluminum heat exchangers are not acceptable.
D. Double walled stacking is to be included as well as appropriate heater hangers to mount the
heaters.
2.6 COOLING EQUIPMENT
1. Evaporative pad system will consist of pads made of cross-fluted cellulose paper;
aluminum distribution and return system complete with pump and return tank.
2. Distribution and return system to be 4" PDR stainless steel system as manufactured by
Acme Engineering,Inc.or equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
3. System is to be 48-inches tall by 88-feet long.
4. No wood support stringers are allowed.
2.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
A. Automatic control system is to be an EnviroSTEP as manufactured by Wadsworth Controls, or
equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
B. Training session with Wadsworth factory representative is to be included.
C. Thermostat control is not acceptable.
2.8 INTERNAL SHADE SYSTEM
a.Wadsworth Powerpull shade system designed for slope-flat-slope configuration,or equal as
approved by the City of Fort Worth.
b. Shade system is to be for the roof of(2)42'X 90' greenhouses
c. Shade fabric is to be of a fire resistant material.
2.9 BLACK OUT SYSTEM(ALTERNATE) --
a. Wadsworth Blackout System is to be included for a portion of (1) greenhouse
totaling 32' X 40',or equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
b. Blackout system is to be for 2 roll-up sides and 2 ends of greenhouse structure.
2. Fabric is to be of a fire resistant material.
. t
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 13123 -4
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
2.10 COVERING MATERIAL
a. Roof,sides,and ends to be covered with double)walled polycarbonate.
b. Polycarbonate panels are to be of virgin resin.Regrind is not acceptable.
c. Polycarbonate panels must carry a minimum warranty of 5 years against yellowing.
2.11 BENCHES(ALTERNATE)
a. Bench layout is per drawing C-8150.
b. Benches are to include five 6' X 32' rolling benches, five 6' X 32' stationary benches, and
thirteen 6'X 36' rolling benches.
c. Benches are to be designed with aluminum side frame, round tubular legs, adjustable
connections, and black Dura Bench Ultra as manufactured by Southwest Agriplastics, or
equal as approved by the City of Fort Worth.
d. Appropriate bracing for design of bench is to be included.
.m PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
a. Erector shall be an experienced crew at installing manufacturer's product.
b. Greenhouse shall be erected in accordance with manufacturer's drawing and instructions.
c. Equipment shall be installed with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized in-
dustry practices to insure intended function.
d. The greenhouse contractor will install equipment in place.
L All mechanical connections(electrical and plumbing)will be by others.
3.2 WARRANTY
Greenhouse shall have a warranty period of one year for defects of structural and glazing.
Equipment in the greenhouse will carry the manufacturer's standard warranty for parts and labor.
OFFIC I,Il HIC05
FY, WINTH, VIE",
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 13123 -5
Fort Worth Botanic Garden Greenhouse 202.19.00
3.3 INSTRUCTION
Approved representative of the greenhouse manufacturer to visit the job site a minimum of one
time during construction to meet with building erectors and once after construction to meet with
the owner. m�
END OF SECTION 13123
GREENHOUSE SYSTEMS 13123 -6
SECTION 13915 -FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
... A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose
connections are included if indicated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
B. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping,valves,and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
C. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard,Group 1.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq.ft..
b. Ordinary-Hazard,Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm/sq.ft.over 1500 sq. ft..
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Office Spaces: 225 sq.ft..
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq.ft..
C. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, unless
otherwise indicated:
a. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. New flow test of city water system and hydrants.
C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if
applicable.
D. Field test reports and certificates.
E. Field quality-control test reports. -
F. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating,and installing
fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties,accessories, installation, and
testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-
grooved ends according to AWWA C606.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victaulic Co.of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching
ductile-iron-pipe OD.
C. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-
iron-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iron-pipe
and fitting grooves,rubber gasket with center leg,and steel bolts and nuts.
d. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for ductile-
iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type,ductile-iron housing with rubber gasket
listed for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795,with factory-or field-formed threaded ends.
1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B 16.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3.
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 175-psig minimum
working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Grooved for use with grooved-end-pipe couplings.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Anamet Inc.
2. Flex-Hose Co.,Inc.
3. Flexicraft Industries.
4. Flex-Pression,Ltd.
5. Flex-Weld,Inc.
6. Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
7. Mercer Rubber Co.
8. Metraflex,Inc.
9. Proco Products,Inc.
10. Unaflex Inc.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing
covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges,welded to hose.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,
inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges,
welded to hose.
2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum
working-pressure rating,and made of materials compatible with piping.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil International,Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp. —
C. Ductilic,Inc.
d. JDH Pacific,Inc.
e. National Fittings,Inc.
f. Shudoint Piping Products,Inc.
g. Southwestern Pipe,Inc.
h. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
i. Victaulic Co.of America.
j. Ward Manufacturing.
2. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and
nuts,and threaded,locking-lug,or grooved outlets.
3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with
gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast-or ductile-iron body;with threaded or locking-
lug inlet and outlet,test valve,and orifice and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
C. Viking Corp.
d. Victaulic Co.of America.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and
threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg.Co.,Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
C. Potter-Roemer;Fire-Protection Div.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain
outlet and sight glass.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY --
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
C. G/J Innovations,Inc.
- d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax,Inc.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474,adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet,and seals.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CECA,LLC.
b. Merit.
m 2.6 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved,with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:
1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem,
operating nut,and flanged ends.
2. Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with operating wrench,
extension rod, locking device,and cast-iron barrel.
-'" 3. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
C. NIBCO.
d. Stockham.
C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
m 1) Global Safety Products,Inc.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
grooved ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products,Inc.
3) McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 -5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
6) Pratt,Henry Company.
7) Victaulic Co.of America.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved
ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.;Waterous Co.
C. Central Sprinkler Corp.
d. Clow Valve Co.
e. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves.
g. Firematic Sprinkler Devices,Inc.
h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
i. Grinnell Fire Protection.
j. Hammond Valve.
k. Matco-Norca,Inc. --
1. McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
m. Mueller Company.
n. NIBCO. .
o. Potter-Roemer;Fire Protection Div.
p. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
q. Star Sprinkler Inc.
r. Stockham.
S. United Brass Works,Inc.
t. Venus Fire Protection,Ltd.
U. Victaulic Co.of America.
V. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
E. Gate Valves: UL 262,OS&Y type. -
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
4) United Brass Works,Inc.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Clow Valve Co.
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves.
4) Hammond Valve.
5) Milwaukee Valve Company.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 -6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY �-
6) Mueller Company.
7) NIBCO.
° 8) Red-White Valve Corp.
9) United Brass Works,Inc.
F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting
piping.
1. Indicator. Electrical, 115-V ac,prewired,2-circuit,supervisory switch.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2) NIBCO.
3) Victaulic Co.of America.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast-or ductile-iron body;wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Grinnell Fire Protection.
3) McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Milwaukee Valve Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Victaulic Co. of America.
2.7 UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Check Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing type with
bronze body,nonmetallic disc,and threaded ends.
B. Gate Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum,with bronze body,
solid wedge,and threaded ends.
C. Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: MSS SP-80,Type 2,Class 125 minimum,with bronze body,
nonmetallic disc,and threaded ends.
2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with
flanged or grooved ends,and 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 -7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
C. Firematic Sprinkler Devices,Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e. Grinnell Fire Protection. "
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Inc.
h. Venus Fire Protection,Ltd.
i. Victaulic Co.of America.
j. Viking Corp.
2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with
bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim
sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, and fill-line
attachment with strainer.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
piping
b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
B. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726,NPS 3/4,ball-check device with threaded ends. "
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Grinnell Fire Protection.
2.9 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved,with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Firematic Sprinkler Devices,Inc. �.
4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
5. Grinnell Fire Protection.
6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
7. Star Sprinkler Inc.
8. Venus Fire Protection,Ltd.
9. Victaulic Co.of America.
10. Viking Corp.
C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199,for nonresidential applications.
2. UL 1767,for early-suppression,fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating,unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
FARE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY --°
E. Sprinkler types,features,and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers,including cover plate.
2. Flush ceiling sprinklers,including escutcheon.
3. Pendent sprinklers.
4. Quick-response sprinklers.
5. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
6. Sidewall sprinklers.
, 7. Upright sprinklers.
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated,bronze,and painted.
re G. Special Coatings: Wax,lead,and corrosion-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
w 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel,one piece,flat .
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel,one piece,flat.
I. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type,including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.10 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers:
-� 1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Elkhart Brass Mfg.Co.,Inc.
4. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
5. Fire Protection Products,Inc.
6. GMR International Equipment Corporation.
7. Grinnell Fire Protection.
8. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
9. McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
10. Mueller Company.
11. Potter-Roemer;Fire-Protection Div.
12. United Brass Works,Inc.
B. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig minimum pressure rating, hose valve for
connecting fire hose. Include angle or gate pattern design; female NPS inlet and male hose
outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 as indicated, and
wm hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type .
2. Finish: Rough metal or chrome-plated.
2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13r-
FORT
3 -FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Elkhart Brass Mfg.Co.,Inc.
4. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
5. Fire Protection Products,Inc.
6. GMR International Equipment Corporation.
7. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
8. Potter-Roemer;Fire-Protection Div.
9. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
10. United Brass Works,Inc.
B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig minimum pressure rating; with
corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps
with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe
threads, extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with
marking similar to"AUTO SPKR& STANDPIPE.°
1. Type: Exposed,projecting,with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.
2. Finish: Polished chrome-plated .
2.12 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-wheel operator
with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and 10-inch- diameter, cast-
aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 inlet and NPS 1 drain
connections.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
C. Firematic Sprinkler Devices,Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e. Grinnell Fire Protection.
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Inc.
h. Viking Corp.
C. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type, water-flow
detector with 250-psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical installation.
Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts,
7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A,24-V dc;complete with factory-set,field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
1. Manufacturers:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 10
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
M.
a. ADT Security Services,Inc.
b. Grinnell Fire Protection.
C. ITT McDonnell&Miller
d. Potter Electric Signal Company.
e. System Sensor.
f. Viking Corp.
g. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
„ D. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
1. Manufacturers:
a. McWane,Inc.;Kennedy Valve Div.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
C. System Sensor.
2.13 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK,Inc.;U.S.Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group;Instrument Div.
5. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to
250 psig minimum.
1. Water System Piping: Include caption"WATER" or"AIR/WATER"on dial face.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS,GENERAL
A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
-- pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with threaded ends;cast-or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
C. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, mechanical joint pipe and fittings and
restrained joints.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 11
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe and fittings; grooved-
end-pipe couplings;and grooved joints.
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. NPS 1-112 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black , standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-
iron threaded fittings;and threaded joints.
B. NPS 2 and Larger: Threaded-end, black , standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron
threaded fittings;and threaded joints.
C. NPS 2 and Larger: Grooved-end, black or galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end
fittings;grooved-end-pipe couplings;and grooved joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved
valves are not required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
b. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B 1.20.1.
C. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping into locking-lug fitting and rotate retainer lug one-
quarter turn.
D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific equipment,
pressure-sealing tool,and accessories.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant,and bolts.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 12
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY -
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and
grooved-end-pipe couplings.
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid,grooved-end-pipe couplings,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
3.5 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for
service entrance to building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior
piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for
` backflow preventers.
3.6 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"
for backflow preventers.
3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated,as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 13
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install drain valves on standpipes.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main,at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each w
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal,and install where they will not be subject to freezing. -
N. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls,and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass
check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
3.9 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the --
following sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Sprinkler Finishes:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915 - 14
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids,chemicals,or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass,with factory-painted white cover plate.
C. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome,with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome,with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-
type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type,fire department connections in vertical wall.
B. Install freestanding-type,fire department connections in level surface.
1. Install protective pipe bollards on three sides of each fire department connection. Refer
to Division 5 for pipe bollards.
C. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow preventer between
potable-water piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties"for backflow preventers.
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
G. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
- I. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915- 15
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: --
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
5. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 13915
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 13915- 16
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15050-BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Mechanical demolition.
8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces,crawlspaces,and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed,Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed,Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure _v
Vessel Code: Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8,BCuP Series or BAgl,unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS 1310.12.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint,plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
r pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining;threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining;
plain,threaded,or grooved ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element
-_ 2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade B, Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates,with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece,Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated Rough brass.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107,Grade B,nonshrink and nonmetallic,dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. -
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general
demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
w, operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss,expansion,pump sizing,and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations,unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
- E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
N. Aboveground,Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals. -°
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes"for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,partitions,ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 for
materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. .
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
•» threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
�. 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/1)2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings,apply adhesive,and join according to
pipe manufacturer`s written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller,adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. ..
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated,but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base,and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi Insert other, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit,and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment,and elevation _.
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, hailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates,and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout,completely filling equipment bases.
- F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-9
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15083 -PIPE INSULATION
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible piping insulation, insulating cements,field-applied
jackets, accessories and attachments,and sealing compounds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if
any),for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Insulation application at elbows, fittings,flanges,valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
w 2. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
3. Application of field-applied jackets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
- indices of 25 and 50, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
d. Schuller International,Inc.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.2 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547,Type 1,with factory-applied,all-
purpose,vapor-retarder jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553,Type II,without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class 1, Grade A for bonding .,
glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber
insulation,and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C,Type H.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
C. Field-Applied Jackets: ASTM C 921,Type 1,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-
mil-thick,high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions;with smooth,straight, and even surfaces;and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
E. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
F. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. -
PIPE INSULATION 15083 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
G. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity,unless otherwise indicated.
H. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
I. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
J. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
K. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions,except fire-rated walls and partitions.
L. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at
top of floor.
ffi y 3.2 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic cold water.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral-fiber preformed pipe or flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: per code requirements
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 1"
END OF SECTION 15083
PIPE INSULATION 15083 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15140—DOMESTIC,RIVER AND RO WATER PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Water Samples: Specified in"Cleaning"Article in Part 3.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances,"
and NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for
combined fire-protection and domestic water service piping to building.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through
for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to and ends compatible with,piping to be joined.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K and L,water tube,annealed temper.
e 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint end. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types L,water tube,drawn temper.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint end. Furnish Class 300 mm
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends.
D. CPVC Schedule 80 Pipe(FOR USE IN RO WATER SYSTEM: ASTM F 441/F 441M.
1. CPVC Schedule 80 Fittings: ASTM F 439,socket or ASTM F 437,threaded type.
2.2 VALVES
A. CPVC Union Ball Valves: MSS SP-122, with full-port ball, socket or threaded detachable end
connectors,and pressure rating not less than 125 psig at 73 deg F.
1. Material Option: MSS SP-122, of plastic other than CPVC and suitable for potable
water. Include threaded ends and pressure rating not less than 150 psig at 73 deg F,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. CPVC Non-Union Ball Valves: MSS SP-122,with full-or reduced-port ball,socket or threaded
ends,and pressure rating not less than 125 psig at 73 deg F.
1. Material Option: MSS SP-122, of plastic other than CPVC and suitable for potable v
water. Include threaded ends and pressure rating not less than 150 psig at 73 deg F,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. CPVC Check Valves: Swing or ball-check design and pressure rating not less than 150 psig at
73 deg F.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,Type L; copper pressure fittings;and soldered -.
joints.
2. NPS 2: Hard copper tube,Type L;copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings;
copper-tubing,keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
5. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube,Type L; copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints.
D. Nonpotable-Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 3-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,Type L;copper pressure fittings;and soldered
joints for river water.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 80 PVC for RO water.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
'® 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-
iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
-- cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. CPVC ball,butterfly, and check valves may be used with CPVC piping.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 for site water distribution and service piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping
installation.
C. Extend domestic,river and RO water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes
and locations indicated.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods Insert Section title"for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
"for wall penetration systems.
F. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside building at each domestic water service. .
G. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves where required by code.
H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
I. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is
full of water.
J. Perform the following steps before operation:
1. Close drain valves,hydrants,and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings, and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
K. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
operate water heaters before filling with water.
L. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless otherwise
indicated.
M. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION mm
A. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves
for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing
fixtures without supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment,at base of each water riser,at low points in horizontal piping, .
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains,risers,and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"for balancing valves.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
B. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers,to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
C. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
® F. Install hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
*" 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
.� 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
G. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller and every
72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger.
H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to
the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold-and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. m
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having -
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or _
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection,make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having -
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended,or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit separate report _
for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed m
before it was tested.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained. -
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 CLEANING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
A. Clean and disinfect potable and nonpotable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended,or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
T a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15150-SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain,waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer"for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-
resistant metal band on each end.
B. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and
M ends compatible with,piping to be joined.
C. Hub-and-Spigot Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564,rubber.
D. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and
ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral,center pipe stop.
a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304,
stainless-steel shield;stainless-steel bands;and sleeve.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.
b. Heavy-Duty, FMG-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel
housing; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide housing with 2 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide housing with 2 bands.
C. Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301,
stainless-steel shield;stainless-steel bands;and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.
E. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306,drainage tube,drawn temper.
1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASMEB16.23, cast copper or ASMEB16.29, wrought
copper,solder joint fittings.
F. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24,Class 150,with solder joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends.
G. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types L and M,water tube,drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,wrought-
copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24,Class 150,with solder joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-
socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends.
H. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665,solid-wall drain,waste,and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311,drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
I. Cellular-Core,Schedule 40,PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891,Schedule 40.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
J. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series,PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891,Series PS 100.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
K. PVC Special Fittings: ASTM F 409, drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as
required for application.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may
be used in applications below,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the
following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered
joints.
3. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: PVC pipe,PVC socket fittings,and solvent;cemented joints.
4. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings;
and solvent-cemented joints.
5. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints.
6. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel.
7. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Copper DWV tube,copper drainage fittings,and soldered joints.
a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M;
copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints.
8. NPS 2 to NPS 4: PVC pipe,PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
9. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
D. Underground, Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each
size range:
1. NPS 1-1/2: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel.
2. NPS 1-1/2: PVC pipe,PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Cellular-core,PVC pipe;PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
4. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel.
5. NPS 2 to NPS 4: PVC pipe,PVC socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
6. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Cellular-core, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
7. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Use NPS 3 and NPS 4 cellular-core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC
pipe;PVC socket fittings;and solvent-cemented joints.
8. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Project-site sanitary sewer piping.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping
installation.
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods "for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." �.
1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees,elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2 and
smaller, 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
- J. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
K. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods " for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder;and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated.
D. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves"for general-duty valves.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
1. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
2. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42,clamps.
2. Individual, Straight,Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1,adjustable,steel clevis hangers.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43,adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet,if Indicated: MSS Type 49,spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight,Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44,pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52,spring hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers,with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
D. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. -
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to m
60 inches.
E. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. -
4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. -
4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
J. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
K. Install supports for vertical piping every 48 inches.
L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
and larger.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
�. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water- --
based latex paint.
END OF SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150- 8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15194-FUEL GAS PIPING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fuel gas piping,specialties,and accessories within the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for natural gas service piping, specialties,
and accessories outside the building.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less.
B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Nominal Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu.ft..
2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components.
2. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection
data of selected models.
3. Service-meter bars. Include service-meter size of selected models.
4. Service meters. Include pressure rating and capacity of selected models.
5. Service-meter bypass fittings.
6. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating,capacity,and settings of selected models.
n B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
-- manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use.
B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."
C. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified
to be FM approved.
D. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's"Directory of A. G.A.and C. G.A Certified
Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.
E. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if
specified to be UL listed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas
piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle
flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from
end of one day to beginning of next day.
1.7 COORDINATION -
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following:
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing Systems:
a. Omega Flex,Inc.
b. Titeflex Corp.
C. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
..w
d. Ward Manufacturing,Inc.
2. Appliance Connector Valves:
a. American Valve.
b. B&K Industries,Inc.
C. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co.
d. Cimberio Valves, S.p.A.
e. Conbraco Industries,Inc.;Apollo Div.
f. E.M.Plastic and Electric Products,Ltd.;Neo Valve Div.
g. Frey: John M.Frey Co.
h. Jomar International,Ltd.
i. Key Gas Components,Inc.
j. Legend Valve and Fitting,Inc.
k. McDonald: A.Y.McDonald Mfg.Co.
1. Mueller Co.;Mueller Gas Products Div.
In. Newman Hattersley,Ltd.; Specialty Valve Div.
n. Robert Manufacturing Co.
o. State Metals,Inc.
p. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
3. Gas Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller:
a. BMI Canada,Inc.
b. Crane Valves.
C. Dungs: Karl Dungs,Inc.
d. Flow Control Equipment,Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Honeywell,Inc.
g. Jomar International,Ltd.
h. Kitz Corp.of America.
i. Legend Valve and Fitting,Inc.
j. Lyall: R.W.Lyall&Co.,Inc.
k. McDonald: A.Y.McDonald Mfg.Co.
1. Milwaukee Valve Co.,Inc.
M. Mueller Co.;Mueller Gas Products Div.
n. Nibco,Inc.
o. Red-White Valve Corp.
p. Velan Valve Corp.
.,. q. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
4. Plug Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
a. Flow Control Equipment,Inc.
b. Milliken Valve Co.,Inc.
C. Nordstrom Valves,Inc.
d. Olson Technologies,Inc.;Homestead Valve Div.
e. Walworth Co.
5. Automatic Gas Valves:
a. ASCO General Controls.
b. ASCOLECTRIC,Ltd.
C. Automatic Switch Co.
d. Dungs: Karl Dungs,Inc.
e. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div.
f. Eclipse Combustion,Inc.
g. GPS Gas Protection Systems,Inc.
h. Honeywell,Inc.
i. Johnson Controls,Inc.
6. Appliance Pressure Regulators:
a. Canadian Meter Co.,Inc.
b. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div.
C. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Co.
e. SCP,Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 CORRUGATED, STAINLESS-STEEL TUBING SYSTEMS
A. Description: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following:
1. Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating.
2. Fittings: Copper alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends with
threads according to ASME B 1.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or fittings is required.
3. Striker Plates: Steel,designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
4. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with protective coating. Include threaded connections m.
according to ASME B 1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets.
2.4 PIPES,TUBES,FITTINGS,AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40;black.
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1.
3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1,Class 125.
4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9,wrought steel or ASME B16.11,forged steel.
5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5.
8. Gasket Material: Thickness,material,and type suitable for natural gas.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,drawn temper.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22,wrought copper,streamlined pattern.
2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing
phosphorus is prohibited.
3. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24,Class 150.
4. Gasket Material: Thickness,material,and type suitable for natural gas.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,annealed temper.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22,wrought copper,streamlined pattern.
2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing
phosphorus is prohibited.
D. Tin-Lined Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, seamless,annealed,with interior tin-plated lining.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22,wrought copper,streamlined pattern.
2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing
phosphorus is prohibited.
E. Transition Fittings: Type,material,and end connections to match piping being joined.
F. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for joining materials not in this Section.
2.5 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use
in corrosive atmosphere.
g 2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24,copper alloy.
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41,convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B 1.20.1 for pipe threads.
B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and
according to ASME B 16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. -
C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.
D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, _
ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel
disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle;2-psig minimum pressure rating.
E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B 16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig
pressure rating.
1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.
F. Plug Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug
valves,with 125-psig pressure rating.
1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.
G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for fuel
gas service,with"WOG" indicated on valve body,and 125-psig pressure rating.
1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70,OS&Y type with solid wedge.
2. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control' Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "Prevention of Accidental Ignition"Paragraph.
3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.
1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping,service pressure regulator, and service meter
will be provided by gas utility.
2. Natural gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter are
specified in Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution."
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is
supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve
downstream from and adjacent to dielectric fitting. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods"for dielectric fittings.
C. Install strainer upstream from each earthquake valve. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties"for strainers.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating may be used in applications below,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fuel Gas Piping,0.5 psig or Less: Use the following:
1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints.
2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,copper fittings,and brazed joints.
a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for
runouts at individual appliances.
3. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Tin-lined copper tube,copper fittings,and brazed joints.
4. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
5. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
6. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings,and welded joints.
7. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe,malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints.
8. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings,and welded joints.
C. Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Encase in
- containment conduit.
D. Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings,and welded joints.
E. Gas Service Piping at Meters and Regulators, Above 5 psig: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings,
and welded joints.
3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.
B. Piping Line Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
C. Piping Line Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.
D. Valves at Service Meter,NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve.
E. Valves at Service Meter,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve.
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below,install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit -
constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to
outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to _-
approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.
2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective
Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,clothes
or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above. �T
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets
of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors,and in floor channels,unless indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down. -'
G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment,and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
I. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated
valve.
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194-8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
J. Install flanges on valves,specialties,and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections.
K. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent
to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-
resistant insect screens in large end.
3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.
1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F.
Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.
! 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports"for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span,96 inches;minimum rod size,3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches;minimum rod size,3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches;minimum rod size,3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet;minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet;minimum rod size,5/8 inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream
from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.
E. Ground equipment.
FUEL GAS PIPING 01
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1 �qq �5 Q�(�bM��
" , yV Cal 16G�1.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
2. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each service meter,pressure regulator,and specialty valve.
1. Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform
operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and
warn of hazards and improper operations.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for nameplates
and signs.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and
Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and
specialties.
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety
devices.
END OF SECTION 15194
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194- 10
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15410-PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.
B. See Division 15 Section"Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers."
C. See Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty fixtures
not in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim,fittings,accessories,appliances,appurtenances,
equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details,
and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the Texas Accessiblity Standards
about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Enameled,Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.1M.
2. Porcelain-Enameled,Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.4M.
3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME AI 12.19.2M.
4. Water-Closet,Flush Valve,Tank Trim: ASME Al 12.19.5.
5. Water-Closet,Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME Al 12.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME Al 12.183M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901.
5. Faucets: ASMEA112.18.1M.
6. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B 1.20.7. m
8. Integral,Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
9. NSF Materials: NSF 61.
10. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
11. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASMEA112.18.1M.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME Al 12.18.1M.
3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
4. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASMEA112.18.1M.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Floor Drains: ASMEA112.21.1M.
2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASMEB 1.20.7.
4. Ofd Floor Fixture Supports: ASMEA112.6.1M.
5. Pipe Threads: ASMEB 1.20.1.
6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
4
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. For wall-hanging fixtures,install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet,wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers'written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Division 15 Section"Valves"for general-duty valves.
I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
L. Install tanks for accessible,tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
M. Install toilet seats on water closets.
N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
O. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
P. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Q. Install shower,flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
R. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
S. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for escutcheons.
T. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods"for grout.
U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants"for sealant and installation requirements.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures. _.
B. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping. ,.
D. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
PiPthg•
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15415 -DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Drinking fountains.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of
fixture indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards
about fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components—Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers"for type and style classifications.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified. '
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS -
A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-hanging fixtures,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube,fittings,and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube,fittings,and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-hanging fixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to
mounting frames,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fixtures level and plumb.
D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball,gate,or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation. Refer to Division 15 Section"Valves"for general-duty valves.
E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for escutcheons.
G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type,one-part,mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 for sealant and
installation requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures. _
B. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
B. Adjust water-cooler temperature settings.
END OF SECTION 15415
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15430-PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Water regulators.
3. Balancing valves.
4. Strainers.
^— 5. Outlet boxes.
6. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.
7. Trap seal primer valves.
8. Backwater valves.
9. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
10. Cleanouts.
11. Floor drains.
12. Trench drains.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig Insert other.
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required
clearances,and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the
following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Balancing valves and strainers.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Water hammer arresters,air vents,and trap seal primer valves and systems.
.... 5. Hose bibbs and hydrants.
6. Backwater valves,cleanouts,floor drains,open receptors,and trench drains.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Off"' 'i
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY arf WNRARY
C. Operation and maintenance data for the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators. '-
2. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plumbing specialties shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency. v.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
D. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components. Include marking"NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water
piping and"NSF-dwv"on plastic drain,waste,and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9,"for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following .,
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be w
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ames Co.,Inc.
2. B &K Industries,Inc.
3. Cla-Val Co.
4. CMB Industries,Inc.;Febco Backflow Preventers.
5. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
6. FLOMATIC Corp.
7. IMI Cash Valve.
8. Mueller Co.;Hersey Meters Div.
9. Sparco,Inc.
10. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
- 11. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Wilkins Div.
B. General: ASSE standard,backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze,cast-iron,steel,or stainless-steel body with flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow
preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
C. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
D. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME B 1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to
rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
E. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.
F. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet,and strainer on inlet; and test cocks with
two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum,through middle 1/3 of flow range.
G. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include union inlet and two independent check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum,through middle 1/3 of flow range.
H. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1048, FMG approved or UL
listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate
valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; two positive-seating check
valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow
preventer.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum,through middle 1/3 of flow range.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.3 WATER REGULATORS
A. Manufacturers: -°
1. Armstrong Yoshitake,Inc.
2. BERMAD. -
3. Cashco,Inc.
4. Cla-Val Co.
5. Conbraco Industries,Inc. -
6. FLOMATIC Corp.
7. G A Industries,Inc.
8. Honeywell Braukmann.
9. IMI Cash Valve. w
10. Watts Industries,Inc.; Water Products Div.
11. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Wilkins Div.
B. General: ASSE 1003,water regulators,rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum.
Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed,Y-pattern strainer.
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. General-Duty Service: Single-seated,direct operated,unless otherwise indicated. -
b. Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated,direct operated with integral bypass.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron
body.
a. Type: Single-seated,direct operated.
b. Type: Pilot-operated, single- or double-seated, cast-iron-body main valve, with
bronze-body pilot valve.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable,with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings,valves,differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Calibrated Balancing Valves: F-
a. Amtrol,Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps,Inc. _Y
C. Armstrong-Yoshitake,Inc.
d. Flow Design,Inc.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
e. ITT Industries;Bell&Gossett Div.
f. Taco,Inc.
g. Tour&Andersson,Inc.
h. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball,adjustment knob,calibrated nameplate,
and threaded or solder joint ends.
3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze,Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and threaded ends.
w 4. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or
grooved ends.
2.5 WHEEL-HANDLE WALL HYDRANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Arrowhead Brass Products,Inc.
2. B &K Industries,Inc.
3. Mansfield Plumbing Products,Inc.
4. NIBCO INC.
5. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
6. Watts Industries,Inc.; Water Products Div.
7. Woodford Manufacturing Co.
8. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Jonespec Div.
B. Description: Frost-proof design similar to ASME Al 12.213M, for wall mounting with wheel-
handle operation,NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet, casing and operating rod to
match wall thickness, and projecting outlet with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet.
Include wall clamp; integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable, drainable hose-connection
vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 ; and garden-hose threads complying with
ASME B 1.20.7 on outlet.
2.6 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type,with the following
characteristics:
1. Manufacturers:
a. E& S Valves.
b. Josam Co.
C. MIFAB Manufacturing,Inc.
d. Precision Plumbing Products,Inc.
e. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.
f. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
g. Watts Industries,Inc.;Drainage Products Div.
h. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div.
i. Zum Industries,Inc.;Jonespec Div.
j. Zum Industries,Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. 125-psig minimum working pressure.
3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded,union,or solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
2.7 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110,NPS 3/4 ball valve,rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals,blowout-proof stem,and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B 1.20.7,garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and
cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or ..
MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side drain outlet
and cap.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with pressurized
metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A
through F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Josam Co.
b. Smith,Jay R.Mfg.Co.
C. Tyler Pipe;Wade Div.
d. Zurn Industries,Inc.; Specification Drainage Operation.
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASMEA112.18.1M for
compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint inlet,of design
suitable for pressure of at least 125 psig; integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable
hose-connection vacuum breaker, and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on
outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze,or chrome or nickel plated.
2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
5. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.
7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
- 8. Include integral wall flange with each chrome-or nickel-plated hose bibb.
C. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.
1. Bolted Construction: Bronze body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal float and
stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded NPS 3/8 minimum inlet; 125-psig
_W minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F; and threaded vent outlet.
2. Welded Construction: Stainless-steel body with corrosion-resistant metal float, stainless-
steel mechanism and seat,threaded NPS 3/8 minimum inlet, 150-psig minimum pressure
rating,and threaded vent outlet.
D. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting,joined with ASTM C 564,rubber gaskets.
E. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.
1. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.
„n 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.
F. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
G. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semiopen top
with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or threaded outlet
larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME Al 12.1.2 that will provide fixed air
gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
H. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane,and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
I. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented
hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
J. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly
constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 1-inch enclosed
air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension,with counterflashing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials,joint construction,and basic installation requirements.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap -
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. -
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve,pressure regulator,and solenoid valve.
1. Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.
E. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of ..
1 percent and connect to floor-drain body,trap,or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
F. Install expansion joints on vertical risers,stacks,and conductors if indicated.
G. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 deg rees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. m_
H. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping
below floors.
I. Install cleanout wall access covers,of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall,for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
J. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
K. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius,30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
b. Radius,30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
C. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,but not greater than f-
inch total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
M. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if
supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
N. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
O. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
P. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe
valves.
Q. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball,gate,or globe valve in inlet and drain piping
from outlet to floor drain.
R. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
S. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
-. pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
C. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping,flow-control fittings,and accessories.
1. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-9
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris -
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. -
END OF SECTION 15430 -
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430- 10
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15486-FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial,gas and oil-fired water heaters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and
size of water heater indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
method of field assembly,components,and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Warranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. ANSI Compliance: Water heaters shall comply with ANSI standards for gas water heaters and
related products and bear AGA certification label.
C. ASME Compliance: Water heater, hot-water storage tanks shall be fabricated and labeled
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
Division 1.
D. ASHRAE Standards:
1. ASHRAE 90.1, 'Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings,"for commercial water heaters.
FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER BEATERS 15486- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following --
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 COMMERCIAL,STORAGE,GAS WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Water Heater Co.
b. Bock Water Heaters,Inc.
C. Bradford White Corp.
d. GSW Water Heating Co.
e. HESco Industries,Inc. ,
f. Lochinvar Corp.
g. PVI Industries,Inc.
h. Rheem Manufacturing Co.;Rheem Water Heater Div.
i. Rheem Manufacturing Co.;Ruud Water Heater Div.
j. Smith,A.O.Water Products Co.
k. State Industries.
2. Storage Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure
rating.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping
connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and
controls as required. Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe
threads.
2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
b. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier
materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank
fittings and outlets.
C. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
d. Jacket: Steel,with enameled finish.
3. Burner: For use with powered-vent water heaters for natural-gas fuel.
FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15486-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
a. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat
b. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices
or systems.
C. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, automatic gas-ignition system and
components.
d. Automatic Damper: ANSI Z21.66, gas-fired-appliance, automatic-vent-damper
device.
4. Anode Rods: Factory installed,magnesium.
5. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage
tank.
6. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005,corrosion-resistant metal,factory installed.
7. Draft Control: Powered-vent system.
2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed,
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Amtrol,Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps,Inc.
C. Flexcon Industries.
d. Myers,F.E.Co.
e. Smith,A.O. ;Aqua-Air Div.
f. State Industries.
" g. Taco,Inc.
h. Therma Flow,Inc.
i. Wessels Co.
j. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Wilkins Div.
2. Construction: 150-psig working-pressure rating.
3. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1,pipe thread.
4. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier
materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
5. Tank Exterior Finish: Manufacture's standard,unless finish is indicated.
6. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves:
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22,combination temperature and pressure relief valve.
B. Pressure Relief Valves:
FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15486-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22 pressure relief valve for storage tanks of 200,000
Btuh.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves:
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22. -a
2. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15,manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. k
E. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type, factory or field installed. Include
pressure rating,capacity,and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply.
F. Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21,appliance,electrically operated,on-off automatic valve.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Anchor water heaters to substrate.
D. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1. Install appliance, gas pressure regulators on gas-bumer inlets of water heaters without
pressure regulators.
2. Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building
where required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not
combine vents except with approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves
with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in
continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
F. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have
tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties "for drain valves.
H. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping.
I. Install pressure gages on water heater piping.
FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15486-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
J. Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory-applied insulation.
K. Charge compression tanks with air.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve,check valve,and union.
C. Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size
same as inlet connection.
- D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Include draft hoods and
R diverters where required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not
smaller than indicated unless smaller vent size has been calculated according to NFPA 54.
Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing.
F. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and to train
Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate, and maintain water heaters.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks,perform the following:
1. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets,and drain piping.
2. Test operation of safety controls,relief valves,and devices.
3. Adjust operating controls.
4. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping
system application requires higher temperature.
5. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fuel-fired, domestic water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15486
FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15486-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15732-ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners:
1. Cooling and heating units 6 tons and smaller.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer:
1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
- D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Warranties: Special warranties.specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, 'Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, 'Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
- E. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY � �
_ ° HN TEX.
F. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh: Rate rooftop air-
conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment."
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard,but not less than five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 20
years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 6 TONS AND SMALLER
A. Manufacturers:
1. Addison Products Company.
2. Carrier Corp.
3. Lennox Industries Inc.
4. McQuay International.
5. Skymark International,Inc.
6. Trane Company(The);North American Commercial Group.
7. YORK International Corporation.
B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of
compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration
and temperature controls,filters,and dampers.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
_. .J
C. Casing: Galvanized-steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access
doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2-inch-
thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate
drain connection,and lifting lugs.
D. Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by multispeed belt driven by single-
speed motor.
E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type,directly driven by motor.
F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with
equalizing-type vertical distributor.
G. Compressor: Hermetic reciprocating scroll compressor with integral vibration isolators,internal
overcun ent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief.
H. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor.
2. Outside coil and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
5. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
6. Refrigerant dryer.
7. High-pressure switch.
8. Low-pressure switch.
9. Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
10. Low-ambient switch.
11. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
12. Charge of refrigerant.
I. Filters: 1-inch- thick,fiberglass,pleated, throwaway filters in filter rack.
J. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized-steel Stainless-steel construction for natural -gas-fired burners
with the following controls:
1. Redundant single or dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
2. Direct-spark pilot ignition.
3. Electronic flame sensor.
4. Induced-draft blower.
5. Flame rollout switch.
K. Outside-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air,with manual slide
and hood.
L. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted
disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in
circuit breaker.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
M. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features:
1. Indoor fan on/off delay. mm
2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.
3. Service relay output.
4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
5. Field-adjustable control parameters.
6. Gas valve delay between first-and second-stage firing.
7. Minimum run time.
8. Night setback mode.
9. Return-air temperature limit.
10. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
11. Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature,
economizer damper position,indoor-air quality,and control parameters.
12. Night setback operation with single-stage heating control with seven-day 24-hour time
clock with battery backup.
13. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails.
14. Dirty-filter switch. "'
N. Optional Accessories:
1. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V,ground-fault,circuit-interrupter type.
2. Condensate drain trap.
3. Dirty-filter switch.
4. Hail guards of steel,painted to match casing.
O. Roof Curb: Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood
nailer,complying with NRCA standards;minimum height of 14 inches .
2.3 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
C. Controllers,electrical devices,and wiring are specified in Division 16 Sections.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb,maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure,according to NRCA's"Low-
Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for
Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure rooftop air conditioners on curbs
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to curb
support with anchor bolts.
3.2 CONNECTTONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas
Piping." Connect gas piping to burner,full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union
and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb.
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking
under entire roof curb.
3. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and
bottom of unit with 2-inch-thick,acoustic duct liner.
D. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections
for power wiring,switches,and motor controls.
E. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test units for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts,blocks,and tie-down straps.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove malfunctioning units,replace with new units,and retest as specified above.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
END OF SECTION 15732
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 15732-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1
SECTION 15767-PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans,elevations,sections,and details.
2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities,furnished specialties,and accessories.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
v A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.
T 2. Carrier Corp.
3. Dunham-Bush,Inc.
4. Engineered Air.
5. International Environmental Corp.
6. McQuay International.
7. Rosemex Products.
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 15767- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
8. Ruffneck Heaters, Starozik Industries Ltd.
9. Trane Company(The);North American Commercial Group.
10. U S A Coil&Air Inc.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge
configuration with radial louver diffuser in draw-through configuration. T
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Casing: Galvanized steel,with removable panels.
B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and —
manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater
before shipping.
2.4 COILS
2.5 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in
magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-resistant
metallic sheath with fns no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal
box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.6 FAN
A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor.
2.7 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Smaller: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Vertical Configuration: Louver cone diffuser. -�
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 15767-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls."
C. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
END OF SECTION 15767
PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 15767-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15815 -METAL DUCTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
- A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and
exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2-to plus 10-inch wg.
B. See Division 15 Section"Duct Accessories"for dampers, sound-control devices,duct-mounting
access doors and panels,turning vanes,and flexible ducts.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
2. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
�^ indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations,and other imperfections.
METAL DUCTS 15815- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation;ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and r
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured,UL 723 listed,and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part,acid-curing,silicone,elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use O.
F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts,powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. _
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate -'
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. -
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible"for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
METAL DUCTS 15815 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications,and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.03 59 inch thick or less,with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated,construct ducts according to the following:
�* 1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
2. Return Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
3. Exhaust Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg .
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—
Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise indicated.
B. All supply duct work shall have 1"duct liner(Owens Corning Quiet R or approved equal).
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size,and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines;avoid diagonal runs.
n
METAL DUCTS 15815 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns,and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch,plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view,conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers,sleeves,and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Division 7.
O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." -"
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible"for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg,seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure(proof-test)load.
METAL DUCTS 15815-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch,outlet and inlet,and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS 15815-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15820-DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.
B. See Division 16 Section"Fire Alarm"for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
.�+ 3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Special fittings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations,
including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts;compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. _
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance,Inc. n.
2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. CESCO Products.
4. Duro Dyne Corp.
5. Greenheck.
6. Penn Ventilation Company,Inc.
7. Prefco Products,Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Vent Products Company,Inc.
B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of
maximum 6-inch width,with sealed edges,assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop,
steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.
C. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel,with welded corners and mounting flange.
D. Blades: 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance,Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
5. METALAIRE,Inc.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Penn Ventilation Company,Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Vent Products Company,Inc.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped,galvanized sheet steel channels,minimum of 0.064 inch thick,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Stainless-steel sleeve.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible"for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single -vane, curved blades of -m
galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches
o.c.;and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp.
C. METALAIRE,Inc.
d. Ward Industries,Inc.
2.6 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating.
b. CESCO Products.
C. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
e. Greenheck.
f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Ventfabrics,Inc. ,,-
i. Ward Industries,Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel,with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
C. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.
I. Manufacturers:
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
a. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel,with spin-in notched frame.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: 1-inch-thick,fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Duro Dyne Corp.
2. Ventfabrics,Inc.
- 3. Ward Industries,Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181,Class 1.
C. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq.yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries,Inc.
2. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
3. Hart&Cooley,Inc.
4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire;fibrous-glass insulation;aluminized vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action,in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH 116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards,"for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner;avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved
written instructions.
H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils. T
2. Downstream from volume dampers,turning vanes,and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers,providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting,rectangular access doors:
1. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
J. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
K. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
"-" C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting,and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15 83 8 -POWER VENTILATORS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
m A. This Section includes the following:
1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics,plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings,linkages,and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
method of field assembly,components,and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
-n rails,and base weights.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r. A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraphs titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft,bearings,motor and disconnect switch,drive assembly,curb base,and accessories.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Acme Engineering&Mfg.Corp.
b. Aerovent;a Twin City Fan Company.
C. Ammerman Company,Inc./General Resource Corp.
d. Breidert Air Products,Inc.
e. Broan Mfg.Co.,Inc.
f. Carnes Company HVAC.
g. Central Blower Co.
h. Cook,Loren Company.
i. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.
j. Delhi Industries Inc.
k. Greenheck Fan Corp.
1. Hartzell Fan,Inc.
In. ILG Industries,Inc./American Coolair Corp.
n. JennFan;Div.of Breidert Air Products,Inc. -
o. NuTone Inc.
p. Penn Ventilation Companies,Inc.
q. Quietaire Corp.
B. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece, aluminum
base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Accessories:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside
fan housing,factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh,aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches .
3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
5. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1,general purpose,continuous duty,Design B.
B. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 7
for installation of roof curbs.
B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
POWER VENTILATORS 15838-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
E. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
END OF SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS 15838-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15855 -DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling-and wall-mounted diffusers,registers,and grilles.
- 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated,include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop,static-pressure drop,and noise ratings.
- 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity,model number,size,and accessories furnished.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
- product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers,registers,and grilles level and plumb.
B. Install diffusers,registers,and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers,air extractors,and fire dampers.
DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, °
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 15950-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
- 2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
3. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
' 4 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
C. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning Systems."
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB -
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities. -
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating
that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails
to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems'designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
-' C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems,use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning,adjusting,and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed,bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight,and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers,valves,and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions.
4. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,drafts,and cold walls.
5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
7. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
8. Interlocked systems are operating.
0FFIC OUR
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance,smoke,and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing,close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions,valve position indicators,fan-speed-
control levers,and similar controls and devices,to show final settings.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built"duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-and exhaust-air
dampers,through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches,electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit,and other air-handling and-treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
- must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
- recovery equipment,and air washers,under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
- calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating,economizer,and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube -
traverse measurements,measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written -a
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. -
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS -,
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer,model,and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage,each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage,each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers(i.e.,high-and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1. Supply,Return,and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 15 percent.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder,tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures,along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers'test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance,but do not include Shop Drawings -
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report,as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer,type size,and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated -
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-,return-,and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
C. Cooling coil,wet-and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air,static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside,supply,return,and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct,outlet,and inlet sizes.
3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
4. Terminal units.
5. Balancing stations.
6. Position of balancing devices.
3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
END OF SECTION 15950
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-9
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16001-ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies basic requirements specifically applicable to Division 16, "ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS", in addition to Division 1, "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS".
A. Division 16,"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",specifieswork required to provide complete electrical
systems,as indicated and specified. In addition,this division specifies the complete installation of
systems as specified herein and as shown, and the provision of special devices, fittings,
fabrications, cutting and patching and items required to fit the respective systems into the
construction. All work done under this division shall be coordinated with the provisions of
Division 1,"GENERAL REQUIREMENTS".
B. Definitions and Explanations:
M I. Drawings: The Drawings for electrical work are diagrammaticand neither intended for use
in determiningthe exact locations of the components of the electrical systems,except where
specificallydimensioned,nor do the Drawings indicate all boxes,devices,accessories,etc.,
required for the complete installation. Refer to the Drawings of all trades of this Contract,
and the drawings of"other contracts"as referenced in General Provisions to determine the
location of equipmentto be furnished by this Contract,and by other contracts as referenced.
2. Where the word"concealed"is used in connection with insulating,painting,piping,ducts
and the like,the word is understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases,furred spaces or
suspended ceilings. 'Exposed" is understood to mean open to view.
C. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1. Cutting and Patching% Sec. 01045
2. Work Related Submittals. Sec. 01300
3. Utility Excavation and Backfill: Sec.02221
^ 4. Procedures and Quality Control: Sec.01400
1.2 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 16,.
"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS". Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the
utility service companies affected.
B. Temporary Services for Construction: Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the
provisions of these Specifications.
1.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary, including compaction as specified, for the
installation of Division 16, 'ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS"work.
B. Perform excavation and backfilling associated with the work of Division 16, "ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS",in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications includin crenchsafety
requirements. r ^ a
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL on 8KP2y
" FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY R � :h u
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
1. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Division will be performed. Include
required work to correctconditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division
16, "ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS"work.
2. Where ducts,pipes and other such items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members
and other equipment,include labor and materials required for extensions,offsets,and supports to
clear the encroachment.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or _.
miscellaneous items,appurtenances,and devices incidental to or necessaryfor a sound,secure and
complete installation.
4. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of minor
differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the
jobsite.
1.5 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTBER TRADES
A. Perform coordination work associated with work of Division 16,"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",in
strict accordance with provisions of these Specifications and the following:
1. Coordinate as necessarywith other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all
work.
2. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades
affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes are the
responsibility of the contractor making the change.
B. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic,but are required to be followed as closely as actual -
construction and work of other trades will permit. Conduit arrangements have been designed for
maximum economy consistent with good practice and other considerations. Install the systems
arranged as shown on the Drawings,except as otherwise approved in advance by the Owner's
Representative.
C. Where items such as boxes, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the
Drawings,locate as determined in the field by the Owner's Representative.Where such items are
installed without such specific direction,relocate as directed by the Owner's Representative and at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01400,"PROCEDURES AND QUALITY CONTROL".
B. Provide quality control assurance in strict accordance with the provisions of these Specifications.
C. Perform all work in accordance with the most recent applicable edition of the following:
1. State and city building,andelectrical codes.
2. National Electrical Code.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -2
' FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
._.._.-.,...
--j
3. National Fire Protection Association.
4. All authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Where conflicts occur between drawings,specifications or requirements of governing authorities,
the most stringent requirement shall take precedence.
1.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Cutting and patching associatedwith the work of Division 16,"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",shall be in
strict accordance with Section 01045,"CUTTING AND PATCHING",and other pertinent provisions of
these Specifications:
1.8 TEMPERATURE RANGE
Unless noted otherwise,electrical equipment shall be capable of operating in the range of ambient
temperatures listed below,at all possible values of ambient humidity.
A. Indoor equipment: 0 deg.F to 100 deg.F.
B. Outdoor equipment: -10 deg.F to 120 deg.F.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Provide project record documents associated with the work of Division 16, "ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS",in strict accordance with Section 01300,"WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",and
other relevant provisions of these Specifications.
- B. Throughout progress of the Division 16,"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",work,maintain an accurate
record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 16, "ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS"and record the actual locations of installed piping and equipment on the project record
documents.
C. Accuracy of Records:
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Project Record Documents,making adequate and
proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other
documents where such entry is required to show the change properly.
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a futureverification of items shown in the Contract
Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record
Documents.
D. Maintain the job set of Project Record
Documents completelyprotected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of
the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final edition of Project Reca t Documents.
E. Project Record Documents(Final Edition):
1. The purpose of the final edition of the Project Record Documents is to provide factual
information regarding all aspects of the work,both concealed andrisible,to enable future
modification of the work to proceed without lengthy and expensive Site measurement,
investigation,and examination.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Deliver one set of erasable papersepias,containing all of the above record information,to
the Owner's Representative prior to the date of substanlil completion.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE(O&M)MANUALS
A. For each system or item of equipment provide manuals with all necessary information for operation
and maintenance. Extent and depth of detail will vary with the complexity of the system or item.
The manuals may vary from one brief volume to numerous volumes. The intent is to present in
words,diagrams,photographs,and any other helpful medium,all necessary and useful information
for personnel to competently operate and maintain the equip►ent.
B. Print operation and maintenance manuals on high quality gloss paper, oil resistant with mylar
reinforced binding edge, 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches and three ring-bound between durable hard
covers. Reduce drawings included with manuals to 11 inches by 17 inches and fold to open cut
clear of the main text. Photo copies not acceptable.
C. Organize maintenance and operating manual information into suitable sets of manageable size,and
bind into individual binders,properly identified and indexed(thumb-tabbed). Examples: time
clocks,panelboards,fire alarm systems. Include emergency instructions,safety procedures,spare
parts listings, warranties, guarantees, wiring diagrams, recommended turn-around cycles,
inspection procedures,shop drawings,product data,and similar applicable information. Use a
standard method for highlighting safety procedures. Bind each manual of each set in a heavy-duty
2 inch,three-ring vinyl covered binder and include pocket folders for folded sheet information.
Mark identification on both the front and spine of each binder.
1.11 PAINTING
All equipment shall be delivered to the Worksite with specified factory finish. Should the finish be .
damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to present a neat workmanlike
appearance to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.
1.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Provide personnel and equipment,make required tests,and secure required approvals from the
Owner's Representative and governmental agences having jurisdiction.
B. Make written notice to the Owner's Representative adequately in advance of each of the following
stages of construction:
1. When all rough-in is complete,but not covered.
2. As specified in all Division 16, 'ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",sections.
3. At the completion of the work in Division 16, "ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS".
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY -
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Unless noted otherwise,Contractor shall warranty all electrical equipment and workmanship in
accordance with the one year warranty clause of the General Provisions after date of final
completion of the Contract and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to
the for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1,
"GENERAL REQUIREMENTS".
B. This warranty shall not void specific guarantees issued by manufacturers for greater periods of
time,nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law.
C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner,and shall be delivered to the
Owner before the final acceptance of the work in accordance with Division 1, "GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS".
1.14 PROJECT COMPLETION
Upon completion of the work and prior to testing and final inspection,thoroughly clean all exposed
portions of the electrical systems;removing all traces of soil, labels, grease,oil, and other foreign
material; and using only the type of cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being
cleaned.
1.15 PERMITS,LICENSES,CHARGES
Comply with the General Provision Paragraph 4, "PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES" for all
permits and licenses required to complete the work.
1.16 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST(RSPL)
A. Prepare a listing of all parts on a Recommended Spare Parts List(RSPL)form for each individual
piece of equipment that is of a maintenance significant nature.
B. Evaluate all parts listed on the RSPL and advise the Owner's Representative of the Spare Parts
quantities(minimum/maximum)required for a 24-month operation period(this period starts at the
date of substantial completion). Show a zero requirement in the minimum/maximum columns
when none is required for any listed item. Indicate manufacturing lead time required for major
items in RSPL that are critical to operation. The scheduleshow minimum required spare parts.
Incorporate these quantities into the RSPL submittal to the Owner's Representative.
C. Use the RSPL form in submitting other spare requirements such as consumables,furnishings,
tools,and materials to the Owner's Representativ for approval.
D. Purchase spare parts designated by the Owner's Representative from the Spare Parts Allowance.
Spare parts shall be billed at the invoiced cost from the supplier plus 15%for overhead and 10%
for profit.
E. Ensure that the spare parts ordered are delivered to the Worksite before initial acceptance of the
facility by the Owner's Representative.
�. 1.17 TRAINING
A. Using the O&M manuals described above,prepare a training course that will thoroughly prepare
selected Owner personnel to properly operate and maintain the systems and equipment.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Consult the Owner's Representative and agree on times and places to present lectures and
demonstrations to Owner personnel.
C. Final Instructions and Operation Training: At least 30 days before the scheduled date for
commencementof trial operation,the Contractor shall submit his proposed training program and
instruction materials to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. Prior to startup the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's personnel the proper manner of operating the
equipment,making adjustments,respondingto alarms and emergency signals,and maintaining the
system. All systems shall include operator training. Operator schools will be conducted if
applicable in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Work performed by the
manufacturer'srepresentativerequired for testing will not be considered as operator training even if
the operators are present and witnessing the adjustments. Equipment testing will be completed
before the required on-the-job operator training shall begin.
1.18 SYSTEMS STARTUP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for a 30-day start-up period,during which time electrical and
mechanical equipment,fixtures,and associated devices shall be energized and operated under local
and automatic controls. The Contractor shall be present during the startup period with adequate
labor and support personnel to adjust equipment and troubleshoot system failures that might arise.
B. When a piece of electrical equipment fails to perform in accordance with specifications, an
adjustment shall be made to the item by an experienced representative of the manufacturer.
C. If adjustments fail to correct the operation of a piece of equipment or fixture, remove the
equipment or fixture from the Worksite and replace it with a workable replacementthat will meet -
the specification requirements.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
A. Supply products,including spare parts,as specified in the sections of Division 161,"ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS",and as described elsewhere in the Contract documents.
B. Supply spare parts per Division 1, "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", and in accordance with
Paragraph A above.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
1. Comply with requirements for installation,field testing and adjusting as specified in this section, _
Section 16030,"TESTING AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS",and other sections of this division.
Provide O&M manuals and training as described above in Paragraph 1.18 of this section.
2. Work in Place: Inspect the work in place and verify ability to make connections to the work in '-
place or being installed under other current contracts. Work in place generally consists of support
inserts embedded in the construction;piping embedded in the construction and below the base slab;
penetrations through floors,walls,roof,or other structural elements;and cast-in-place concrete
duct systems and shafts.
3. Connections to Existing Facilities: Make connections to existing facilities in accordance with .
details as shown or as approved by the Owner's Representative. Where material specified under
this Contract differs from material in place, provide adapters, dielectric fittings, or special
connectors as required.Use the requirements of applicable codes and recommendations of material
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
manufacturers as abasis for determining exact type of adapters and fittings to be provided under
this Contract.
4. Connections to Work by Others: Connect new work provided under this Contract to work installed
under other contracts,or required for equipment furnished by other contractors.Make all required
connections of this Contract to work by others in a proper and workmanlike manner. Refer to the
Drawings and Specifications for other contracts as referenced.
5. Alterations to Existing Facilities: If it is determined that,in order to make proper connections to
existing conduits,support systems,and structures,existing facilities must be altered,make such
alterations in accordance with Section 01045, "CUTTING AND PATCHING",or a manner as
directed by the Owner's Representative,using materials compatiblewith existing materials and as
approved.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -7 FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
DMSION 16-ELECTRICAL
Table 16001-1 -
Recommended Spare Parts List
Part Number Required Vendor Manuf.Lead Time
(Max/Min)
Lamp for Type `A'
Light Fixture
Lamp for Type `B'
Light Fixture
Lamp for Type `C'
Light Fixture _.
Lamp for Type `D'
Light Fixture
Lamp for Type`E'
Light Fixture
35A Fuses for EUH 5 3 Minimum
or 6 Safety Switch
20A, 1-Pole Circuit
Breaker
1-Pole,20A, 125V
Toggle Switch .,.
20A, 125V Duplex
Receptacle
20A, 125V GFCI
Duplex Receptacle
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL 16001 -8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16030-TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the testing of electrical equipment to include the famishing o£ll required
labor,instruments,wiring,cable,and incidentalsto performthe requiredtests and adjustments for
all electrical systems and equipment.
B. Perform the tests specified in accordance with the General Provisions and in accordance with
additional testing as described and specified elsewhere.
C. Related Work Specified Ekewhere:
1. Procedures and Quality Control: Section 01400.
2. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this section.
1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. ANSI C2.
b. OSHA.
c. NEC.
d. NFPA 78.
B. Provide that upon completion of all tests,all systems,and equipment are in satisfactory wo&g
order. Provide all adjustments and replacements required to ensure this in accordance with the
Contract,and as specified for each system or piece of equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED
SUBMITTALS",and with the additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Submit a detailed plan of the proposed methods of and scheduling of the overall systems and
equipment testing program at least 45 calendar days prior to initiatinghe testing program.
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16030- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Submit three complete bound sets of certified test reports upon completion of the project. Reflect
in the reports test title,list personnel,and time spent in participating in test,describe significant
change with previous product testing and describe adjustments required during test.
C. Provide National Electric Code Inspection and certification of the jurisdictional authorities.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All mechanical and electrical equipment including the interfaces with the supervisoryand control
system and communication system and all alarm and operating modes for each such piece of
equipment shall be tested by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative before
any facility is put into operation. Tests shall be as specified in these Specifications and shall be
made to determine whether the equipment has been properly assembled,aligned,and connected.
Any changes,adjustments,or replacements required to Hake the equipment operate as specified
shall be carried out by the Contractor as part of the work.
At least 30 days before the time allowed in his construction schedule for commencingtesting and
startup procedures,the Contractor shall identify if any additional support will be required from
other Contractors of the Owner and/or the Owner;and shall submit his request to the Owner's
Representativetogetherwith,in duplicate,details of the procedure he proposes to adopt for testing
and startup of all mechanical and electrical equipment,except when such procedures have been
covered in the Specifications. These procedures are submitted for review and acceptance.
The Contractor's testing and startup procedures shall include detailed descriptions of all
preoperational electrical,mechanical,and instrumentationtesting work. Each control device,item
of mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment, and all control circuits shall be -
considered in the testing procedures,which shall be designed,in a stepwise, logical sequence to
ensure that all equipment has been properly serviced,aligned,connected,calibrated,and adjusted
prior to operation. The Contractor is advised thatfailure to observe these precautions may place
the acceptability of the subject equipment in question, and he may either be required to
demonstratethat the equipment has not been damaged,or replace it as determined by the Owner's
Representative. Testing procedures shall be designed to duplicate as nearly as possible all
conditions of operations, and shall be carefully selected to ensure that the equipment is not
damaged. Once the testing procedures have been accepted by the Owner's Representative the
Contractor shall produce checkout,alignment,and adjustment,and calibratmn signoff forms for
each item of equipment, which shall be used in the field by the Contractor and the Owner's
Representative jointly,to ensure that each item of electrical,mechanical,and instrumentation
equipment has been properly installed and tested. Cooperate with project-wide systems contractors'
startup and testing to be conducted concurrently where applicable.
B. Before startup,the Contractor shall properly service all equipment and other items which normally
require service in accordance with the maintenance instructions. The Contractor shall be
responsible for lubrication of equipment throughout the entire equipment"brealan"period.
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16030-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
The Contractor shall be responsible for the startup, adjustment,preliminary maintenance,and
checkout of all equipment and instrumentation. All systems shall be carefully checked for
conformance with the design criteria.
If any equipment or system does not operate properly,the Contractor shall immediatelyreplace or
repair components until it operates prop rly.
When the equipment startup is complete,the Contractor shall submit a test report to the Owner's
Representative.
C. Perform execution in accordance with the applicable requirements of:
1. The Occupational Safety and Health Standards(OSHA).
2. ANSI C2-National Electrical Safety Code.
3. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 78-Lightning Protection Code.
D. Provide qualified technical personnel thoroughly familiarwith the electrical systems being tested.
E. Perform tests in the presence of witnesses selected by the Owner's Representative,if he so chooses.
F. Notify the Owner's Representative if the equipment or its components fail to meet the specified
inspection and test criteria. Do not repair or modify the equipment without written approval from
the Owner's Representative. After replacement,repair, or modification,repeat the specified
inspections and tests to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.
G. Where applicable,test individual components of a system before testing the complete system to
meet the requirements of the applicable specifications.
3.2 TESTING SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS
A. Check all control and metering circuits for proper operation.
B. Check contact alignment on all contactors,switches and circuibreakers.
C. Check and set all trips for proper coordination.
D. Check all circuit breakers and switches to ensure the protective device nearest the fault will open
before other devices upstream open.
E. Perform insulation resistance test between phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground.
F. Test grounding conductors and enclosures for continuity to ground bus.
G. Test system ground.
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16030-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
H. Perform dielectric withstand test of 60 seconds duration on entire assembled and erected
switchgear using 60 Hertz voltage level at 1000 volts AC or 80 percent of factory test voltage,
whichever is more stringent.
I. Inspect and clean all busses and contacts. -�
J. Check voltage at no load and full load(total connected load)on the busses of the switchgear and
panelboards.
3.3 TESTING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Check all wires for continuity and identificationby means of a D.C.test device with bell or buzzer "
or by means of battery operated phones before terminal connections are made.
B. Perform all insulation resistancetests on wiring after final terminations and splices have been made
but prior to energizing. Perform the tests with disconnecting devices in the open position to
include only the circuits to be tested.
C. Cable Rated 600 Volts and Below:
1. Perform insulation resistancetests on all feeders and subfeeders. This includes all cables to
the final points of distribution(panelboards,motor control centers, and other incidental
items). Measure and record the insulation resistance for each phase conductor to ground.
2. Perform the tests by utilizing a megger insulation testerwith a full range scale from 0 to 200
megohms and using 1000 volts D.C. The minimum acceptable reading on any feeder is 2
megohms.
3.4 TESTING LIGHTING
A. Check all lighting and receptacle circuits for proper operation. Check lighting controls for proper
operation.
B. Whenever practicable,test lighting systems at the same time that the distribution panelboard or
switchboard is tested.
C. Adjust floodlights in accordance with the aiming chart provided by the manufacturer. Make
adjustments during darkness to obtain the optimum lighting levels throughout.
D. Check all fixtures with standby batteries to confirm that transfer switch, battery,and charger
operate properly.
3.5 TESTING CONTROL AND ALARM SYSTEMS
Check all control and alarm systems for proper operation. Check individual alarms for proper function.
TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16030-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16040-IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing and installing of nameplates on electrical equipment.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Procedures and Quality(bntrol: Section 01400.
2. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included in
this section:
A. Codes and regulations of jurisdictionalauthorities.
B. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
- ANSI.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS", and
with the additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Samples:
1. Two sample nameplates.
2. Samples of all types of fasteners to be used.
- 3. Samples of adhesive materials(if used)with complete description and list of ingredients.
B. Identification List: Submit complete listing of nameplate identification system for appival,
following guidelines to be developed by the Owner's Representative.
C. Material list showing composition of nameplate elements.
IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 16040- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
PART 2--PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates consisting of threeply,laminated phenolic plates,appro)imately 1/8 inch
thick with beveled edges,engraved through black face to white core and attached by four
stainless steel rivets,drive screws,or sheet metal screws. Where it is not practical to drill holes
in the item to be identified,an approved adhesve may be used in lieu of screws or rivets.
B. For letter size of nameplates conform to ANSI requirements.
C. Provide vertical gothic lettering using round or square cutter. Yshape groove is not acceptable.
D. Provide nameplates 1 inch high by 3 incles wide or as shown.
E. Where equipment nomenclature requires additional space,provide nameplates of such size as
required.
F. Standard abbreviations may be used as required.
G. Obtain approval by the Owner's Representative of identification system bake fabrication of
nameplates.
PART 3 —EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Place nameplates on each remote motor starter,motor operated damper,push button station,
pilot light,alarm bell,and control device.
B. Place nameplates on each panelboard,contacts,and time clock;and on each cabinet or panel
containing control devices.
D. Install in accordance with nameplate manufacturer's instructions.
IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 16040-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16111 -CONDUITS
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies furnishing and installing conduit.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Grading,Excavating,and Backfilling: Section 02220.
2. Painting: Section 09900.
3. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
4. Electrical Boxes: Section 16130.
- 5. Supporting Devices: Section 16190.
6. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
7. Lighting Fixtures, Mounting Poles,and Control Devices: Section 16500.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this section:
1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. ANSI: C-80.1,C-80.3.
b. ASTM: A123, A386, A780, D256, F512.
c. FS: W-C-581.
d. NEC.
e. NFPA 130.
f. UL: 1,6, 514,651.
g. NEMA: FB 1,TC6.
B. Manufacturer: Select a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduit,conduit fittings,
connectors,and accessories of the type specified herein indicating conformance and compliance
with specifications indicated herein.
CONDUITS
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY qRM
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",
and with the additional regtirements as specified for each.
B. Product data or certification indicating compliance with the requirements listed.
C. Provide certification that galvanized rigid steel conduit and fittings comply with NFPA130.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Do not use conduit smaller than 3/4 inch in diameter for interior work and not smallerthan 1 inch
in diameter for exterior work,unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacture galvanized rigid stsl conduit in accordance with UL6.
B. Apply protective coating and threading complying with ANSI C80.1. Hot-dip galvanize externally
and internally after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A386,as applicable.
C. Hot dip galvanize the male threads of conduit and fittings in a manner to keep the threads clear of
excess zinc. Female threads may be electrogalvanizedinstead of hot dipped. Provide zinc coating
for conduit accessories such as lock nuts,bushings and connectors.
D. Touch up galvanized coating with cold galvanizing compounds for all ferrous and non-ferrous
surfaces;ASTM A780 where the original galvanized coating on conduit or galvanized steel has
been damaged.
2.3 RIGID STEEL PLASTIC COATED CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Use galvanized rigid steel conduit(GRSC)as specified in Paragraph 2.2. Apply external coating
of polyvinyl chloride(PVC),40 mils(0.040 inch)thick,minimum. Apply internal coating of either
urethan,2 mils(0.002 inch)thick,minimum;or epoxy,5 mils(0.005 inch)thick,minimum. Apply
all coatings under factory conditions,using heat and other environmental conditions as required for
optimum quality of finished product. Apply these coatings to all conduit and also to all couplings,
fittings,and conduit bodies that are parts of the conduit system. At all female threaded areas of
fittings-including both ends of couplings-provide a skirt of PVC(40 mils minimum thickness)
extending far enough to cover the exposed male threads of the mating conduit section and overlap
the PVC coating sufficiently to provide a seal.
B. Liquid PVC compound shall not be used as a substitute for factory applied PVC coating. The liquid
compound shall be used only for touch-up and bonding in the field,as described in"Installation of
Conduit"below.
CONDUITS 16111 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.4 NON-METALLIC RIGID CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish non-metallic rigid conduit and fittings fabricated from polyvinylchloride(PVC). Provide
sunlight-resistant,PVC,with impact strength conformingto the requirementsof ASTM D256 and
also NEMA TC6 and ASTM F512.
B. Fabricate rigid,non-metallic,fiberglass reinforced epoxy(FRE)type conduit as indicated. Provide
each conduit length with an expanded coupling with integral gaskets for a watertight seal when the
coupling is mated to the joining conduit end. Make watertight joint without the use of lubricants or
adhesives.
C. Provide non-metallic rigid conduit and fittings conforming to UL 514 and UL 651.
D. Provide end bells,flexible couplings,and expansion joints s necessary.
E. Use fitted plastic couplings to ensure a watertight joint.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacture electrical metallic tubing from galvanized steel in accordance with ANSI 080.3.
B. Fittings and conduit bodies shall be steel compressiontype in accordance with ANSUNEMA FBI.
Do not use set screw type fittings.
2.6 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit UL listed with galvanized steel core and thermoplastic cover
conforming to UL and being UL listed,where indicated. Do not use flexible steel conduit other
than water-tight type.
B. Provide fittings and conduit bodies suitable for water-tight flexible steel conduit and in accordance
with ANSI/NEMA FBI.
2.7 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide conduit connector fittings which conform to UL 514,material similar to that of conduit
with which they are to be used with the following additional requirements:
1. For enclosures,cabinets,boxes,and guttes which are subject to moistureor dirt: Tapped
conduit hub.
2. For enclosures having punched or formed knockout for conduit entry. Watertight hub fitting
with gasket,nylon insulated throat,and locknut.
B. Thread all conduit couplings on both ends.Do not use slip-on couplings.
C. Provide malleable iron union couplings for joining rigid conduit at intermediate runs, threaded
water tight to permit completing conduit run when neither conduit can be turned and to permit
breaking the conduit run at theunion.
CONDUITS 16111 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Fabricate bushings of the same material with which the bushings are to be used. Provide insulated
bushings 1-1/4 inches and largerwith 300 deg.F temperature rating. Install insulated grounding -'
bushings in conduits to protectwires inside boxes except where the protective shoulder is provided
as part of the conduit thread connection.
E. Equip metal fittings with bonding jumper cable where required to provide electrical continuity.
F. Provide expansion fittings with both expansion and deflection types on all conduits crossing
expansion joints. Fabricate conduit expansion fittings from material similar to that of conduit with
which coupling is to be used,having factory installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent
entrance of moisture. Equip metallic couplings with grounding ring.
G. Provide sealing fittings water-tight, malleable iron cadmium plated with pouring spout
perpendicular to the conduit. Provide vertical seals complete with drain seals.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. Provide conduit concealed,where possible,within finished walls, ceilings,and floors. Install
exposed conduit parallel with or at right angles to the building walls in accordance with the NEC.
B. Use galvanized rigid steel conduit for al exposed installations.
C. Use flexible metal conduit for final connection to rotating and/or vibrating equipment and as
permitted by NEC. Install a green insulated wire inflexible conduits for grounding purposes. Use
liquid-tight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations. Provide flexible conduit no longer than 36
inches,except from outlet box to recessed lighting fixtures,provide flexible conduit no longer than -.
6 feet from outlet box to recessed lighting fixture. Do not use flexible conduit to id in the final
positioning of panels,back boxes and terminal cabinets.
D. Make all conduit bends in accordance with NEC, with not more than three, 90 degree bends
between conduit ends or pullboxes. 90 degree bends for conduit sizes 4 inches or greater shall not
be made in the field. Provide conduit manufacturer's factory elbows for conduit sizes 4"or greater.
E. For all installations of metal conduit that will be in direct contact with earth,use only galvanized
rigid steel conduit and fittings with factory-applied exterior PVC coating as described above. After
installation,touch-up any areas where the external coating has been damaged,using liquid PVC
compound. Apply as many coats as required to assure that damaged area has been covered with at
least 40 mils of PVC. If any damaged area is so large that liquid PVC will not make a permanent
bond, remove the damaged pieces and provide new ones. Before connecting a coupling to a
section of conduit,apply liquid PVC compound liberally to the conduit near the threads so it will
form a seal between the PVC coating of the conduit and the PVC skirt on the coupling. Provide a
finished system of conduits that is completely covered inside with urethane or epoxy-all at the
specified thicknesses.
F. Cut off square all field-cut conduit without restrictionto the conduit openings. After conduit is cut
and threaded,ream conduit to remove all burrs and sharp edges and then clean thoroughly. Make
all joints waterproof by the application of a suitable corrosion-resistant sealer to the threads
immediately before assembly.
CONDUITS 16111 -4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
G. Cutoff square non-metallic conduit without restriction to the conduit openings. Trim all cut ends
, inside and out to remove rough edges and then clean thoroughly. Install all joints completely
sealed and watertight.
H. For each completed run of conduit,pull a flexible mandrel through the conduit at a speed not
greater than 1-1/2 feet per minute prior to installation of cable. Use mandrel size not less than
shown below. Ifthe mandrel does not pass through the conduit,remove the obstruction or replace
the clogged conduit with new conduit.
CONDUIT SIZE MANDREL DIAMETER SIZE
inches inches
3/4 1/2
1 3/4
1-1/4 1
1-1/2 1-1/4
„ 2 1-3/4
3 2-3/4
4 3-5/8
I. Where non-metallic conduit is i►stalled in concrete as shown on drawings,use adapters used for
transition from non-metallic conduit to galvanized rigid steel conduit before leaving concrete
enclosure. Do not install nonmetallic conduit exposed.
J. After the conduit has been rodded and swabbed,repack boxes and protect conduit ends to prevent
any foreign material from entering the conduit.
K. Install conduits in tiers under the slab with a minimum of 6 inches between rows where indicated.
Set conduits so as not to interfere with renforcing bars.
L. Provide metallic numbering tags indicating the conduit number on the ends of conduit. Identify
signal and communication conduit as indicated.
M. Securely fasten each conduit entering a non-threaded metal box with two locknuts and a bushing.
Retain bushing caps,where required,in place until just before conductors are installed. Secure
continuous ground by bonding as required. Thread free ends of spare conduits and install
couplings and plugs.
N. Install bell ends on all conduits terminating in manholes,handholes,building walls,or floors.
O. Install a pull rope or cable in each conduit having a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds.
Double back 2 feet of pull rope at each termination. Do not use nylon rope for pulling wires.
P. Mechanicallyconnect together all metal conduits,fittings,boxes,cabinets,and raceways to form an
effective continuous electrical path for grounding purposes.
Q. Examine carefully all conduits and fittings before installing. Set aside all pieces having splits,
breaks,blisters,or defects and remove from the Worksite.
CONDUITS 16111 -5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
R. Install expansion and deflection fittings as required on all conduits crossing expansion and
contraction joints. -
S. Install sealing fittings on all conduits and cables penetrating fire rated walls,floors,partitions,and
ceilings to insure that the fire rating is maintained.
T. After sanding,apply joint solvent cement to the male end of all PVC conduit prior to inserting in
coupling. Furnish solvent cement of type as recommendd by the conduit manufacturer.
U. Apply electrically conductive pipe joint compound to male threads prior to assembly of metallic
conduits.
V. Install conduit spacers for buried conduit and duct banks before placing concrete.
W. Prime coat and paint galvanized rigid steel where shown on drawings and as specified in Section
09900, "PAINTING".
X. Where metal conduit runs exceed 500 feet,provide insulated couplings at intervals of 500 feet or
less,to minimize stray current effects.
CONDUITS 16111 -6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16120-WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies fumishing and installing all wires and cables,cable connectors,and cable
connections as shown.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001
- 2. Testing of Electrical Systems: Section 16030.
3. Conduits: Section 16111.
4. Switches and Receptacles: Section 16490.
5. Power and Lighting Panelboards: Section 16470.
6. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
7. Lighting Fixtures,Mounting Poles,and Control Devices: Section 16500.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this section:
1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictioial authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. ANSI/IEEE C2(National Electrical Safety Code).
b. ASTM: B3, B8,B33,B189.
c. ICEA: 5-61-402, 5-68-516,T-29-520,T-30-520.
d. IEEE: 48,383,404.
e. MIL-C-17.
f. NEC.
g. NFPA-130.
h. NEMA: WC-8(Similar to ICEA 5-68-516).
WIRES AND CABLES 16120- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
i. UL: 44, 854, 1277.
j. ANSI: N45.2.
k. AEIC: CS-6.
1. ASTM E-662(for low-smoke applications only).
in. NFPA 258(for low-smoke applications only).
n. UL Standard 224(Standard for Extruded Thermoplastic Insulating Tubing).
o. UL: 1072 not for low-smoke applications).
B. Experience: Manufacturer: Select firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of wires and —
cables and connectors of the types specified herein,and having a performance reca&
demonstrating a minimum of 10 years of successful operating experience.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",and
with the additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Provide Certification or manufacturer's data sheets indicating that materials comply with
standards listed in this specification.
B. Wires and Cables installation procedures.
C. Tape installation procedures. -,
D. Heat shrink material installation procedures.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE CONDUCTOR 600 VOLT CABLE FOR GENERAL USE IN ANY
APPLICATION NOT REQUIRING LOW-SMOKE PROPERTIES AND
PERMITTED BY NFPA-130
A. Conductors: Coated copper per ASTM 13189,Class B,or ASTM B33, or uncoated.
Conductors shall be stranded.
B. Insulation: Moisture resistant and heat resistant thermoplastic(type THHNfIHWN)or
cross-linked synthetic polymer(type)(HHW). Must be rated for 90 deg.C(minimum)in dry
locations and 75 deg.C(minimum)in wet locations.
C. Color code all lighting and power wiring as indicated in Table 16120- 1.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.2 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. NEC Type shielded pair-overall shield(SPROS)shielded triads with each triad twisted with a
drain wire and shielded with an aluminum polyester tape in accordance wit UL specifications
1277.
B. Other configurations of single conductors,pairs,triads,etc.,shielded or unshielded,as
described on drawings. Assemble multiple groups with flame and moisture resistant fillers
where required.
C. Insulate conductors withlow smoke generation insulation. Provide wall thicknesses of
insulation consistent with the system nominal voltage.
D. Fabricate jacket with low smoke notthalogenated compound meeting the requirements of
ICEA S-68-516.
E. Minimum conductor size: No.16 AWG uncoated copper in accordance with ASTM B3,Class
B,stranded per ASTM B-8.
F. Flame test the cables to meet all requirements of IEEE 383.
G. Provide the cross-sectional area and conductor resistance in accordance with ICEA 561402.
2.3 WIRE CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors:
1. Provide connectors for No. 8 AWG and smaller of the pressure indent type with
nonflammable,sel€extinguishing insulation of temperature rating equal to that of cable
being connected.
2. For wires#8 through#22,use low smoke, low toxic insulated compression terminals,or
as approved.
—^ 3. Where insulated connectors are not required,use uninsulated terminals or as approved.
4. Terminate wire and Cable No. 6 AWG and larger with bolted pressure type connector.
Design connectors compatible with the conductors for which they are used.
5. Provide solderless lugs for connections to motor leads.
6. Provide connectors for connecting lighting fixtures to branch circuit wiring of the pre
insulated permanent pressure elwtrical spring connector type encased in an insulating
cover.
7. Provide compression terminals for all control and instrumentation cables.
B. Conductor Bundling Straps:
1. Formed from self-extinguishing nylon having a temperature range of 0 deg.F to 20
deg.F.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2. Equip each strap with a locking hub or head with a stainless steel locking barb on one
end with a taper on the other end.
3. Provide ultraviolet-resistant bundling straps for outdoor locations.
C. Splices:
1. For wires No. 8 AWG and smalbr,provide pressure indent type splices with
nonflammable,self-extinguishing insulation of temperature rating equal to that of the
wires.
2. For wires No.6 AWG and larger,provide bolted pressure type connectors with
nonflammable,self-extinguishing insulation of temperature rating equal to that of the
wires.
3. For cables 600 volts and below,heat shrink splices may be used at Contractor's option.
D. Insulation Tapes(use limited to wires and cables below 600 volts).
1. Of the type approved by UL 8r the particular use,location and voltage,3/4 inch nominal
width.
2. Plastic electrical insulating tape for general use: Vinyl plastic tape with rubbebase
pressure-sensitive adhesive,pliable at 0 deg.F with the following minimum properties
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1000:
a. Thickness: 0.085 inches.
b. Breaking strength: 20 pounds per inch width.
c. Elongation: 200 percent. _r
d. Dielectric breakdown: 10,000 volts.
e. Insulation resistance,indirect method of electrolytic corrosioni,000,000 megohms.
E. Heat Shrink Cable Terminations:
1. Description: IEEE 48;Class I,heat shrinkable cable terminations in kit form,capable of
properly terminating cables specified in this section.
2. Terminations for singleconductor cables shallconsist of heat-shrinkable radiation
crosslinked high dielectric constant linear stress relief material and heathrinkable
radiation crosslinked non-tracking outer insulation. Terminations shall contain a high
relative permittivity electric stress relit mastic for insulation shield cutback treatment
and a heat activated sealant for environmental sealing.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3. In addition to the components described above,threeconductor kits shall contain heat
shrinkable components to seal the cable jacket,phase connetiors,ground wire and
rejacket phase and ground conductors.
m 4. Kits shall be factory engineered and shall accommodate any common form of cable
shielding or construction without the need for special adaptors. Kits shall accommodate
a wide range of cable sizes and be completely independent of cable manufacturer's
tolerances. Kits shall accommodate commercially available standard connectors.
F. Heat Shrink Cable Splices:
1. Description:IEEE 404,heat shrinkable cable splices in kit form,capable of prognly
splicing cables specified in this section.
2. Splice kits shall contain all necessary components to reinstate primary cable insulation,
metallic shielding and grounding systems and overall jacket to the equivalent of the cable
itself. Splices shall be of a uniform cross-section and shall consist of heat shrinkable
radiation crosslinked insulation. The outer insulating layer shall be bonded to a
conducting layer for shielding. The splice shall be rejacketed with a heav5wall,heat-
shrinkable
eatshrinkable sealant lined sleeve to provide a waterproof hot melt adhesive seal. Splices
shall contain a high relative permittivity electric stress relief mastic for insulation shield
cutback treatment and a heat activated sealant for environmental sealing.
3. Kits shall be factory engineered and shall accommodate any common form of cable
shielding or construction without the need for special adaptors. Kits shall accommodate
a wide range of cable sizes and be completely independent of cable manufacturer's
tolerances. Kits shall allow splicing cables with different conductor sizes and shielding
construction. Kits shall accommodate commercially available standard connectors.
G. Heat Shrink Identification Markers:
1. Description:heat-shrinkable radiation crosslinked,hermally stabilized,flame retarded
modified polyolefin sleeves. Markers shall be recognized to UL Standard 224.
2. Sleeves shall be smear resistant prior to shrinking and achieve mark permanency when
shrunk without the need for permatizing equipment.Sleeves should achieve mark
permanency when standard ballpoint pens or high carbon content fabric ribbons are
used. The markers shall be flattened and mounted on a carrier suitable for use with
typewriters or printers. Markers shall be resistant to commn industrial fluids including
Freon TF,Isopropyl alcohol,and Ethylene Glycol.
3. Markers shall be compatible with an integrated hardware and software system allowing
high speed,automated,set or batch,wirelist printing. System shall allow externadata to
be imported from mainframe computers. System shall be compatible with panel and
wraparound markers specified in this section.
4. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters,pull boxes,outlet and junction boxes,
and each load connection.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
S. Legend:
a. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on
drawings.
b. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection
diagrams on drawings.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Install wires in conduits after all conduits are in place and all related work is completed and the
area cleared for a safe working condition.
B. Use UL-listed lubricant and provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting and
abrasion of wire during fie pulling of feeders. Avoid using any lubricant that may be injurious
to the materials of the wires and cables to be installed. Provide installation procedure as �.
recommended by the cable manufacturer,and approved by the Owner's Representative.
C. Pull in all cables or wires to be installed in a single conduit at the same time. Use steel cable or
other pulling material with a low coefficient of elongation. Avoid use of nylon or other rope
that elongates during pulling,causing uneven stress on cables.
D. Install branch circuit,neutral and ground wires in accordance with the requirements of the
latest provisions of the National Electrical Code and all local agencies having jurisdiction.
E. Join conductors securely both mechanically and electricalljo engage all strands equally by use _a
of proper connectors and terminal lugs.
F. Make wire and cable splices in outlet,junction or pull boxes,or in manholes or handholes. _
Make splices in accessible locations. Keep splices to a minimum. Do not pull slues into the
conduit.
G. Replace cables for any rupture of insulation.
H. Use nylon straps to bundle and secure wires and cables in panelboards and cabinets
I. Connect branch circuits in each panelboard serving single phase loads in a manner that will
balance the load on all phases as closely as possible.
J. No. 1/0 AWG and larger cables require a two bolt connector.
K. For wires above 600 volts,cover all joints,taps and splices with approved type heat shrink
tubing. For wires 600 volts and less,use tape or heat shrink materials(Contractor's option).
L. Install compression connectors and terminal lugs using tools and pressures recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Owner's Representative.
M. Make tap connections for lighting and recepgcle wiring No. 12 AWG and 10 AWG with screw
type connectors.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
N. Identify phases of all wires by using colored wire as listed elsewhere in this section. For wires
not available in needed colors,use colored plastic tape. Wrap the tape in three layers axll pull
boxes,junction boxes,manholes,wireways, splicing and access points. Provide the length of
wrap sufficient to permit easy identification but not less than 12 inches per conductor.
O. Provide No. 12 AWG as the minimum conductor size for powerdnnd lighting and No. 14 AWG
as the minimum conductor size for control,signal,and alarm circuits,unless otherwise
indicated.
P. Label main and feeder cables in all pull boxes,junction boxes,wireways,wiring gutters,and
panels. Label all branch circtits and control wiring in panels. Label control wiring in all outlet
boxes and at the control devices. On each wire or cable indicate wire or cable number and/or
piece of equipment served. Use heat shrink tubing,with lettering applied by typewriter or
computer printer.
Q. Connect and label wires to equipment on threephase circuits so that the phases are arranged
A,B,and C from left to right,when viewed from the front of the equipment.
R. Use grip type cable supports where cables are installed h raceways with a vertical rise of more
than 20 feet.
TABLE 16120-1
Wiring First Lee Second Les Neutral
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
208/120 volts,3-Phase,4 Wire Black Red Blue White
Color all ground wire green. Provide colored tiDe to identify wires that are not available with colored
-° insulation.
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16130-ELECTRICAL BOXES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies furnishing and installing electrical boxes as shown.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
' 1. Procedures and Quality Control: Section 01400.
2. Electrical System-General: Section 16001.
3. Identification of Electrical Equipment: Section 16040.
4. Conduits: Section 16111.
5. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
6. Switches and Receptacles: Section 16490.
7. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this Section.
1. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. NEC.
b. UL50, UL514A, UL514B.
c. ASTM A123.
d. ANSI B1.1.
e. NEMA Enclosures.
B. Manufacturer: Select a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical boxes of the types
specified herein.
ELECTRICAL BOXESi�"c� � �'
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY FT. � ��
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 0 13 00, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",and
with the additional requirements as specified for each: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data
for all items described in this Specification indicating conformance and compliance with standels
and criteria indicated.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
ELECTRICAL BOXES
A. Include outlet,junction,terminal,device,splice,and pull boxes.
B. Conform to UL•50 and UL-514A and 514B.
C. Provide the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enlDsed.
D. Provide boxes of the material,finish,type,and size specified and required for the location,kind
of service,number of wires,and function.
E. Provide weatherproof boxes for outdoors and for locations subject to moisture,with neoprene
cover gaskets.
F. Provide watertight surface mounted boxes with external mounting lugs where required.
G. Provide boxes for exposed switches,receptacles,and telephones fabricated of cast aluminum
alloy,Type FS,and FD,or of hot dipped galvanized steel,omf malleable iron.
H. Fabricate boxes 12 inches square and larger of stainless steel,coppe6ee cast aluminum,cast
iron,or cadmium plated malleable iron. Provide factory installed hubs. Fabricate boxes
smaller than 12 inches square with hot dippedgalvanized steel in accordance with ASTM
A123.
Follow instructions on drawings if different materials are called for. Do not install aluminum
boxes in contact with or embedded in earth or in concrete.
I. Provide boxes complete with covers suitable tothe purpose for which they will be used,except
equip boxes in which or on which no devices or fixtures are to be installed,with flat or raised . ,
blank covers as required. Equip ceiling fixture outlet boxes with 3/8 inch boltless fixture studs.
J. Furnish covers of the same material thicknesses and finish as boxes,secured in position by
means of screws compatible with the material of the box and with the environment. Arrange
covers to be readily and conveniently removed.
K. Galvanize steel junction box(s after fabrication inside and outside to prevent oxidation. Where '
outlet boxes are used as junction boxes,do not provide boxes smaller than 4 inches square by
1-1/2 inches deep. Provide boxes with flat blank covers fabricated of galvanized steel.
Galvanize(hot-dip)junction boxes and covers in accordance with ASTM A123. —
ELECTRICAL BOXES 16130-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
L. Provide boxes for flush mounting in concrete fabricated of Ferroalloy hetiip galvanized cast
body and screwed on cover with neoprene gasket.
M. Provide outlet boxes of hot-dipped galvanized steel, in accordance with ASTM A123,and not
smaller than 4 inches square by 2,1/8 inches deep.
N. Galvanize concealed switch boxes in accordance with ASTM A123; Provide covers with
rectangular openings of proper size and shape. Furnish speial boxes and install as required to
suit the kind of service for the building construction requirements.
O. Furnish brackets,supports,hangers,fittings,bonding jumpers,and all other accessories
required.
P. Use flat terminal strips made of polyamid 6.6 insulation or bakelite suitable for No.22 to No.
12 wires,with 6-32 by 5/16 inch long screws in accordance with ANSI B1.1 for ring or spade
lugs,rated at 20 amperes,300 or 600 volts as required.
Q. Terminal strips for wires larger than No. 12:Provide compression type line terminals rated 600
volts and equipped with two washer head screws per wire.
R. Cast boxes shall be of aluminum or feralloy,deep type,with gasketed cover and threaded hubs.
Do not install aluminum boxes in or touching concete.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes for switches and receptacles flush in all finished areas and exposed on
walls and columns in unfinished areas or as shown.
B. Install boxes plumb and straight,rigidly secured in place
C. Install conduit fittings in boxes for conduit connectors.
D. Install brackets,supports,hangers and accessories required for installation of boxes. Provide
additional support, independent of conduit system,for boxes weighing substantially more tin
an equal length of conduit.
E. Provide suitable bushings,shields,or fittings having smooth rounded edges where conductors
pass through partitions and at other locations where necessary.
F. Install bonding jumpers across all boxes from conduit to coduit,where conduits contain one or
more feeders.
G. Install receptacle outlet boxes 18 inches from the finished floor to the center of the outlet box
unless shown otherwise. Install switch boxes measuring 4.5 feet from the finished floor to the
center of the switch box unless shown otherwise. Locate outlets as shown on the Drawings.
H. Do not obstruct access to boxes. Provide removable box covers without interference to or from
other conduit boxes or equipment.
ELECTRICAL BOXES 16130-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
I. Clean boxes thoroughly after instalation and correct any damage to boxes and to finish.
J. Provide adequate support for all boxes. Boxes in conduit runs shall be supported
independently of the conduit,unless conduit supports(adequate to support the additional
weight)are placed within24 inches of the box on both sides.
K. In damp or wet locations,do not mount boxes against walls. Provide 1/2 inch or more of air
space between box and wall. If strips or channels are used for standoffs,mount them vertically
so they will not collect mwisture.
ELECTRICAL BOXES 16130-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16190-SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies furnishing and installing supporting devices for electrical equipment and
materials.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Procedures and Quality Control: Section 01400.
2. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
3. Conduits: Section 16111.
4. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
5. Electrical Boxes: Section 16130.
6. Power and Lighting Panelboards: Section 16470.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included in
this Section:
A. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
B. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
ASTM: A123.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",and
with the additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Catalog-cuts,covering all types of fasteners to be used for supporting devices.
B. Shop Drawings.
` PART 2--PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Furnish all inserts and fastenings necessary for the rigid and secure installation of all
equipment.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Provide supporting hardware including steel bolts,nuts,washers,lockwashers,and screws with
either hot-dipped galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 or cadmium plated steel.
C. Use wood screws or lag screws of appropriate length to securely fasten equipment to wood.
D. Use inserts,expansion bolts,or self drilling type anchors and drive pins for fastening to
masonry. Provide inserts of the type to receive machine bolts after installation. ..
E. Provide channel inserts not lighter than l2gauge steel channel not smaller than 11/2 inches
by 1-1/2 inches,and a continuous 7/8 inch wide slot. Hot dip galvanize all hannel inserts in
accordance with ASTM A123 after fabrication. Cover inserts with a zinc chromate solution.
Channels may be PVC coated as required.
1. Provide surface mounted channel inserts with a 3/8 inch by 3 inch base slot on 4 inch
centers. Galvanize inserts for surface mounting on concrete surfaces or for installation in
damp or wet areas.
2. Provide concrete embedded channel inserts with a solid base,and provide concrete
anchors welded to the base during fabrication and before galvanizing.
3. Provide channel insert assemblies with a pullout load rating of not less than 4,500
pounds per linear foot uniformly distributed. Fill the channel with styrofoam in a manner
which will prevent concrete from entering into channel during installation.
4. Rate spot inserts at 800 pounds,and with a safety factor of five. Fabricate inserts from
steel,hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 after fabrication: Cover inserts
in a manner which will prevent the entering of concrete during installation.
F. Hot dip galvanize hangers in accordance with ASTM A123 after fabrication. Provide hangers
consisting of two or more steel rods,a steel horizontal member and Ubolts,clamps,and other
attachments necessary for securing hanger rods and conduits. Froish hanger rod not smaller
than 3/8 inch diameter,threaded either full length or for a sufficient distance at each end to
permit at least 1-1/2 inches of adjustment. Provide hangers capable of supporting a load equal
to 200 pounds plus the sum of the meights of the conduit,cable tray,conductors,and hangers.
G. Furnish miscellaneous steel consisting of steel supports,angles,flats,and channels for the
proper spacing and support of lighting fixtures,starting and control equipment,disconnect
switches,panelboards,switchboards,wall mounted transformers,and other electrical
equipment.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Install all fastenings,supports and devices as necessary for the installation requirements of the
electrical equipment and material.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Fasten exposed conduit to structures acceptable to the Owner's Representative by clamps,
straps,or hangers spaced at intervals not more than 10 feet when fastened to a steel structure
nor more than 7-1/2 feet when fastened to concrete. Do mt support or fasten conduit by
welding directly to equipment or to the building structure. Do not use C clamps as a permanent
method of supporting vertical conduit risers. Install clamps within 3 feet but not closer than 6
inches to couplings,boxes,arra fittings in conduit runs in which expansion joints are installed.
Install exposed raceways parallel to or perpendicular to walls and structural members,and
parallel to intersections of vertical plans and ceilings. Provide all conduit straps and clamps
with base fittings or back plates which provide an air space of 1/4 inch minimum between the
conduit run and supporting surfaces. Do not use perforated iron or wood plugs and nailing as
methods of attachment. Make fastenings to steel members with granuir flux filled welded
studs.
C. Locate cable tray supports to ensure a rigid installation on centers not greater than 8 feet.
Provide interconnections of sections for a rigid mechanical assembly. Provide cable tray
supporting components comprised of clanps,clips,concrete inserts,hanger rods,insulators,
racks,frames,trapezes,beams, structural steel clamps,L-bolts, slotted angles and fittings,
machine screws,wall anchors,and similar items. Provide that components of dissimilar metals
are compatible with the raceway,cable tray,and cable equipment which such components
support. The cable tray layouts are described in Section 16114.
D. In damp or wet locations,do not mount electrical equipment(including boxes,starters,panels,
and conduit)so that it touches the walls. Provide 1/2 inch or more of air space between wall
and equipment. If strips or channels are used for standoffs,mount them vertically,so they will
not collect moisture.
SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16450-GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
- A. This section specifies furnishing,installing,and testing complete grounding and bonding systems.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
-` 1. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
2. Testing of Electrical Systems: Section 16030.
3. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to the work
included in this Section:
1. The following codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
2. NEC.
3. UL: 467.
4. ASTM: B187, A666, B8.
5. IEEE 80/81.
6. NESC.
7. NFPA.
B. Source Quality Control: Each Item UL Listed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approvalin accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED
SUBMITTALS",and with the additional requirements as specified for each.
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Locations of ground rods,connectors,cables,etc.,and details of connections,
terminations and access points.
2. Manufacturer's catalog data for all proposed materials with installation recommendations.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
3. Procedures and equipment for testing resistances and electrical continuity.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
Grounding and Bonding Equipment:
A. General Requirements: UL 467.
B. Ground rods: Copper clad steel or other material as shown on drawings. Minimum
dimensions: 5/8 inch diameter by 10 feet long.
C. Grounding conductor:
1. Grounding electrode conductors:
a. Copper conductor,as shown on drawings,in accordance with the following: As
specified in Section 16120, "WIRES AND CABLES",for singleconductor cable,
600 volts.
b. Size unless otherwise shown:
(1) For other grounding electrode conductors: In accordance with NEC Table
250.66.
2. Equipment grounding conductor:
a. Sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122 unless otherwise shown on drawings.
b. Equipment grounding insulated conductor: Single conductor stranded copper,with
insulation,as specified in Section 16120, "WIRESAND CABLES". -'
c. Equipment grounding bare conductor integral with multipleconductor cable:
Section 16120, "WIRES AND CABLES".
D. Terminal lugs:
1. For 4/0 AWG and smaller conductors: Copper compression terminal lugs.
2. For 250 kcmil and larger: Lorg barrel,copper,double-compression terminal lugs.
E. Ground connector:
1. O-Z Gedney,Type KG or approved equal.
2. Two-piece,designed for connecting grounding conductor to bus bar.
3. Copper alloy body and silicon bronze bolt,nut and washer withnterlocking clamp. -.
4. Exothermic weld: Size and type per manufacturers recommendations.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
F. Jumpers: Insulated copper braided or leaf type flexible jumper,size as required.
G. Coal Tar Epoxy: Polyamide cured coal tar epoxy,Dupont Corlar 823 CTE,Kppers Company
No.300M,PPG Industries 97-640 or 97-641 or approved equal,applied to a dry film thickness
of 8 mils.per coat.
H. Epoxy Resin Encapsulation: Twocomponent epoxy resin type with plastic snap mold,as
manufactured by Duriron Company,3M Company or approved equal.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING
A. Ground Connections:
1. Weld buried ground connections exothermically,in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Clean and coat with coal tar epoxy applied with a 32 mils.dry lin
thickness using multiple coats. Allow drying between coats and before backfilling.
Encapsulate with epoxy resin,all buried ground connections of grounding electrode
conductors running to ground buses as shown.
2. Use terminal lug to connect grounding conductor to equipment enclosure. Secure
connector or terminal lug to the conductor so as to engage all strands equally by using
tools and pressure recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Splices in grounding conductors are not permitted.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide equipment grounding copper conductor for
following services and as shown:
1. Feeders.
2. Three-phase branch circuits.
3. Parking lot lighting branch circuits.
4. Circuits feeding load centers.
5. Branch circuits in nonmetallc conduit.
C. Grounding of Service Equipment:
1. Ground in accordance with NEC.
2. Ground enclosure and ground bus in switchgear and panelboards.
3. Install copper bonding jumper between neutral and ground bus.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Equipment Grounding:
1. Alternating current panelboard and disconnect switches.
a. Provide ground wire equal in size to largest conductor in line feeding equipment, —
but not less than No. 6 AWG,nor larger than No.4/0 AWG.
b. Install ground wire in rigid steel conduit bonded at both end.
2. Wiring,channels,metallic conduit,rigid galvanized steel,flexible conduits,metallic
boxes and panelboards. Ground the ground bus with copper ground conductors sized as
specified.
3. Lighting Fixtures,and Equipment: Ground in accordance withNEC.
E. Grounding for Personnel Safety:
1. Light standards: Bond and ground each light standard to a ground grid or to one or more
separate ground rods. Provide maximum resistance to ground of 25 ohms.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test ground resistance of each ground rod after installation,using approved test procedure.
B. Ground resistance not to exceed 25 ohms. w
C. To meet resistance requirements, install additional ground rods or use soldier piles as ground
rods where available.
D. Test metallic conduit and raceways,equipment enclosures and light standards for continuity to
grounding system.
E. Conduct tests in presence of the Owner's Representative.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16470-POWER AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies furnishing, installing,and making all electrical connections in the
electrical panelboards as shown.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Procedures and Quality Control: Section 01400.
2. Painting: Section 09900.
3. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
4. Identification of Electrical Equipment: Section 16040.
5. Conduits: Section 16111.
- 6. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
7. Electrical Boxes: Section 16130.
8. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work
included in this Section:
1. Codes and regulations of thejurisdictional authorities.
- 2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. ANSI Z55.
b. NEC.
c. NEMA.
d. OSHA.
e. UL 67,UL 50.
B. Source Quality Control:
Manufacturer: Select a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of power and ligting
panelboards of the type specified herein.
POWER AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 16470- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS',and
with the additional requirements as specified for each:
A. Shop drawings: For Panelboards; 1 inch scale for elevations and details to scale to reflect
graphically the construction elements.
B. Certification: Certify that completed components comply with standards referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Training: In accordance with Section 16001,
"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL".
D. Manufacturer's Data: At least two weeks before start of any shop coating work submit to the
Owner's Representative for approval two each of the following: Complete Data Sheets with
surface preparation and the coEting materials to be used,identified by the manufacturer,brand -
name,and product number.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
PANELBOARDS
A. General:
1. UL listed and UL labeled(unless shipped as a factory mounted component of a UL
labeled enclosed type panelboard)not over 48 inches high.
2. Main bus,neutral bus,separate ground bus,and a main circuit breaker where indicated
on drawings. .y
3. Buses of copper and terminals rated solderless type,suitable for either copper or
aluminum conductors sized at maximum rabd terminal capacity.
4. Provide all panelboards with a metal directory frame. Directory to be legible and indicate
panelboard designation, source from which feed originates,and equipment controlled
from each circuit breaker.
5. Construct all panelboaals cabinets of UL 50 code gage sheet steel,bearing the
manufacturer's nameplate or stamp and the Underwriters'Laboratories inspection label. T..
Cabinets shall be NEMA 1 for indoor locations and NEMA 3X for outdoor locations,
unless noted otherwise.
6. Provide all panelboard cabinets with means for securing,supporting,and adjusting the
panelboards and trim.
7. Factory-clean all panelboard cabinets and coat with one coat of zinc primer,and paint
with one coat of gray bakedon enamel in accordance with fie ANSI 255 Code 61 except
DC panelboard cabinet color to be OSHA red.
8. Procure panelboard cabinets without knockouts.
POWER AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 16470-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
9. Equip panelboard cabinets with sheet steel trim and hinged door with catch and lock.
10. Provide panelboards with space,terminal,and bus capacity,for future addition of circuit
breakers as indicated on the drawings.
11. Provide panelboard gutter space as required by the NEC.
12. Where gutter spaces are occupied by feeder cables, increase gutter spaces as required.
13. Markings per UL 67.
14. Permanent numerical identification at each breaker space.
B. Power and Lighting Panelboards:
1. 208/120 volts,three-phase,four wire,with molded case circuit breakers in the quantities,
sizes,rating,and number of poles as indicated.
C. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide molded case branch circuit breakers,and where called for on drawings,a main
circuit breaker of the ampere rating and number of poles as called for.
2. Unless otherwise shown,provide circuit breakers having short circit current interrupting
capabilities in excess of available fault current at the panelboard,but no less than:
a. 22,000 amperes symmetrical for 120/208 volts service.
�. 3. Bolt circuit breakers in place. Plug in breakers not acceptable.
4. Provide multiple-pole circuit breakers where called for: One case containing two or three
poles(as required)operated by one handle. Connecting two or three individual breakers
by tying the handles together is not an acceptable alternative.
S. Where called for onthe drawings,provide certain circuit breakers with locking devices to
reduce the danger of accidentally opening or closing critical circuits. Design these
devices so that they can be attached to and removed from the circuit breaker handle
using a straight-bladed screwdriver only. When attached to the handle,the device locks
the circuit breaker handle in either the on position or the off position.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Surface mount all panelboards unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mount all panelboard cabinets rigidly in place with top of cabinet 6'6"maximum above
finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Bottom of cabinets shall be 6 inch minimum above
floor.
POWER AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 16470-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
C. Install panelboards in enclosures in accordance with manufactureesristructions, if practicable,
before mounting enclosure.
D. Adjust cabinets and panelboards straight and plumb and fasten securely in place.
E. Verify that all circuit breakers have correct rating for the applicable circuit application as .
indicated. Circuit breakers for future wiring to future equipment shall be left in the"Off'
position and labeled"Do Not Turn On".
F. Perform wiring in accordance with UL 67,NEC and manufacturer's instructions.
G. Make conduit connections in accordance with Section].6111, "CONDUITS".
H. Provide grounding as specified in UL 67;NEC,and Section 16450, "GROUNDING AND
BONDING". Connect neutral wire directly to neutral bus,and ground wire to ground bus, in
the same panel as circuit interrupting device.
I. Route,harness,and support conductors in gutters,wiring spaces,and compartments with
bending radii not less than recommended by conductor manufacturer.
J. Install bonding jumpers from conduits entering cabinets to ground bus.
K. Identify each circuit in cabinet,record identity of each circuit and type circuit identity on
directory card and place card in frame on door panel. All information on the directory card
shall be neatly typed.
L. Attach identification tabs bearing the number of the circuit to all wirein panelboard gutters.
M. Apply field touch-up paint as provided by the manufacturer. -
N. In wet locations mount surface mounted panel boards and circuit breaker enclosures on
standoffs, so they are a minimum of 1/2 inch from the wall. Use nomorrosive material for
standoffs. If continuous strips or channels are used for standoffs,mount them vertically,to
minimize areas for collection of water.
POWER AND LIGHTING PANELBOARDS 16470-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16490-SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies furnishing and installing switches and receptacles, as shown.
mm B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Electrical Systms-General: Section 16001.
- 3. Testing of Electrical Systems: Section 16030.
4. Conduits: Section 16111.
5. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
6. Electrical Boxes: Section 16130.
7. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
8. Lighting Fixtures,Mounting Poles,and Control Devices: Section 16500.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included in
this section:
A. Codes and regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
B. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
1. ANSI C73.
_A 2. ASTM A167.
3. OSHA.
4. NEC.
5. NEMA WD1, WD6.
6. UL98.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16490- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED SUBMITTALS",and
with the additional requiEments as specified for each:
Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for all items described in this section indicating
conformance and compliance with standards and codes indicated.
PART 2--PRODUCTS -
2.1 LIGHTING SWITCHES
A. Unless otherwise specified,provide specification grade switches which meet or exceed all
requirements of NEMA WDI and WD6,and are UL listed. Voltage and amperage ratings of
all switches must equal or exceed voltage and amperage of the circuit to be switched.
B. Provide single pole interior lighting switches of specification grade,20 amperes, 12a77 volts,
quiet type,with solid silver cadmium oxide contacts,side and back clamp type terminals,and
wide toggle handle with neoprene bumper pads.
C. Provide three way interior lighting switches of specification grade,20 amperes, 129277 volts,
quiet type,with solid silver cadmium oxide contacts,clamp type terminals,and wide toggle
handle with neoprene bumper pads.
D. Provide switch and pilot light of specification gade,20 amperes, 120-277 volts with solid
silver cadmium oxide contacts,clamp type terminals,and rugged lexan handle that is lighted
red when the switch is in the ON position(unless noted otherwise on the drawings).
E. Provide single pole exterior liglting switches similar to the interior switches except equipped
with a hinged cast aluminum gray cover plate and fiber shield for weatherproofing.
2.2 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES IN INDIVIDUAL ENCLOSURES
A. Provide all safety switches of heavy duty type ad UL listed,rated at 240 volts or 600 volts,as
required.
B. Provide all switches with switch blades which are fully visible in the"OFF"and"ON"
positions when the switch door is open. Plate all current carrying parts to resist corrosion and
promote cool operation. Construct switches with removable arc suppressors where necessary to
permit easy access to line side lugs. Provide front removable type lugs,UL listed for 90 deg.C
copper wires.
C. Provide quick-make,quick-break switches such that,during normal operation of the switch,the
operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after
the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. Provide operating handle as an
integral part of the box,not the cover. Make provisions for padlocking the switch in the"OFF" ""
and "ON"positions. Provide switches with a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized
opening of the switch door when the handle is in the"ON"position,and to prevent closing of
the switch mechanism with the door open. The handle position shall indicate whether the
switch is "ON" or"OFF".
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16490-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
D. Where called for on the drawings,furnish switches in NEMA 4X,NEMA 12,or code gauge
UL 98 stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosures without knockouts. Provide positive means of
sealing the cover. Provide quick release latches. Provide covers with pin type hinges and
gaskets. Unless noted otherwise,provide enclosures as follows:
1. Outdoors: NEMA Type 31?,4X or stainless steel NEMA Type 4.
2. Indoors: NEMA Type 1.
3. Other Locations:NEMA Type 3R where subject to moisture.
E. Furnish switches horsepower rated for AC and/or DC as indicated by standard drawings. For
fusible switches rated 100 through 600 amperes at 240 volts and 30 thrugh 600 amperes at
600 volts,provide a UL listed method of field conversion from standard Class H fuse spacing
to Class J fuse spacing. These switches also must accept Class R fuses and have provision for
field installation of a UL listed rejection feature to reject all fuses except Class R. Provide the
UL listed short circuit rating of the switches at 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when Class
R or Class J fuses are used with the appropriate rejection scheme. Provide the UL listed short
circuit rating of the switch,when equipped with Class H fuses,of 10,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes.
F. The enclosure shall be finished completely in the shop. Complete coatings of paint will not be
applied in the field. Field painting shall be limited to touch up of naks and scratches incurred
in shipping and installation. All damage to paint shall be neatly refinished after installation and
before commissioning. Field touch up shall be in accordance with Section 09900,
"PAINTING".
�. 2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Unless otherwise specified,provide receptacles which meet or exceed all requirements of ANSI
C73 and NEMA WD6 and are UL listed. Provide heavy duty receptacles, specification grade.
B. Provide single convenience receptacles of 20 amperes, 125 volts AC,two pole,tim wire
grounded,consisting of a heavyduty reinforced molding,grounding screw, side and back
wired,straight blade type.
C. Provide duplex convenience receptacles similar to the single type.
D. Provide single outlet,weather-proof convenience receptades,20 amperes, 125 volts AC,two
pole,three wire grounded,consisting of a heavyduty reinforced molding,grounding screw,
side wired and turn-to-lock type with matching plug complete with cast box,hinged cast
aluminum gray cover plate and fiber shieldfor weatherproofing.
E. Provide single outlet,heavy duty tumto-lock receptacles rated at 30 amperes 208/120 volts
with two poles,one neutral pole and ground pole back wired consisting of a black phenolic
base complete with matching plug.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 0 ���� �
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY �q ��U
QRR Y
F. Equip receptacles for use in restrooms,washrooms,and outdoor locations with solkitate
ground-fault circuit interrupter actuating at 5mA. Provide receptacles with integral interrupters
-not interrupters at the circuit breaker. Connect receptacles with intrrupters so that the
-
interrupter will not affect any other receptacles.
2.4 COVER PLATES ..
A. Unless otherwise specified,provide cover plates conforming to ANSI C73 and NEMA WD1.
B. Furnish a cast feraloy plate to suit the device,gasketed for exterinmounting on surface ..
mounted interior and exterior Type FS or FD boxes for switches and receptacles.
C. Furnish cover plates of stainless steel minimum 0.040 inch thick,brush finish on flush mounted
switch and receptacle boxes.
D. In public areas provide cover plates fabricated of stainless steel ASTM A167 Type 302,No.4
satin fmish.
E. For special purpose outlets commercially produced using special material,configuration,and
size,use plate of brushed stainless steel and of a design for the partiular application.
F. For receptacles located in greenhouse,install clear plastic hinged covers. Intermatic or equal.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
INSTALLATION -.
A. Install receptacles rigidly to outlet boxes at the location shown on the Drawings.
B. For exterior locations,mount receptacles in watertight cast type outlet boxes with threaded hubs
or bosses and equipped with gasketed cover and captive cap of the screw or twist type.
C. Adjust devices to the vertical and flush with front of boxes. -
D. Install cover plates on switches and receptacles.
E. Install switches,receptacles,and cover plates complete plumb,square, and tight in accordance
with the NEC and Local Electrical Codes.
F. Where switch enclosures are surface mounted in wet locations,provid standoffs so they are a
minimum of 1/2 inch from the wall. Use noncorrosive standoff material. If continuous strips
or channels are used for standoffs,mount them vertically.
SWITCHES�ND RECEPTACLES 16490-4
t FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16500- LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES,AND CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing,transporting,repairing,and installation of lighting fixtures,
mounting poles,and control devices.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials,facilities, incidentals, and
M transportation to fabricate,assemble,paint or finish,test,package,ship,deliver,handle,unload,
and place into storage at the Worksite all lighting fixtures,mounting poles,and control devices
with their respective connectors,attachments,and brackets as indicated in the Contract documents.
C. The light fixtures and mounting poles with respective accessories shall be new, and painted or
finished as specified, in full compliance with specifications,fully assembled as appropriate,
securely packaged to prevent damage, and containing all accessories necessary for complete
installation without field modifications or additional materials.
D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
3. Testing of Electrical Systems: Section 16030.
4. Conduits: Section 16111.
5. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
6. Supporting Devices: Section 16190.
7. Grounding and Bonding: Section 16450.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this section:
1. Codes and regulations of jurisdictional authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. NEC.
b. UL: 57, 496, 508, 542, 935, 1029, 1570.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500- 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
c. SSPC: SP-6, SP-8, SP-10.
d. ASTM: A325, A386, A507, B26, B85, B137, B209, B221, D635, D1056,
D1400, D2240.
e. Applicable AISI,ANSI and NAAMM standards.
B. Each lighting fixture: UIrlabeled or listed.
C. Experience:
1. Installer: Select a firm regularly engaged for 5 years or more in the installation of the
products described herein.
2. Manufacturer: Select subcontracting firms regularly engaged for 5 years or more in the
manufacture of the products described herein.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the manufacturer's on the
Lighting Fixture Schedule unless otherwise noted,and as follows:
1. For lighting fixtures where only one manufacturer is listed,the Electrical Contractor shall
provide the product listed. No substitutions will be allowed.
2. For lighting fixtures where more than one manufacturer is listedthe Electrical Contractor
shall select one for each fixture type and shall use that fixture on the entire project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED
SUBMITTALS",and with the additional requirements as specified foieach:
A. Shop Drawings: Include photometric curves from a nationally known independent photometric
laboratory for each fixture type. The manufacturer's data is not an acceptable substitute.
B. Wiring diagrams and bill of materials.
C. Samples: One ofeach type of fixture,as requested or directed by the Owner's Representative.
D. Documentation:
1. Verification that each fixture is in compliance with applicable codes,regulations,reference
standards,and specificationsfor the location at which it is to be used. Indicate requirements
that each fixture meets.
2. Calculations: Submit calculations by a Professional Engineer,registered in the State of -
Texas,certifyingthat assemblies of foundation,anchor bolts,pole,arms,and luminaire will
withstand specified wind pressure,wind speed, stress,deflection,vibration,and fatigue.
E. Templates: Submit a template for the anchor bolt pattern of the mounting poles.
F. Mounting details and installation instructions.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
G. Field Testing:
1. Submit a detailed plan of the proposed methods of and scheduling of the required field
testing at least 30 calendar days before initiating the tests.
2. Submit certified test reports.
H. Manufacturer's Data: At least two weeks before start of any shop coating work, submit to the
Owner's Representativefor approval two each of the complete data sheets with surface preparation
and the coating materials to be used, identified by the manufacturer,brand name, and product
- number.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Transport and place lighting fixtures and mounting poles into cartons or crates to provide
protection during transit and storage to the Worksite.
B. Inspect lighting fixtures and mounting poles upon delivery for damage. Repair minor damage
provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work;otherwise,remove and replace
damaged items as indicated. If damaged,polycarbonatq)anels shall not be repaired but shall be
replaced.
C. Store lighting fixtures and mounting poles at the site under cover. Place units on at least a 4 inch
high sills on floors in a manner that will prevent damage and rusting. Avoid the use of non-vented
plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber.
D. Hardware shall be issued to the Owner's Representative in original unopened packages,clearly
labeled with manufacturer's name,brand, specification identification data, and identification as
shown on approved shop drawings or submittals.
E. Hardware for lighting fixtures,mounting poles, and control devices shall not be stored at any
location unprotected from contact with soil and from exposure to the elements.
PART 2--PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. General Requirements for Lighting Fixtures:
1. Interchangeability: Components of same type,size,rating, functional characteristics and
make are to be interchangeable.
2. In accordance with UL 57.
3. Materials:
a. Steel:
(1) Sheet: ASTM A507,22-gauge minimum
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
(2) Bar: ASTM A575.
b. Steel pipe: ASTM A53,Type S.
c. Stainless steel-
(1) Sheet: ASTM A167,22-gauge minimum.
(2) Bar: ASTM A276,Type 316.
(3) Finish: AISI Alloy 304,NAAMM Finish No.4,unless otherwise shown.
r.
d. Aluminum: Alloy as recommended by manufacturer,unless otherwise shown or
specified.
(1) Sheet and plate: ASTM B209.
(2) Extrusion: ASTM B221, 0.109 inch minimum thickness,unless otherwise
shown.
(3) Cast:
(a) Die cast: ASTM B85, 0.1875 inch minimum thickness, unless
otherwise shown.
(b) Sand cast: ASTM B26, 0.1875 inch minimum thickness, unless
otherwise shown.
4. Lamps:
a. In accordance with applicable ANSI Standards.
b. Metal-halide:
(1) Wattage: As shown.
(2) Size: As shown.
(3) Color: Clear unless otherwise noted.
(4) Lamp operating position: As shown.
(5) Base: Mogul.
(6) Rated life:
(a) 175 watts: 10,000 hours.
(b) 250 watts: 10,000 hours. ®
(c) 400 watts: 20,000 hours.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
(d) 1,000 watts: 12,000 hours.
5. Lampholders for Metal Halide:
a. In accordance with UL 496.
b. Black or white thermosetting phenolic compound,glazed porcelain,or neoprene base
and body as shown. Neoprene unit molded in one piece,weatherproof,oil-resistant,
with vibration-absorbing socket construction.
m c. Metal Halide:
(1) Rated 660 watts,600 volts: Medium screw base.
(2) Rated 1,500 watts,600 volts: Mogul screw base.
d. Provide mechanical self-retaining neoprene gasket for dust and moistureproof seal
between lamp and lampholder.
6. Ballasts for Metal Halide Lamps:
a. UL 1029,high power factor type.
b. Operable on 120 volts or 277 volts,60 Hertz as shown or necessary,type and rating
suitable for associated lamp.
c. Capable of starting lamp at ambient temperature range of 0 deg.F to 115 deg.F.
d. Equip with individual fuse protection installed in ballast compaAment of fixture.
7. Fixture body and housing: Shape size and material as shown.
8. Reflector: Shape, size,and material as shown. Aluminum or stainless steel polished to
mirror finish unless otherwise shown. Minimum thickness 22- gauge unless otherwise
shown.
9. Fixture wire: Per National Electrical Code,suitable for maximum temperature of fixture
operating in 115 deg.F ambient.
10. Gasket:
a. Keyed gasket: One-piece extruded solid neoprene having Shore A durometer hardness
of 30 plus or minus five when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
b. Self-retaining gasket:
(1) One-piece,extruded EPDM molded gasket.
(2) Resistantto aging,heat,ultra-violet light,water,oil,weathering,and setting as
determined by ASTM D1056,NEMA 12.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
(3) Cementedto componentwith resilientneoprene sealingcompound compatible
with finish. Adhesive not applied to diffuser.
c. Silicone gasket equal to neoprene,at Contractor's option.
d. Provide gaskets for fixtures located in tunnels having UL labeling for wet locations and
able to withstand water hose spray cleaning with 100 psi water pressure.
11. Hardware:
a. Latches,catches,release mechanism,hinges,screws,bolts,studs,nuts,rivets,washers, �-
and springs. Heavy-duty stainless steel or bronze,as shown.
b. Latches and catches: Captive type.
c. Operating hardware: Self-retaining type.
12. Construction:
a. Fixture body, reflectors,wiring channels, end caps, and castings formed to prevent
buckling or distortion.
b. Minimum of two wire clipsprovided in wiring channel to support wiring.
c. Seams and joints continuously welded and ground smooth.
d. When aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metal, separate contact surfaces with
gasket,nonabsorptive tape,or coating to prevent corrosion.
13. Finish:
Electrostaticpowder coating: Prepare surfaces by sandblast cleaning complying with SSPC
SP-10 near white blast cleaning,applying coating promptly after cleaning. Ground material
to be coated. Apply coating as electrostatically-charged dry powder using electrostatic spray -
gun to produce DFT of six mils plus or minus two mils. Cure by heat treatment.
14. Mark each fixture and its components in accordance with applicable reference standard.
15. Fasteners: Size and type shown or as approvel by Owner's Representative.
a. Expansion anchors: FS FF-S-325,Group II,Type 3,Class 1,stainless steel,Type 303.
b. Toggle bolts: FS FIS-B-588C.
c. Powder-actuated: FS FF P-395B.
B. General Requirements for Mounting Poles Where Called For:
1. Mounting poles:
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
Steel,straight,round,and as shown. Complete assembly of anchor bolts,pole,arms,and
luminaire designed to withstand wind pressure(P)developed by wind speed(V)of 80 MPH,
in accordance with AASHTO LTS 1. Pole assembly to be designed in accordance with
AASHTO requirements for permissible stresses,deflection,vibration,and fatigue.Ratio of
deflection to pole height under action of applicable static loading not to exceed 1/60.
2. Grout: Section 03300,"CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE",nonshrink. Where recommended
by manufacturer,prime surfaces to be grouted.
C. General Requirements for Control Devices:
The Contractor shall provide the following where called for:
1. Lighting Contactors:
a. UL 508,electricallyheld(unless noted otherwise),equipped with silveralloy contacts,
designed to control incandescent, tungsten, halogen, fluorescent, high-intensity
discharge lamp load.
b. Number of poles: As shown.
c. Continuous current rating: As shown.
d. Line and load voltage: 480 or 208 volts three-phase ac, or 277 or 120 volts
single-phase ac,60 Hertz as shown.
e. Control coil rated 120 volts ac,60 Hertz.
f. Control:
(1) Heavy duty three-position, selector switch with positions labeled
HAND/OFF/AUTO for lights controlled by photo-electric cell and/or time
clock.
(2) ON-OFF switch for indoor lights.
g. Enclosure: NEMA 1; fabricated from steel, cleaned, degreased, primed with zinc
primer and finished with light gray enamel,ANSI Z55.1,Color 61;minimum dry film
thickness,two mils.
2. Photoelectric Control Where Called For:
a. UL 773, designed to respond to natural daylight with 15-second inherent delay to
prevent functioningdue to sudden bright light such as vehicle lights or lightning and to
operate in ambient temperaturefrom 0 deg.F to 125 deg.F.
b. Adjust to turn lights ON at two plus or minus one foot-candles, unless otherwise
specified. ON to OFF ratio: One to three.
c. Rating: 1800 VA at 120 volts or 277 volts, 60 Hertz,as shown.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-7
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
d. Contacts: SPDT;one NC,one NO.
e. Cells: Hermetically sealed.
f. Enclosure: Weatherproofand tamperproofaluminum enclosure equipped with locking
receptacleswhen mounted on fixture or designed for mounting on outlet box as shown
and as necessary.
3. Limit Switches Where Called For:
a. NEMA ICS 2-225, industrial-control.
b. Suitable for mounting in folding gate cabinet. Switch contacts closed when cabinet
door is fully closed and latched. Switch contacts opened when respective cabinet door
is not fully closed.
c. Voltage rating: 120 volts ac. „
d. Current rating: 10 amperes continuous.
e. Enclosure: NEMA 13. -'
f. Actuator: Lever-operated and adjustable,with spring return.
g. Mounting: Plug-in type with receptacle tapped for conduit size as shown.
h. Contacts: Single-pole double-throw;one NO,one NC;snap action. -,
4. Time Switch:
a. Seven-day calendar-dial time switch,UL-listed,heavy-duty type suitable for controlling
type of lighting fixtures shown.
b. Type: As shown, with contacts capable of switching continuous load of 20 or 40
amperes per pole at 120 or 277 volts as required.
c. Providing up to four automatic ON/OFF operations each day. -m
d. Removable ON/OFF trippers designed for minimum ON period of one hour and
minimum two-hour period between one OFF operation and next ON operation.
e. Provision for manual ON and OFF operation of switch by hand without disturbing
weekly preset schedule.
f. Provision for omitting operation of switch on selected days.
g. Provide only if called for on drawings or in other specifications: spring-driven reserve
power suitable for operation of switch for 16 hours minimum after failure of power on -.
restoration of power,switch transfers to synchronous motor drive and automatically
rewinds spring.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-8
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
h. Terminals designed to accommodate up to 8AWG conductor cable.
i. Operation at 480Y/277 or 208Y/120 volts,60 Hertz as shown and within temperature
range of 0 deg.F to plus 140 deg.F(indoor)and 0 deg.F to plus 160 deg.F(outdoor).
j. Enclosure:
(1) NEMA 1, steel,surface-mounted,unless otherwise noted.
(2) Hinged flush front door with catches and spring loaded door pull.
(3) Finish: Metallic surfaces cleaned and degreased,primed with zinc primer and
finished with one coat of light gray enamel,ANSI Z55.1,Color 61;minimum
dry film thickness,two mils.
5. Guards: Where called for on drawings provide metal guards(cast or fabricated of heavy
wire)to protect fixtures from physical damage. Guard shall be supplied by the supplier of
the fixture.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Lighting fixture types are shown on the drawings.
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures of types indicated at locations as follows:
1. Mount fixtures rigidly in place. Use expansion anchors and machine screws for concrete
surfaces and toggle bolts for hollow concrete masonry surfaces. Use appropriate fasteners
for attachment to other surfaces. Support lighting fixtures independent of suspended
acoustical panel ceiling systems.
2. Use stainless steel fasteners. Where a metal contacts concrete or a dissimilar metal,separate
contact surfaces with gasket,nonabsorptive tape,or bituminous coating to prevent corrosion.
3. Mount fixtures plumb,level,and in straight lines. Install stems of suspended fixtures plumb.
Group-mounted continuous rows of fluorescent fixtures to appear as one unit.
4. Install 12 inch minimum length of liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection between
fixture and outlet box unless otherwise shown. Use fixture wire from outlet box in branch
circuit to lighting fixture and connect fixtures to branch circuit in accordance with Section
16120, "WIRES AND CABLES".
5. Install chase nipple where fluorescent fixtures are installed in continuous groups.
6. Clean lamps, diffusers,globes,reflectors, and exposed-to-view surfaces of fixtures after
aiming and adjusting has been approved.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500-9
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
B. Installation of Pole-Mounted Fixtures Where Called For:
1. Form concrete base as shown,in accordance with Division 3,"CONCRETE". Use templates
provided by the pole manufacturer for setting anchor bolts.
2. Install mounting pole of type shown. Use double nuts to erect poles plumb. Pack void
between concrete base and pole base plate with nonshrink grout.
3. Install conductors,leaving 3 foot minimum lengths of conductors for fixture connections;
tape or otherwise secure in place pending final connection.
4. Install lighting fixtures in accordance with approved shop drawings.
5. Connect wiring using pressure connectors.
C. Install photoelectric controls and time switches as shown or in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Ground lighting fixtures, mounting poles, time switches, photoelectric controls, and lighting
contactor enclosures in accordance with NEC and Section 16450, "GROUNDING AND
BONDING".
E. Apply touch-up paint as per Section 09900, "PAINTING".
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Ensure that earth foundation for mounting poles is prepared and compacted in accordance with
Section 02220, "GRADING,EXCAVATING,AND BACKFILLING".
B. Testing:
1. Furnish necessary personnel and equipment and perform tests and adjustments in the
presence of the Owner's Representative. Schedule adjustment of exterior installations to
occur during hours of darkness.
2. Test lighting circuits for continuity and poper operation.
3. Test fixtures,mounting poles,and equipment enclosures for continuity of grounding system.
4. Aim and adjust fixtures to provide distribution pattern approximately as shown and as
approved.
5. Test time switches,control devices,and contactors for connection in accordance with wiring
diagram.
6. Check tightness of cable connections of time switches, lighting contactors,photoelectric
controls,and limit switches.
7. Test operations of circuits,control devices,and contactors.
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500- 10
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
S. Test footcandle levels with a precision light meterto assure that design requirements are met
in all areas. Pole lights will be measured at 4 equidistant points of 90 degree intervals
around the pole.
�)f
r
x.r
LIGHTING FIXTURES,MOUNTING POLES AND CONTROL DEVICES 16500- 11
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
SECTION 16721 -FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 --GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the minimum technical requirements for design,fabrication,testing,and
installation of fire alarm and detection system where required by National and local codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Electrical Systems-General: Section 16001.
3. Testing of Electrical Systems: Section 16030.
4. Conduits: Section 16111.
5. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.
6. Grounding and bonding: Section 16450.
C. Location of fire alarm control panel and fire management panel where required by National and
local codes and authorities having jurisdiction shall be directed by th®wner's Representative.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following Codes,Regulations,Reference Standards,and Specifications apply to work included
in this Section:
1. Codes and regulations of jurisdictional authorities.
2. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": Section 01090.
a. NEC.
b. NFPA: 72A, 72B,72C,72D, 72E, 72K 90A, 130.
c. UL: 38, 193,217,268,464,539, 864, 1480, 1481, 1730.
d. ANSI: Z.1.3.
e. UL Directories:
(1) Fire Protection Equipment directory
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 - 1
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
(2) Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment directory.
B. Experience:
1. Furnish products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire alarm and
detection systems.
2. Incorporate equipment into the system which duplicates equipment that has been in
satisfactory use for a period of five years prior to the Notice To Proceed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for approval in accordance with Section 01300, "WORK RELATED
SUBMITTALS",and with the additional requirements as specified for each.
A. Shop Drawings to show as a minimum:
1. Final layout drawings with outline dimensions.
2. Control,wiring,and connection diagrams.
3. Bill of materials .®
B. Certification of source quality control:
1. Provide certification that each piece of equipment meets the requirements of ANSI Z.1.3
quality assurance program and also satisfies safety related quality requirements imposed by
regulating agencies.
2. Perform design,production,and operational tests,and submit certified test reports for each
type of equipment.
3. Verify that each piece of equipment is in compliance with applicable codes,regulations,
standards,and UL listings.
4. Submit a certificate of approval from the local fire department.
C. Field Testing:
1. Submit a detailed plan of the proposed method and scheduling of the required field testing at
least 21 calendar days before initiating the tests.
2. Submit certified test reports of operational performance of fire alarm and detection system.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Training: In accordance with Section 16001,
"ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS-GENERAL".
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 -2
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
PART 2--PRODUCTS
~~ 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Provide a fire alarm control panel as required for a complete and functioning fire alarm detection
system.
B. The system shall be"two wire"with"end-of-line"device at the end of each circuit. Construct the
control panel with solid state electronic modules consisting of light emitting diode(LED)type high
contrast visual indicators and the following minimum features as required:
1. Initiation device circuits.
2. Alarm indicating circuits.
3. Supervised annunciator circuits.
4. Earth ground supervision circuits.
5. Form C alarm contacts(2.0 amps @ 24 VDC each).
6. Form C trouble contacts(2.0 amps @ 24 VDC each).
7. Set of dry contacts per zone(SPDT 2.0 amps @ 24 VDC each).
8. Automatic battery charger and sealed maintenance free storage battery with all required
devices providing 24 VDC,for 24 hours operation on loss of normal 120 volts,AC supply.
9. Supervised manual evacuation switch.
10. Form C output contact for remote station or local energy connection.
" 11. Provision for remote testing of the complete system.
12. Provision for remote transmission of alarms and indications from each subway station or a
facility using data transmission system and also remote automatic activation of alarm
devices.
2.2 FIRE MANAGEMENT PANEL
A. Provide a fire managementpanel as required for a complete and functioning system. Construct the
panel to graphically display each areaof the station or facility with zone annunciation devices.
B. Fabricate the fire management panel with the following features:
m 1. LED type visual indicators.
2. Display trouble and alarm for each initiated device.
3. Lamps behind graphic display.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 -3
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
4. Graphic display behind a clear plexiglass pane.
5. Key operated test switches.
6. Suitable for 24 hours operation after loss of normal 120 volts,AC Supply.
7. Color coded zones as indicated on the drawings.
C. Construct the panel to display the follovmg visual indications:
1. Zone in which fire alarm condition is detected.
2. Zone in which there is a malfunction of a detector circuit.
3. Malfunction of an audible alarm circuit.
4. AC power failure
5. Battery charger failure,battery voltage,andbattery current.
D. Provide space as shown on drawings for fire hot-line phone and public address microphone
equipment,as provided by others.
2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
Construct the manual stations to be double action type. Provide the stations with high impact
polycarbon or metallic,red enclosure with raised white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. Make
provisions for two separate and distinct actions to activate an alarm. Provide a common key to reset the
station.
2.4 FIXED TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
Provide plug-in,twist-lock type fixed temperature detectors to operate when air temperature exceeds 190
deg.F. Provide the unit with a high intensity LED alarm to remain lit after activation until manually
reset.
2.5 COMBINATION RATE OF RISE AND FIXED TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
A. Provide plug-in,twist lock type combination rate of rise and fixed temperature detectors to operate
when the rate of rise of the temperature exceeds 15 deg.F per minute,or the temperature of the
surrounding air exceeds 190 deg.F. Provide the unit a high intensity LED alarm to remain lit after
activation until manually reset.
B. Construct the detector with two independently operated thermal elements. Makthe rate-of-rise
element as self restoring and the fiord temperature element as nortrestorable.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 -4
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
2.6 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Provide plug-in, twist-lock type solid state photoelectric smoke detectors. Manufacture the
detector to operate on the light scattering photodiode principle. Fabricate the detector consisting of
head and mounting base. Use spring-type,self-wiping contacts between the base and the head.
Design the detector such that the removal of detector head causes the interruption of the
supervisory circuit of the alarm loop and also activtes a trouble signal.
B. Factory set the sensitivity of the detector. Ensure that the detector ignores invisible airborne
particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set alarm point. Ensure that the duct housing
couplings are slotted for proper alignment of the sampling and exhaust tubes. Provide an LED
visible through a transparent front cover.
C. Deliver duct smoke detector to the Contractor,who will install them.
2.7 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Provide solid-state,photoelectric type smoke detectors in accordance with UL 268. Provide a
locking screw to discourage unauthorized removal of the head from the base. Ensure that the
removal of the detectorhead causes the interruption of the supervisory circuit of the alarm loop and
also activates trouble signal.
B. Provide detectors with insect screens and completely closed backs to restrict entry of dust and air
turbulence. Ensure that the electronics of the unit are completely shielded to protect against false
alarms from electromagnetic and radio-frequency interferences.
C. Provide a red LED in each unit with a flashing status to indicate power on and a steady glow to
indicate alarm. Provide a functional test switch in each unit.
2.8 AUDIOVISUAL ALARMS
Provide horn/light combination units suitable for low voltage operation from the fire alarm panel.
Provide the horn output rating not less than 87 dBA,per UL 464,and not less than 15dB above ambient
noise level. Provide ared Xenon strobe light for visual signal. Ensure that the horn and light operate
only when a fire alarm signal is annunciated. Provide weatherproof enclosures installed outdoors or
below grade.
2.9 WATER FLOW SWITCHES
For water flow switches,refer to Section 15300, "FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS".
2.10 SPRINKLER VALVE TAMPER SWITCHES
Provide sprinklervalve tamper switches consisting of an acid proof cast aluminum housing with nickel
-• plated parts to resist corrosion. Provide supervision for cover removal. Provide with one set of single
pole,double throw micro-switches. Refer to Section 15300, "FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS".
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 -5
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
PART 3 --EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install the fire alarm and detection system in accordance with the drawings,Specifications,all applicable
codes,manufacturer's recommendations,and w1k the following requirements:
A. Install all wiring in accordance with NEC.
B. Paint all junction and pull boxes red and label FIRE ALARM.
C. Connect the fire alarm and detection system to 120 volts,AC,single phase,power supply.
D. Connect all alarms and indications to interface terminal blocks.
E. Coordinate the installation with other pertinent systems.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Prior to field testing check equipment installation in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and including verification of the following:
1. Connection of circuits in accordance with wiring diagrams.
2. Tightness of wire,cable,conduits,and terminal blocks.
B. Field Testing:
1. Refer to Section 16030, "TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS".
2. Provide service of manufacturer's engineering representative and supporting field crew
during test. Conduct tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative and local fire
marshall.
3. Furnish equipment to perform tests. -
4. Test the completed syAem in accordance with NFPA.
5. Test each device and equipment individually for its operational performance.
6. Test that in the event of loss of normal 120 volts,AC power supply,storage batteries are
capable of supplying power to the complete system&24 hours in stand by mode.
7. Test each output and input circuit to and from the remote terminal unit(RTU).
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721 -6
FORT WORTH BOTANICAL GARDENS GREENHOUSE FACILITY
CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (LUMP SUM)
F THE STATE OF TEXAS
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT
` This agreement made and entered into this the 19"' day of January A.D., 2006, by and between the
CITY OF FORT WORTH, a municipal corporation of Tarrant County, Texas, organized and existing under
and by virtue of a special charter adopted by the qualified voters within said City on the 11th day of
December, A.D. 1924, under the authority (vested in said voters by the "Home Rule" provision) of the
Constitution of Texas, and in accordance with a resolution duly passed at a regular meeting of the City
Council of said City, hereinafter called OWNER, and Prime Construction Company of the City of
- Arlington, County of Tarrant, State of Texas, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be
made and performed by the Owner, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date
herewith, the said Contractor hereby agrees with the said Owner to commence and complete the
construction of certain improvements described as follows:
BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE
3220 BOTANIC GARDEN BOULEVARD
FORT WORTH, TEXAS
That the work herein contemplated shall consist of furnishing as an independent contractor all labor, tools,
appliances and materials necessary for the construction and completion of said project in accordance with
7 the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents adopted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,
which Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents are hereto attached and made a part of this
contract the same as if written herein.
The Contractor hereby agrees and binds himself to commence the construction of said work within ten (10)
days after being notified in writing to do so by the Owner.
City agrees and binds itself to pay, and the said Contractor agrees to receive, for all of the aforesaid work,
and for stated additions thereto or deductions therefrom, the price shown on the Proposal submitted by the
successful bidder hereto attached and made a part hereof. Payment will be made in monthly installments
upon actual work completed by contractor and accepted by the Owner and receipt of invoice from the
Contractor.
The agreed upon total contract amount shall be $1,131,033.00 and includes the base bid and Alternates
#1. #2, and #3. Contractor agrees to complete the project, suitable for occupancy and beneficial use, within
160 calendar days.
Insurance Requirements:
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until it has obtained all insurance
required under the Contract Documents, and the Owner has approved such insurance. The
Contractor shall be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub-contractors' certificates of
_ insurance for approval. The Contractor shall indicate on its certificate of insurance included in the
documents for execution whether or not its insurance covers subcontractors. It is the intention of the
Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all subcontractors
a. WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE:
• Statutory limits
• Employer's liability
• $100,000 disease each employee
• $500,000 disease policy limit
• $100,000 each accident
b. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall procure and shall
maintain during the life of this contract public liability insurance coverage in the form of a
Commercial General Liability insurance policy to cover bodily injury, including death, and property
damage at the following limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate limit.
• The insurance shall be provided on a project speck basis and shall be endorsed
accordingly.
• The insurance shall include, but not be limited to, contingent liability for independent
contractors, XCU coverage, and contractual liability.
c: BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY:
• $1,000,000 each accident
• The policy shall cover any auto used in the course of the project
d: BUILDER'S RISK OR INSTALLATION FLOATER: This insurance shall be applicable
according to the property risks associated with the project and commensurate with the contractual
obligations specked in the contract documents.
e. EXCESS LIABILITY UMBRELLA
® • $1,000,000 each occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit.
• This insurance shall provide excess coverage over each line of liability insurance
required herein. The policy shall follow the form(s) of the underlying policies.
f. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the above
paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively,
against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such
operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it, against any insurable
hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract.
g. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with
satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts
_. and by insurance carriers satisfactory to the Owner. The form to be used shall be the current Accord
certificate of insurance form or such other form as the Owner may in its sole discretion deem
acceptable. All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-
contractors, should the Contractor's insurance not cover the subcontractor's work operations
performed in the course of this contracted project.
ADDITIONAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
a. The Owner, its officers, employees and servants shall be endorsed as an additional insured
on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under
Contractor's workers' compensation insurance policy.
b. Certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the City of Fort Worth, contract administrator in
the respective department as specified in the bid documents, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth,
TX 76102, prior to commencement of work on the contracted project.
C. Any failure on part of the Owner to request required insurance documentation shall not
constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein.
d. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner a minimum thirty days notice
of cancellation, non-renewal, and/or material change in policy terms or coverage. A ten days notice
shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of premium.
e. Insurers must be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and have a current A.M.
Best rating of A:VII or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency.
f. Deductible limits, or self-funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000. per
occurrence unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
g. In lieu of traditional insurance, Owner may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment
measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The Owner must approve in writing any
alternative coverage.
h. Workers' compensation insurance policy(s) covering employees employed on the project
shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the Owner.
i. Owner shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for
contractor's insurance.
j. Contractor's insurance policies shall each be endorsed to provide that such insurance is
primary protection and any self-funded or commercial coverage maintained by Owner shall not be
called upon to contribute to loss recovery.
k. In the course of the project, Contractor shall report, in a timely manner, to Owner's officially
designated contract administrator any known loss occurrence which could give rise to a liability claim
or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss.
I. Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required
herein.
M. Upon the request of Owner, Contractor shall provide complete copies of all insurance
policies required by these contract documents.
If this Contract is in excess of $25,000, the Contractor shall provide a Payment Bond in the full amount of
the contract. If the contract is in excess of $100,000 Contractor shall provide both Payment and
Performance Bonds for the full amount of the contract. Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth
Permits and for any other permits required by this project. City of Fort Worth Permit fees are waived.
Separate permits will be required for each facility.
If the Contractor should fail to complete the work as set forth in the Plans and Specifications and Contract
, Documents within the time so stipulated, plus any additional time allowed as provided in the General Condi-
tions, there shall be deducted from any monies due or which may thereafter become due him, the liquidated
damages outlined in the General Conditions, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the Contractor
and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for such deficiency.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City of Fort Worth has caused this instrument to be signed in four
counterparts in its name and on its behalf by the City Manager and attested by its Secretary, with the
corporate seal of the City of Fort Worth attached. The Contractor has executed this instrument through its
duly authorized officers in six counterparts with its corporate seal attached.
Done in Fort Worth, Texas, this the 19"' day of January A.D., 2006.
AP V
B3: - _ By
-�
Jer4 F. Moody, President arc Ott 11
Prime Construction Company Assistant City Manager
APPROVAL REC DED: RECORDED:
By: By:
?-Robert Goode, Director Marty Hendrix
Transportation & Public Works Dept City Secretary
APPROVED AS CF� MM AND A
By: Dat
m Amy ams
ey
Assistant Cit Attorney
contrac` Authorizatiox
Mata
FOPIC!IAL
BOND # 4351391
PERFORMANCE BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
That we, (1) Prime Construction Company , as Principal
herein, and (2) SureTec Insurance Company
a corporation organized under the laws of the State of (3) Texas ,
and who is authorized to issue surety bonds in the State of Texas, Surety herein, are
held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in
Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the sum of One Million, One
Hundred Thirty One Thousand, Thirty Three Dollars and No Cents Dollars (
$1,131,033.00 ) for the payment of which sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee
dated the 19th day of January , 2006, a copy of which is attached hereto and
made a part hereof for all purposes, for the construction of BOTANIC GARDEN
GREENHOUSE, 3220 BOTANIC GARDEN BOULEVARD, FORT WORTH, TEXAS
Proiect No. GC05-080050410410; C181-080181048350.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, if the said Principal
shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and
contract documents and shall fully indemnify and hold harmless the Obligee from all
costs and damages which Obligee may suffer by reason of Principal's default, and
reimburse and repay Obligee for all outlay and expense that Obligee may incur in
making good such default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full
force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of
the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
m determined in accordance with the provisions of such statute, to the same extent as if it
were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal
and the Surety have executed this instrument.
SIGNED and SEALED this 19th day of January , 2006.
#
PQIm� CoNsreucro� G0.,W,0ANY
PRINCIPAL
# ATTEST: By:
1
# / Name: � F o0
{Pran 4 ) Secretary p
Title: S4-
(8 E i4.L) Address: OD/ ✓ALc.4s1 b9i of,, Su o nj 10 t
A►eL11V6Tiw, -re-or ?*avl
Witness a to Principal
SureTec Insurance Company
SURETY
ATTEST: By�'5���
Name: Staci Gross
Secretary Attorney in Fact
IS E A L) Address:
5000 Plaza on the Lake, Suite 290
Austin, TX 78746
-
Witr as to Sure y Telephone Number: (512) 732-0099
NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor).
(2) Correct name of Surety.
(3) State of incorporation of Surety
Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of
Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact.
The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract.
POA#: 4221151
SureTec Insurance Company
LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know AU Men by These Presents, That SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY (the "Company"), a corporation duly organized and
existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its principal office in Houston, Harris County, Texas, does by these presents
make,constitute and appoint Steven E.Burleson,Donal E.Boley,George S.Deal,Staci J.Gross
Of Wichita Facia Texas its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-fact,with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,place and stead,to
execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to
include waivers to the conditions of contracts and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed
Five Million and no/100 Dollars($5,000,00.00)
., and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President,sealed with the corporate
seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary,hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do in the
premises. Said appointment shall continue in force until June 30,2007 and is made under and by authority of the following
resolutions of the Board of Directors of the SureTec Insurance Company:
Be it Resolved,that the President,any Vice-President,any Assistant Vice-President,any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is
hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on
behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions:
Attorney-in-Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and of behalf of the Company,to execute,acknowledge and
®" deliver,any and all bonds,recognizances,contracts,agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such
Attomey-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary.
Be it Resolved,that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or
® any certificate relating thereto by facsimile,and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid
and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. (Adopted at a meeting held on 20 ojApril,
1999)
In Witness Whereof,SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its President,and its corporate seal
to be hereto affixed this 20th day of June,A.D.2005.
S�taAN�F VKing, re
CE COMPANY
.,;°� By,
I ar
State of Texas ss: 7s uu ,��
County of Hams -• ''
On this 20th day of June,A.D. 2005 before me personally came Bill King, to me known,who,being by me duly swom,did depose and say,that he
resides in Houston,Texas, that he is President of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY, the company described in and which executed the above
instrument;that he knows the seal of said Company;that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was so affixed by order of the
Board of Directors of said Company,and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
Michelle Denny
90I9 Of Texas
,r MN COnntnlli W Michelle Denny.Notary Pub c
August 27,260$ My commission expires August 27,2008
I,M.Brent Beaty,Assistant Secretary of SURETEC INSURANCE COMPANY,do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy
of a Power of Attorney,executed by said Company,which is still in full force and effect;and furthermore,the resolutions of the Board of Directors,set
out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect.
Given under my hand and the seal of said Compauy at Houston,Texas this 19th day o f January 2006 ,A.D.
M.Brent Beaty,Assistant Se re ry
Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity.
For verification of the authority of this power you may call(713)812-0800 any business day between 8:00 am and 5:00 pm CST.
dw -
SureTec Insurance Company
THIS BOND RIDER CONTAINS IMPORTANT COVERAGE INFORMATION
Statutory Complaint Notice
To obtain information or make a complaint: You may call the Surety's toll free telephone
number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-866-732-0099. You may also write to the
Surety at:
SureTec Insurance Company
5000 Plaza on the Lake, Suite 290
W Austin, TX 78746
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverage, rights or complaints at 1-800-252-3439. You may write the Texas Department of
Insurance at
PO Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
Fax#: 512-475-1771
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or
about a claim, you should contact the Surety first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may
contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Terrorism Risks Exclusion
The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety shall
not be liable for, losses caused by acts of terrorism, riot, civil insurrection, or acts of war.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exclusion of Liability for
Mold, Mycotoxins, Fungi & Environmental Hazards
The Bond to which this Rider is attached does not provide coverage for, and the surety
thereon shall not be liable for, molds, living or dead fungi, bacteria, allergens, histamines,
spores, hyphae, or mycotoxins, or their related products or parts, nor for any environmental
hazards, bio-hazards, hazardous materials, environmental spills, contamination, or cleanup,
nor the remediation thereof, nor the consequences to persons, property, or the performance
of the bonded obligations, of the occurrence, existence, or appearance thereof.
Texas Rider 010106 1
BOND # 4351391
PAYMENT BOND
m THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
That we, (1) Prime Construction Company , as Principal
herein, and (2) SureTec Insurance Company ,
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of(3) Texas ,
as surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation
located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the amount of One
Million, One Hundred Thirty One Thousand, Thirty Three Dollars and No Cents
Dollars ( $1,131,033.00 ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind
themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly
and severally, firmly by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the
Obligee dated the 19th I day of January , 2006, which contract is hereby referred to
and made a part hereof as if fully and to the same extent as if copied at length, for the
following project: BOTANIC GARDEN GREENHOUSE, 3220 BOTANIC GARDEN
BOULEVARD, FORT WORTH, TEXAS Project No. GC05-080050410410: C181-
080181048350.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully make payment to each and every claimant (as defined
in Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code, as amended) supplying labor or materials in
the prosecution of the work under the contract, then this obligation shall be void;
® otherwise, to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of
the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said statute, to the same extent as if it
were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal
and the Surety have executed this instrument.
SIGNED and SEALED this 19"' day of January , 2006.
P2im Co,vsraevrnoA) 4 2P0
PRINCIPAL
ATTEST: By: Q92
It If
Name: --'-2—xeizv IV64
_ 4icipal}�cretary
Title: -FkayDw%
(SAE A1� Address: 8)y) Vag l)'ew'f SU)n Joh
A24 AA;-10A.) ,%X 76,cv/
Witness as to P cipal
SureTec Insurance Company
"- SURETY
ATTEST: By(2; L . /,J/'c�
Name: Staci Gross
Secretary Attorney in Fact
(S:E A L) Address:
5000 Plaza on the Lake, Suite 290
Austin, TX 78746
Witne s s to Surety Telephone Number: (512) 732-0099
NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor).
(2) Correct name of Surety.
(3) State of incorporation of Surety
Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of
Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact.
The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract.
A
* , ;..�`��• 1�:,....`� � N.J• ♦ ♦V'��``�...✓ Ili
i
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH
WORKERS' COMPENSATION LAW
Pursuant to V.T.CA. Labor Code §406.96 (2000 , as amended, Contractor certifies that
it provides workers' compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed
on City of Fort Worth Project Botanic Garden Greenhouse. 3220 Botanic Garden
Boulevard, Fort Worth, Texas and City of Fort Worth Project No. GC05-
080050410410; C181-080181048350.
CONTRACTOR: /
1 aWici C0NS7-nve-Tio&) LO01,1P4m
By:
Name: �F Rx
Title: r2�roi
Date: Z Z 0 Co
STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
Before me, the undersigned uthorit „ on this ay personally appeared
known to me to be the person whose ame i subscrib4 to the foregoing instrument,
and acknowledged to me that he executed, the same as the pact and deed of
lisQuiC4-af �4 I'� �(Y1C� (1Cn�r�: c
for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated.
Given Under My Hand and Seal of Office this day of 120
` Y PUe.. '✓'
zo
N }T tary Pu li in and for t e State of
r9lF of�S Texas